IDEC SmartAXIS Touch FT1A Series User Manual Download Page 1089 | Manualshive

Page: 1089 / 1232

background image

SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual

24-23

2 Monitoring on the Touch

24

Monitor

Func

tion

2.3 Ladder Monitor

This function displays the ladder program along with execution states. This enables you to visually understand the
states of the ladder program. The Ladder Monitor can only be used when ladder program is selected as the
programming language for control function. For details, refer to Chapter 2 in the "SmartAXIS Ladder Programming
Manual".

●

Displaying Ladder Monitor

Use the Goto Screen Button, the Goto Screen Command, or the follow method to display the Ladder Monitor.

1

Press the upper-left corner of the screen on the Touch for 3 seconds or more.
The Maintenance Screen is displayed.

2

Press

Ladder Monitor

.

The select line screen is displayed.

3

Press

Last Monitored Line

or

Go To ...

.

Select

Last Monitored Line

to display the Ladder Monitor and start the monitor from the last monitored line.

Select

Go To ...

to display the Go To screen. Enter the desired line and press to display the Ladder Monitor and

start the monitor from the specified line.

●

Moving the focus

1

The Ladder Monitor is displayed.
Use the Goto Screen Button, the Goto Screen Command, or the Maintenance Screen to display the Ladder Monitor.

2

Press , , , and to move the focus to the desired position.
Press and hold to repeatedly move the focus.

●

Displaying instruction parameters

1

The Ladder Monitor is displayed.
Use the Goto Screen Button, the Goto Screen Command, or the Maintenance Screen to display the Ladder Monitor.

2

Press , , , and to move the focus to the desired instruction.

3

Press .
The detailed information screen is displayed.

4

Press .
Closes the detailed information screen.

Press and hold three

or more seconds

Touch

If a password has been configured for the project data, the Enter Password screen will be displayed. Select
a user name and then enter a password. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security
Function” on page 21-1.

When the following operations are performed,

Last Monitored Line

is reset to the first line of the ladder

program.

• The power is turned on.
• The project is downloaded.

↑

↑

↑

↑

↑

↑

↑

↑

«
...
1087
1088
1089
1090
1091
...
»

Summary of Contents for SmartAXIS Touch FT1A Series

Page 1: ...FT1A Series FT9Y B1390 4 SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual ...

Page 2: ...on removal wiring maintenance and inspection of the SmartAXIS FT1A 12RA FT1A 14KA and FT1A 14SA Failure to turn power off may cause electrical shock or fire hazard Special expertise is required to install wire configure and operate the SmartAXIS FT1A 12RA FT1A 14KA and FT1A 14SA People without such expertise must not use the SmartAXIS FT1A 12RA FT1A 14KA and FT1A 14SA The SmartAXIS FT1A 12RA FT1A ...

Page 3: ... before starting and stopping the SmartAXIS FT1A 12RA FT1A 14KA and FT1A 14SA Incorrect operation of the SmartAXIS FT1A 12RA FT1A 14KA and FT1A 14SA may cause mechanical damage or accidents Use the SmartAXIS FT1A 12RA FT1A 14KA and FT1A 14SA in a local area network if you download or upload the project data via the Ethernet port The touch panel of the SmartAXIS FT1A 12RA FT1A 14KA and FT1A 14SA is...

Page 4: ...ible standards This product adheres to the laws and compatible standards of all countries involved as shown below European laws and standards This product complies with the following EU directives Low Voltage Directive EMC Directive To comply with these directives this product has been designed and evaluated on the basis of the following international and European standard IEC EN 61131 2 2007 excl...

Page 5: ... SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual Type No References Content FT9Y B1390 SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual This document Describes the hardware specifications of the SmartAXIS FT1A 12RA FT1A 14KA and FT1A 14SA FT9Y B1382 SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual Describes basic operations for ladder programming instructions for monitoring on the SmartAXIS available devices and instruction lists and details o...

Page 6: ... requires special attention Failure to operate the product in accordance with the information provided can lead to serious injury or damage F Indicates the chapter page of related reference information OK Screen buttons are indicated by bold text or by using the actual graphic icon SHIFT Keyboard keys are indicated by the keyboard inscription in capital letters or enclosed in square brackets Contr...

Page 7: ... with high speed communication of 115 200bps O I Link Master The Touch unit that is directly connected to external device on the O I Link network O I Link Slave The Touch units that are not directly connected to external device on the O I Link network WindO I NV3 Software for creating projects and data of the Touch WindLDR This is the editor for the control functions of the Touch It is launched fr...

Page 8: ...amp commands etc Object Define as combination of Drawings and Parts placed on WindO I NV3 edit screen Touch Switch A part that operates a function by pressing parts that have been placed on the screen Standard Keypad Keypad that is displayed when operating Numerical and Character Input parts when Standard is selected under Type in the Keypad menu for Numerical and Character Input parts Keep Device...

Page 9: ... WindO I NV3 Specifications 2 1 1 1 Minimum System Requirements 2 1 1 2 Available Data 2 2 1 3 Available Text 2 6 1 4 Available Number of Colors 2 19 1 5 Available Image Files 2 19 2 Starting and Exiting WindO I NV3 2 34 2 1 Starting WindO I NV3 2 34 2 2 Exiting WindO I NV3 2 36 3 Configuration Functions 2 37 3 1 Application Menu Command List 2 38 3 2 Quick Access Toolbar 2 39 3 3 Ribbon Command L...

Page 10: ...nput 3 49 4 4 Run Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error 3 51 4 5 Run Stop Selection at Power Up 3 52 4 6 Keep and Clear Control Devices 3 53 4 7 High Speed Counter 3 55 4 8 Catch Input 3 72 4 9 Interrupt Input 3 74 4 10 Frequency Measurement 3 77 4 11 Input Filter 3 79 4 12 Analog Input 3 81 4 13 Timer Interrupt 3 84 4 14 Analog Output 3 86 4 15 Analog Cartridge 3 88 4 16 Ladder Monitor 3 97 4 17 ...

Page 11: ...4 28 6 Using Library Screens 4 29 6 1 What You Can Do with Library Screens 4 29 6 2 Creating a Library Screen 4 30 6 3 Using a Library Screen 4 31 6 4 Deleting Library Screens 4 33 6 5 Exporting Library Screens 4 34 6 6 Importing Library Screens 4 35 Chapter 5 Drawings and Parts 1 Overview 5 1 2 Drawing Objects 5 2 2 1 Shapes 5 2 2 2 Picture 5 2 2 3 Text 5 2 3 Part Types 5 3 3 1 Buttons 5 3 3 2 La...

Page 12: ... Buttons 7 63 4 5 Key Browser 7 66 5 Multi Button 7 68 5 1 How the Multi Button is Used 7 68 5 2 Multi Button Configuration Procedure 7 69 5 3 Properties of Multi Button Dialog Box 7 70 6 Keypad 7 90 6 1 How the Keypad is Used 7 90 6 2 Keypad Configuration Procedure 7 91 6 3 Properties of Keypad Dialog Box 7 92 7 Selector Switch 7 94 7 1 How the Selector Switch is Used 7 94 7 2 Selector Switch Con...

Page 13: ...ethod 9 69 5 Message Switching Display 9 70 5 1 How the Message Switching Display is Used 9 70 5 2 Message Switching Display Configuration Procedure 9 71 5 3 Properties of Message Switching Display Dialog Box 9 72 6 Alarm List Display 9 83 6 1 How the Alarm List Display is Used 9 83 6 2 Alarm List Display Configuration Procedure 9 84 6 3 Properties of Alarm List Display Dialog Box 9 85 7 Alarm Log...

Page 14: ...creen Command 11 18 3 1 How the Goto Screen Command is Used 11 18 3 2 Goto Screen Command Configuration Procedure 11 19 3 3 Properties of Goto Screen Command Dialog Box 11 20 4 Script Command 11 25 4 1 How the Script Command is Used 11 25 4 2 Script Command Configuration Procedure 11 26 4 3 Properties of Script Command Dialog Box 11 27 5 Multi Command 11 31 5 1 How the Multi Command is Used 11 31 ...

Page 15: ... Overview 14 1 1 1 How the Data Log Function is Used 14 1 1 2 Sampling Values of Devices 14 3 1 3 Data Configuration 14 5 1 4 Saving and Deleting Data 14 6 1 5 Using the Data 14 7 2 Data Log Function Configuration Procedure 14 8 2 1 Configuring the Sampling Condition and Devices for Sampling Data 14 8 3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box 14 12 3 1 Data Log Settings Dialog Box 14 12 3 2 Individual Settin...

Page 16: ...nted Operation Count on a Numerical Display 17 11 4 2 Notifying with a Beep when the Counted Operation Time Reaches the Threshold 17 14 Chapter 18 Recipe Function 1 Overview 18 1 1 1 How the Recipe Function is Used 18 1 1 2 Data for Recipes 18 2 1 3 Data Configuration 18 3 2 Recipe Function Configuration Procedure 18 4 2 1 Configuring Recipe Function Operations and Devices 18 4 3 Recipe Settings D...

Page 17: ...ators 20 32 5 6 Bit Functions 20 34 5 7 Word Functions 20 35 6 Important Notes 20 51 6 1 Important Notes Regarding the While Definition 20 51 6 2 Number of Devices That Can Be Used 20 51 6 3 Write Delay 20 52 6 4 About the Priority of the Operator 20 53 Chapter 21 User Accounts and the Security Function 1 Overview 21 1 1 1 User Accounts 21 1 1 2 Protecting Data 21 2 1 3 Protecting Displays and Ope...

Page 18: ... Touch 23 11 2 2 Download Dialog Box 23 13 2 3 Downloading Files to an External Memory Inserted in the Touch 23 16 3 Uploading 23 18 3 1 Upload Project Data from the Touch 23 18 3 2 Upload Dialog Box 23 21 4 Clear 23 22 4 1 Clear Data from the Touch 23 22 4 2 Deleting Data from an External Memory Inserted in the Touch 23 24 5 Formatting 23 26 5 1 Formatting an External Memory Inserted in the Touch...

Page 19: ...p Screen Function 26 15 1 9 Precautions 26 17 2 USB Autorun Function 26 18 2 1 Overview of the USB Autorun Function 26 18 2 2 USB Autorun Function Configuration Procedure 26 19 2 3 Creating a USB Autorun Definition File 26 22 2 4 USB Autorun Function Security 26 26 Chapter 27 Internal Devices 1 Bit Devices 27 1 1 1 HMI Device Addresses 27 1 1 2 Control Device Addresses 27 4 2 Word Devices 27 9 2 1...

Page 20: ...s 30 1 1 1 Errors Displayed on the Screen 30 1 1 2 Low Battery Voltage 30 2 2 Error Information 30 3 2 1 General Error Codes 30 3 2 2 Program Execution Error 30 5 3 Handling Problems 30 6 3 1 When You Cannot Download Project Data 30 6 3 2 When the Backlight is OFF and the Buzzer Sounds 30 6 3 3 When a Problem Occurs with a Control Function 30 7 Appendix 1 Color Number Correspondence Table A 1 2 Vi...

Page 21: ...Contents SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual Preface 20 7 5 FBD Program Limitation A 15 8 USB Driver A 18 8 1 Installing the USB Driver A 18 8 2 Checking the USB Driver A 28 Index ...

Page 22: ...Contents Preface 21 SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual ...

Page 23: ...efers to FT1A Series SmartAXIS Touch For the SmartAXIS Pro and Lite refer to the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual The Touch is a small size programmable controller that is fully equipped with powerful basic functions various communication functions and HMI functions of an operator interface Use WindO I NV3 for creating and managing screens and data to used with the Touch 1 1 Type Numbers The notat...

Page 24: ... You can monitor and modify values of devices and monitor basic instructions Also by creating screens and programming control functions you can display the current time bar charts scrolling messages or simple text on the LCD screen 32 bit and Floating Point Data Types For arithmetic commands it is possible to unsigned 32 bit D double word and signed 32 bit L long arithmetic processes and floating ...

Page 25: ...tion for the Touch Reset input is a function to stop the ladder program or FBD program operation for the Touch and clear the value of control devices Any input terminal on the Touch can be designated as a stop or reset input to control the Touch operation Analog Input Analog input of 0 to 10V DC or 4 to 20 mA can be converted to a digital value of 0 to 1000 A maximum of two inputs can be used as a...

Page 26: ...ar Designation of Touch Data Internal relays shift register bits counter current values and data register values of the control devices can be designated to be kept or cleared when the Touch is powered down All or a specified range of these devices can be designated as keep or clear types RUN STOP Selection at Startup when Keep Data is Broken When data to be kept such as keep designated counter va...

Page 27: ...fying settings and creating screens and the ladder program or FBD program The set of data made up of settings created screens and ladder program or FBD program is called a project Using WindO I NV3 you create a project and then download it to the Touch to build the interface necessary for operation 2 About the WindO I NV3 Download Upload Download Upload Touch Computer USB flash drive ...

Page 28: ...ay the Maintenance screen and then press System Mode Using the screen switching button multi buttons screen switch or multi commands switch to the System Mode All data is cleared using WindO I NV3 Write the System Area 1 Display screen number address 0 to FFFFh Monitor Mode Monitor Mode is used for monitoring values of devices using WindO I NV3 While in Monitor mode the words Monitor mode flash at...

Page 29: ... at the top of the screen In addition error information is saved to a special data register By referring to this information and repeatedly correcting the project downloading and debugging the project can be completed 6 RUN Starting communication with the external device and execute various functions according to the project settings 4 Flow from Screen and Ladder Program or FBD Program Creation to...

Page 30: ...4 Flow from Screen and Ladder Program or FBD Program Creation to Run Operation 1 8 SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual ...

Page 31: ...aphics 1024x768 screen resolution Other Mouse CD ROM drive administrator account NET Framework 3 5 SP1 System requirements to connect a computer to Touch models with USB ports The computer must be running Windows XP Vista 32 bit version only or Windows 7 64 bit and 32 bit versions and must have a USB 1 1 2 0 port A USB driver must be installed when connecting the Touch to a computer with a USB cab...

Page 32: ...sign bit bit 15 is 1 the value is two s complement BIN32 Handled as an unsigned 32 bit integer with the starting address as the lower word BIN32 Handled as a signed 32 bit integer with the starting address as the lower word If the sign bit bit 31 is 1 the value is two s complement BCD4 Data is handled as a four digit 16 bit binary coded decimal value Each four bits from bit 0 to bit 11 is handled ...

Page 33: ... 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 2 2 The internal representation of float32 is described here but the data for float32 floating point real numbers is handled with a special bit configuration so do not directly access the bits Data type Storing 0FFF hex in LDR10 Storing FFFF hex in LDR10 BIN16 0FFF hex is handled as 4095 dec FFFF hex is handled as 65535 dec BIN16 0FFF hex is handled as 4095 dec Sign bit is 1 so FFFF...

Page 34: ...oring 0000 hex in LDR10 BFA0 hex in LDR11 float32 In the data types BIN32 BIN32 BCD8 and float32 two words upper word and lower word are used for a single value The Touch and external device communicate data in device addresses in one word units so when the upper word and lower word are sent in separate packets the value may have already changed when the data for both words is received which may c...

Page 35: ...ndirectly read and indirectly write Device configured as read source Device with actually read value Indirect value s device 200 LDR11 300 LDR12 100 LDR10 500 LDR14 4 D21 500 LDR200 4 words Indirect value Read LDR13 400 200 LDR101 300 LDR102 100 LDR100 1000 LDR103 3 D20 1000 LDR20 3 words Indirect value Device configured as write source Device with actually written value Indirect value s device Wr...

Page 36: ... 19 Text Group on page 19 1 Font Description Fonts installed in the Touch Fonts to be pre loaded on the Touch Japanese European Chinese Korean Taiwanese Central European Baltic and Cyrillic fonts can be installed on the Touch The installed fonts installed can be changed as needed using WindO I NV3 which helps save and efficiently operate the user capacity Windows Font All fonts used on the compute...

Page 37: ...hieve a sharper display of enlarged JIS level 2 kanji set Refer to High quality Fonts on page 2 10 Chinese GB2312 Chinese Korean KSC5601 Korean Taiwanese BIG5 Taiwanese European large font ISO 8859 1 Latin1 Install this font to achieve a sharper display of enlarged European fonts Refer to High quality Fonts on page 2 10 Central European ANSI1250 Czech Hungarian Polish Slovak Slovene Baltic ANSI125...

Page 38: ...y when the Use Text Manager check box is selected Parts Description Touch installed Font 1 Windows Font Buttons Bit Button YES YES Word Button YES YES Goto Screen Button YES YES Key Button YES YES Keypad YES YES Selector Switch YES YES 3 Lamps Pilot Lamp YES YES Multi State Lamp YES YES Data Displays Numerical Input YES NO Character Input YES NO Message Display YES YES 2 3 Message Switching Displa...

Page 39: ...NSI1251 6KB The download size of font data is adjusted in multiples of 128KB The download size of font data is 128KB when the font size is 0KB or 128KB and smaller Font Size Japanese large font first standard 477KB Chinese 238KB European large font 102KB Total size of the font data 817KB Download size of font data 896KB 817KB is adjusted in multiples of 128KB Font Size Chinese 238KB Korean 109KB T...

Page 40: ...load high quality fonts and select Use large font on the System tab in the Project Setting dialog box the Touch can replace some of the optional fonts with the high quality fonts Scaled text with a background color is replaced and displayed with these fonts for a more attractive look High quality European Font Display Size 8x16 W H 0 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 W H 1 7 8 0 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...

Page 41: ...rtAXIS Touch User s Manual 2 11 1 WindO I NV3 Specifications 2 WindO I NV3 Basic Operations High quality Japanese Font Display Size 8x16 W H 0 5 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 W H 1 7 8 0 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...

Page 42: ... 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 W H 1 7 8 0 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 When the high quality fonts have not been downloaded into the Touch the standard fonts are used even if Use large font is selected When the Character Input part display font size is 8x16 high quality fonts are not displayed even if Use large font is selected ...

Page 43: ... item and then click OK Font Select the font to use Font style Select italic bold or other style Size Select the size of the text Sample Shows a preview using the specified font Character Pitch Specify character spacing from 0 to 100 Space between lines Specify line spacing from 0 to 100 Script Select the character set code The right end of the text may have missing dots if Font style is set to It...

Page 44: ...art Part Location Text Properties of Text dialog box Bit Button Word Button Goto Screen Button Key Button Selector Switch Pilot Lamp Multi State Lamp Registration Text tab Keypad Properties of Keypad dialog box Message Display General tab Message Switching Display Message tab Bar Chart Line Chart Scale tab Using the Text ID for the Windows Font set in Text Manager disables these settings in the Pr...

Page 45: ... bits of the code are hexadecimal 1 Therefore the character code for a is as follows Applicable Drawings Text Applicable Parts Buttons Bit Button Word Button Goto Screen Button Key Button Keypad Lamps Pilot Lamp Multi State Lamp Part Location Text Properties of Text dialog box Bit Button Word Button Goto Screen Button Key Button Pilot Lamp Multi State Lamp Registration Text tab Keypad Properties o...

Page 46: ...1 WindO I NV3 Specifications 2 16 SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual European Font ISO 8859 1 Central European Font ANSI 1250 ...

Page 47: ...SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual 2 17 1 WindO I NV3 Specifications 2 WindO I NV3 Basic Operations Baltic Font ANSI 1257 Cyrillic Font ANSI 1251 ...

Page 48: ...1 WindO I NV3 Specifications 2 18 SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual Japanese Font JIS X0201 Control Codes Refer to the following table when using control codes in User Communications ...

Page 49: ...elements the following operations are displayed in Picture Manager On the View tab in the Workspace group click Picture Manager Double click Picture Manager in the Project window To set up the Picture from the Drawings click on the editing screen where the Picture is positioned to display Picture Manager If setting a graphic for a positioned object display Picture Manager from the Properties dialo...

Page 50: ...aving image files 1 Click Import in Picture Manager The Open dialog box is displayed 2 Specify the image file and then click Open When managing graphic elements by category click Create New Category to create a new category in the Category list and select it Detailed settings can be made using Options from the Open dialog box Click Options to toggle between showing and hiding the items For details...

Page 51: ... category a confirmation message to overwrite the file is displayed Click Yes to overwrite the image After overwriting the image is saved in the list of the selected category and the previous image is deleted from the list Example The graphic element Picture00 is saved in the category Pic_Lib If the graphic element Picture00 bmp is saved to the category NewBook1 the new image Picture00 is saved to...

Page 52: ...ries A list showing pictures in the category selected from Symbols is displayed When managing graphic elements by category click Create New Category to create a new category in the Category list and select it Click Options to display the Symbol Options dialog box which can be used to modify fill color and background color and to flip or rotate shapes The settings made here are applied to all the g...

Page 53: ...ick OK The graphic element is saved in Picture Manager You cannot use the following characters in the picture name Detailed settings can be made using Options from the Picture Name Setting dialog box Click Options to toggle between showing and hiding the items For details refer to Picture Name Setting dialog box on page 2 33 If a picture contains transparency or a picture is imported with the opti...

Page 54: ... Manager The Picture Name Setting dialog box is displayed 2 Enter the name of the drawing object in Picture Name The maximum number is 256 characters Grouped drawing objects can be saved to Picture Manager as a single picture You cannot use the following characters in the picture name Detailed settings can be made using Options from the Picture Name Setting dialog box Click Options to toggle betwe...

Page 55: ...ions 2 WindO I NV3 Basic Operations 3 Click OK The drawing object is saved in Picture Manager If a picture contains transparency or a picture is imported with the option of enabling the transparency the transparency range is displayed in magenta R 255 G 4 B 255 ...

Page 56: ...played 2 Specify the save location in Save in and then click Save The picture name is entered as File name When Picture Manager is called from the Properties dialog box of an object arranged on the screen Export is not enabled To select multiple pictures press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items To save as an image file in NMF NV Metafile format select and right click the dra...

Page 57: ... name is NewBookn n Number Delete Category Deletes a category from the category list Rename Category Changes the name of the category selected in the category list The maximum number is 256 characters Delete Deletes the picture selected in the picture list Pictures that are used in project or parts cannot be deleted Reduce Deletes all the pictures not used in the project from the pictures saved in...

Page 58: ...tion about pictures selected in the picture list Category The name of the category is displayed Image An image of the picture is displayed If a picture contains transparency or a picture is imported with the option of enabling the transparency the transparency range is displayed in magenta R 255 G 4 B 255 Picture Name The name of the picture is displayed When saving image files in DXF format take ...

Page 59: ... when they are saved Color Exchange Color before conversion Color after conversion Option items Selects this check box to convert the color of the picture From Specifies color before conversion Click this button to display the Color Settings dialog box Specify the color and then click OK to Selects the color after conversion color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click this button to display the Col...

Page 60: ...into categories Selects categories of pictures saved in Picture Manager Symbols The pictures in the selected category are displayed in a list Selects a picture saved in Picture Manager Copy Copy a picture selected from the Symbols to Picture Manager Click this button to display the Picture Name Setting dialog box Options Modify the fill and background color and flip or rotate shapes Click this but...

Page 61: ...he color selected in Fill Color for a 3D effect Solid The image is filled uniformly in the color selected in Fill Color Hollow All color is deleted Fill Color Selects the color used for Shaded or Solid modes Click this button to display the Color Settings dialog box Select a color from the Color Palette This option can only be set when Shaded or Solid are selected as the Fill Color Mode Shaded Sol...

Page 62: ...s the setting to close the Symbol Options dialog box Cancel Closes the Symbol Options dialog box without saving the setting Defaults Set options are returned to their default values Rotation Select from the following rotation methods 0 The image is not rotated 90 The image is rotated 90 counterclockwise 180 The image is rotated 180 counterclockwise 270 The image is rotated 270 counterclockwise 90 ...

Page 63: ...ick this button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Transparent can also be selected To make the background color of the picture saved from Symbol Factory transparent set Color Before Conversion and Background Color in the Symbol Options dialog box to R 254 G 254 B 254 When the monitor used for WindO I NV3 is a 16 bit color or 256 color display there is a risk that o...

Page 64: ...nd then click WindOI NV3 Windows XP Click Start click All Programs click Automation Organizer V2 click WindOI NV3 and then click WindOI NV3 Example Windows 7 WindO I NV3 starts If the User Account Control dialog box is displayed click Yes Windows 7 or Allow Windows Vista 2 Starting and Exiting WindO I NV3 Windows 7 Windows Vista You can also start WindO I NV3 by double clicking on the desktop ...

Page 65: ...ware Preference The Update Preference dialog box is displayed when this button is clicked To update information when WindO I NV3 starts check this check box The Automation Organizer Updater dialog box will be displayed when there is an update Close Closes the Automation Organizer Updater dialog box and start WindO I NV3 In order to display the Automation Organizer Updater dialog box your computer ...

Page 66: ...from the list and then click this button to open the project data The recovery data is deleted when the project data is saved Delete Deletes the recovery data Cancel Closes the Project Recovery dialog box Recovery data is not deleted The Project Recovery dialog box will be displayed again the next time WindO I NV3 starts 2 2 Exiting WindO I NV3 Click and then click Exit WindO I NV3 WindO I NV3 end...

Page 67: ...d into their own tabs so you can quickly execute For details refer to 3 3 Ribbon Command List on page 2 42 Workspace The workspace is the area where the Project window the Object List window the Screen List window the Part List window and the Toolbox window are located You can change the position and method for displaying windows in the workspace For details refer to 3 4 Windows Displayed in the W...

Page 68: ...d Other Formats Opens project data uploaded from a Touch with Downloader and project data saved in the Downloader format Save Saves the project data being edited Save As WindO I NV3 Project Saves the project data being edited with a new name Other Formats Converts the project data being edited to data that can be used with Downloader and saves it Print Prints the contents of the project data being...

Page 69: ...quick access toolbar If you click the Customize Quick Access Toolbar button the Customize Quick Access Toolbar menu is displayed You can change the quick access toolbar to any desired settings Changing the buttons displayed on the quick access toolbar Select only the buttons you want to display on the quick access toolbar More Commands You can add or delete quick access toolbar commands 1 Click on...

Page 70: ... Remove The command is deleted Show Below the Ribbon You can change the position of the quick access toolbar to be located below the ribbon Click on the quick access toolbar and then click Show Below the Ribbon If you right click a command on the quick access toolbar and click Remove from Quick Access Toolbar that quick access toolbar command can be deleted To change the order of the commands clic...

Page 71: ...can also change the quick access toolbar display position to be below the ribbon with the following methods Right click the quick access toolbar or the ribbon and then click Show Quick Access Toolbar Below the Ribbon Select the Show Quick Access Toolbar below the Ribbon check box on the Customize dialog box You can also return the quick access toolbar to its original position with the following me...

Page 72: ...n created Popup Screen Opens a Popup Screen that has already been created Library Screen Opens a Library Screen that has already been created Open Previous Screen Opens a screen number before the currently selected screen Open Next Screen Opens a screen number after the currently selected screen Delete Deletes the selected screen Reuse Copies another project s screens Command Description Shapes Li...

Page 73: ...cal Input Character Input Inserts a Character Input Picture Display Inserts a Picture Display Message Display Inserts a Message Display Message Switching Display Inserts a Message Switching Display Alarm List Display Inserts an Alarm List Display Alarm Log Display Inserts an Alarm Log Display Numerical Display Inserts a Numerical Display Calendar Inserts a Calendar Charts Bar Chart Inserts a Bar C...

Page 74: ...window AutoResize Automatically changes the text size to the object s size and display region Increment Address Enables or disables the increment address function A specific value is added to the value of the object s device address when pasting and duplicating parts Command Description Download Project Data Downloads project data to the Touch Files to External Memory Stops the Touch and then down...

Page 75: ...the Touch Files to External Memory Stops the Touch and then downloads Recipe files CSV file to the external memory inserted in the Touch The Touch resumes running when files have finished downloading Files to External Memory while running Downloads Recipe files CSV file to the external memory inserted in the Touch without stopping it Upload Project Data Uploads project data from the Touch Stored D...

Page 76: ...ely before the screen was changed with the Back command Go to Screen First Screen Switches to the Base Screen with the smallest screen number in the project data Previous Screen Switches to the Base Screen with a screen number one smaller than the Base Screen currently displayed If the screen numbers are not consecutive numbers this command switches to the closest number Screen Number Switches to ...

Page 77: ...r Input the Alarm List Display and the Alarm Log Display Comparison Result Shows the Comparison Result window This window displays the results of that comparison of projects Picture Manager Shows Picture Manager Manages the registered images for project use Text Manager Shows Text Manager Manages registered text which can be used for Text Part objects title of Popup Screen messages with Alarm List...

Page 78: ...ts that correspond to the specified user Command Description Zoom Changes the magnification of the editing window Command Description Close All Closes all editing windows Command Description 1 dot Sets the line width to one dot 2 dots Sets the line width to two dots 3 dots Sets the line width to three dots 5 dots Sets the line width to five dots Solid Sets the line to solid Dot Sets the line to do...

Page 79: ...ertically flips selected objects Flip Horizontal Horizontally flips selected objects Align Left Aligns selected objects to the left Align Center Aligns selected objects to the center Align Right Aligns selected objects to the right Align Top Aligns selected objects to the top Align Middle Aligns selected objects to the middle Align Bottom Aligns selected objects to the bottom Make Horizontal Spaci...

Page 80: ... docking Windows that are not docked are called floating windows If you drag the title bar of the workspace window you can move all the docked windows together If you drag the tab of a workspace window you can move just the selected window Docking windows You can dock a floating window to WindO I NV3 s left right top or bottom frame or a separate window 1 Drag the window s title bar or tab The Doc...

Page 81: ... the workspace window is dropped on the Docking icon it is docked to WindO I NV3 s left right top or bottom frame If a floating window is dropped on the Docking icon it is docked to WindO I NV3 s left right top or bottom frame or a docked window When the mouse cursor gets close to a Docking icon while dragging the title bar or tab the Docking icon turns blue and the location to dock the window is ...

Page 82: ... window Change the displayed window with the tabs Changing the display method of windows Auto Hide If the workspace window is docked you can change the window to automatically hide and show only its tabs Click the Auto Hide icon to change the window to show only its tabs The window is displayed when you bring the mouse cursor close to the tabs Auto Hide icon Tabs Mouse cursor Click Auto Hide to se...

Page 83: ... are open you can display those windows side by side Drag the tab of the editing window to display side by side and drop it where the icon is displayed The editing windows are displayed side by side Drag and drop Tab You can change the active editing windows by clicking on or Active Files and selecting the editing window Click Close to close the active editing window ...

Page 84: ...ation Position This section of the status bar shows the X and Y coordinates of the mouse cursor in the editing window Text Group This section of the status bar shows the current text group The text displayed in the editing window changes according to the displayed text group To change the text group click and select the text group Active User This section of the status bar shows the active user Yo...

Page 85: ...rtical Style Select the grid style with Dot or Line Color Select the grid color Click this button to open the color palette Select the color with the color palette ON OFF Click the button to switch between the OFF image and ON image for buttons and lamps Copy You can save the image displayed in the preview window as a bitmap image file by clicking Copy The preview display and the actual screen dis...

Page 86: ... display the Zoom dialog box Customizing the status bar You can change the commands displayed on the status bar Right click the status bar and check only the commands you want to display on the status bar Specify You can specify the zoom magnification 50 to 400 You can also specify the zoom magnification by dragging the zoom slider or clicking and ...

Page 87: ...tions when editing screens the path when selecting files and the path for automatic backups The settings configured here are saved even when you exit WindO I NV3 The procedure for configuring the work environment is shown below 1 Click and then click WindO I NV3 Options The WindO I NV3 Options dialog box is displayed 2 Change the settings on each tab as desired 4 Customizing WindO I NV3 ...

Page 88: ... the input method editor IME in text boxes for entering device addresses Bit Number Symbol Select the separator for addresses and bits When manually entering device address you can enter either separator but they will be displayed using the symbol selected here Workspace Setup Displays the Workspace Setup dialog box You can configure items displayed in the workspace window For details refer to 4 2...

Page 89: ...y the Select Path dialog box Select the folder and then click OK Save option Automatic Save Every Select this check box to automatically backup the project data at fixed time intervals 1 to 120 minutes Backup Save in Specifies the location to save the backup data Click to display the Select Path dialog box Select a folder and then click OK Backup data is deleted when the project data is closed ...

Page 90: ...om the following 100 125 150 175 200 250 300 350 400 Object List tab This tab changes the items displayed in the Object List window List Items Shows the list of items that can be displayed in the Object List window Add Adds an item to Display Items Select an item in List Items and then click this button to add it to Display Items Delete Deletes an item from Display Items Select an item in Display ...

Page 91: ...Up Shifts the selected item upward in the Display Items list Down Shifts the selected item downward in the Display Items list Parts List tab This tab changes the items displayed in the Part List window Show Image Name Select this box to display the image name for parts in the Part List window ...

Page 92: ...box Specifying a device address with the Device Address Settings dialog box To display the Device Address Settings dialog box click to the right of the text box for setting the device address Use this dialog box to set the device address Target Select the device that includes the device address to set from Touch or External Device Station No Specify the station number for the external device The r...

Page 93: ...comments configured for the selected device address Tag Editor Opens the Tag Editor With the Tag Editor you can display the list of device addresses used in the project data being edited and configure tag names and comments for device addresses Tag names and comments configured in the Tag Editor can be used in WindLDR and WindCFG ...

Page 94: ...g box You can easily configure a basic conditional expression using the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box Up to a maximum of five items of data can be used To flip the bits in data select the Not check box Operator priority is the same as scripts For details refer to Chapter 20 6 4 About the Priority of the Operator on page 20 53 1 Click Condition to display the Trigger Condition Settings dial...

Page 95: ...less than NO YES Greater than Compares if is greater than NO YES Less than Compares if is less than NO YES Bitwise operators Bitwise AND Calculates the logical product AND of each bit in and YES YES Bitwise OR Calculates the logical sum OR of each bit in and YES YES Bitwise XOR exclusive OR Calculates the exclusive logical sum XOR of each bit of and YES YES Bitwise NOT Flips the logic of each bits...

Page 96: ... D11 D12 multiplied by two and D13 is equal to the value of D10 100 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 This expression cannot be configured in the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box because it has over 6 items of data The condition is satisfied if the result of adding the values of D0 through D7 is 100 or greater 1 M0 M1 M2 M3 This expression cannot be configured on the Trigger Condition Settings dialog b...

Page 97: ...reate a project 1 1 Creating New Project Data Create new project data by using the interactive quick start You can create project data by following displayed dialog boxes and configuring settings step by step 1 Click and then click New A New Project dialog box is displayed 2 Enter the project name and then click Next The Select Product Series dialog box is displayed Chapter 3 Project 1 Creating Wi...

Page 98: ...al Clockwise 4 Select Manufacturer Protocol and Connection and then click Next The Project Settings dialog box is displayed Manufacturer Select the manufacturer name of the external device used Protocol Shows the communication driver list for the select manufacturer Select the communication driver to use Connection Select the connection according to the number of external devices You can go back t...

Page 99: ...Settings Dialog Box on page 3 19 This concludes creating project data Next you will create a screen For details refer to Chapter 4 3 1 Base Screen Settings on page 4 14 The Project Settings dialog box can also be accessed using the following methods Click Project on the Configuration tab Double click Project Settings in the Project window You can go back to previous step to change the settings by ...

Page 100: ...elect the file and then click Open Next you will open a screen For details refer to Chapter 4 2 2 Opening Screens on page 4 2 If a password has been configured for the project data the Enter Password screen will be displayed Select the user name and enter its password For details refer to Chapter 21 User Accounts and the Security Function on page 21 1 Click and then click project data on the Recen...

Page 101: ...SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual 3 5 1 Creating WindO I NV3 Project Data 3 Project 1 3 Saving Project Data Saving project data You can save the project data being edited Click and then click Save ...

Page 102: ...ct data being edited with a different name 1 Click and then click Save As The Save As dialog box is displayed 2 Enter the project name and then click Save You cannot use the following characters in the project name You cannot create project data in read only folders or in WindO I NV3 s working folders temporary folders that start with ...

Page 103: ...dO I NV3 Project Data 3 Project 1 4 Printing Project Data You can print the settings for the project data being edited and its screen images 1 Click and then click Print The Print dialog box is displayed 2 Change the settings on each tab as necessary ...

Page 104: ...oject Settings Prints the project settings Screen Settings Prints the screen settings a list of the parts on the screen and a screen image The details are configured on the Screen tab Part List Prints the settings for all parts used in the project Device List Prints the settings for all devices used in the project Picture List Prints the images and settings for drawing objects registered in Pictur...

Page 105: ...e selected screens The selected screens are displayed in a list Add Adds a screen to the list Click Add to display the Open Screens dialog box Select Screen Type select the screen in Screen List and then click OK to add the screen to the list Delete Deletes the screen from the list Select the screen in the list and then click Delete State Changes the state of the parts for printing Select the stat...

Page 106: ...awing object names Zoom Prints the picture at the specified magnification 20 to 400 Add Adds a drawing object to the list Click this button to display Picture Manager Select a picture and then click Select to add it to the list Delete Deletes a picture from the list Select the picture name and then click this button ...

Page 107: ...library names Zoom Prints the library image at the specified magnification 20 to 400 Add Adds a library to the list Click this button to display the Select Library for Print dialog box Select a library and then click OK to add it to the list Delete Deletes a library from the list Select a library name and click this button ...

Page 108: ...l Tab Name Shows a list of selected Protocol names Add Adds a Protocol to the list Click this button to display Protocol Manager Select a protocol and then click Select to add it to the list Delete Deletes a protocol from the list Select a protocol name and then click this button ...

Page 109: ... The Open dialog box is displayed 2 Select a file to compare with then click Open The Comparison Result window is displayed Comparison results are displayed using colored text Blue Complete match Red Different content Green Only saved in the open project Gray Only saved in the comparison project To compare with the comparison project data again click the arrow to the right of Compare from the Proj...

Page 110: ...roduct Series on the status bar The Change Product Series dialog box is displayed 2 Select Product Series Type Number and Installation and then click OK The Destination path for Convert dialog box is displayed 3 Specify the save location and file name and then click Save The data conversion process begins 4 When the data is finished being converted click Close Color settings color data are not con...

Page 111: ...ed 1 Click Change Communication Driver on the status bar The Change Communication Driver dialog box is displayed 2 Select Manufacturer Protocol and Connection and then click OK The confirmation message is displayed 3 Check the message and then click OK The Destination path for Convert dialog box is displayed 4 Specify the save location and file name and then click Save The data conversion process ...

Page 112: ...ouch User s Manual 5 When the data is finished being converted click Close If there are no devices that correspond to the external device used in the current project data after changing the communication driver the items set with those devices are blank ...

Page 113: ...he project data being edited Click and then click Close If the project data being edited has not been saved a confirmation message for saving the project data is displayed Click Yes to save the project data and close it Click No to close the project data without saving changes Click Cancel to stop saving the project data ...

Page 114: ...e Touch operations and functions for the project overall This section describes the configuration procedure for project settings 1 On the Configuration tab in the System Setup group click Project The Project Settings dialog box is displayed 2 Change the settings on each tab as necessary 2 Project Settings Configuration Procedure ...

Page 115: ...cklight touch the screen or write 1 to System Area 1 Auto Backlight OFF bit address 1 bit 5 or System Area 1 Screen display bit address 1 bit 7 3 Project Settings Dialog Box Default Screen Specifies the screen number of the Base Screen to display first when the Touch is turned on 0 to 3000 When 0 is specified the Touch is in the screen waiting state Write a screen number to System Area 1 Display s...

Page 116: ...r 2 High quality Fonts on page 2 10 Enable Two point Push Select this check box to enable two point push for touch switches When two point push is enabled the bottom switch and the switch above it operate in order On an analog touch panel this function operates two overlapping switches when the two are pressed This is not a function to simultaneously operate two touch switches when they are both p...

Page 117: ...f devices are read from and written to the upper byte Example When the text ABCDE is entered with the Character Input and written to the destination device LDR100 from Lower byte The values of devices are read from and written to the lower byte Example When the text ABCDE is entered with the Character Input and written to the destination device LDR100 Device Stored value Upper byte Lower byte LDR1...

Page 118: ...2 LSM3 and LSM5 after reading all the values of external devices configured on the screen When this check box is cleared all processing is immediately executed when the screen is displayed 1 Advanced mode only Device Specifies the word device to use as the System Area The System Area is allocated starting from the configured device address Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box Fo...

Page 119: ...104 LDR105 LDR106 LDR107 LDR108 LDR109 LDR110 LDR111 System Area 1 Starting address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 System Area 2 System Area 3 System Area 4 Address Bit Function Description 0 0 to 15 Display screen number This bit stores the number of the screen being displayed Write a value to this bit to change the screen to that number Immediately after the power is turned on the value configured by D...

Page 120: ...en the Touch is unused for an extended period of time 1 Disabled Does not automatically turn off the backlight when the Touch is unused for an extended period of time The backlight turns on if the value changes to 1 when the backlight is off 6 Beep This bit stores the beep state Write a value to this bit to change the state This bit turns 0 immediately after power is turned on 0 Stop Stops continu...

Page 121: ...g an inserted USB flash drive the value of this bit becomes 1 12 13 Reserved 14 Backup data error This bit changes to 1 when the backup battery is dead or low and the data sampled by the log functions and the HMI Keep Registers and HMI Keep Relays are cleared 15 Reserved 3 0 Numerical Input setting complete This bit changes to 1 when finished entering a numerical value with the Numerical Input Wri...

Page 122: ...data address 4 to 6 bits 0 to 15 to the Touch internal clock data When the value of the update bit address 7 bit 15 becomes 1 the clock data is updated as a whole Year month day hour minute and second cannot be set individually Address Bit Function Description 8 0 to 7 Clock data Month These bits store the current Month 01 to 12 value as a 2 digit BCD 8 to 15 Clock data Year These bits store the c...

Page 123: ...tings in the Interface Settings changes according to the selected item from this list The supported Protocols for each communication interface are as follows Item Communication Interface Protocol ExternalDevice Communication O I Link Master O I Link Slave User Communication 1 to 3 Maintenance Communication Port Serial Interface RS232C YES NO NO YES NO RS422 485 YES YES YES YES NO Ethernet Ethernet...

Page 124: ...mmunication O I Link Master O I Link Slave User Communication 1 User Communication 2 User Communication 3 This communication interface is not used when N A is selected Baud Rate Selects the communication speed with the external device from the following 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 187500 The baud rate that can be configured varies based on Protocol Data Bits Selects the data lengt...

Page 125: ...N A or External Device Communication Varies based on the Communication Driver selected for Protocol Automatically obtain the IP address DHCP Automatically sets the network when connected to a network Use the following IP address Manually specifies the IP address subnet mask and default gateway IP Address Specifies the IP address Default 0 0 0 0 The format is xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx stands for a numeri...

Page 126: ...same network make sure to assign each device a unique IP address Port No Specifies the port number for the target 0 to 65535 Change IP Address and Port Number by Device Select this check box and specify a word device to change the target s IP address and port number during operation You can only specify an internal device During the start of operation the Touch writes the values configured by IP A...

Page 127: ...with TCP clients and the TCP server set the value of the HMI Special Data Registers LSD from 0 to 1 LSD68 0 User Communication 1 set to Ethernet interface LSD68 1 User Communication 2 set to Ethernet interface LSD68 2 User Communication 3 set to Ethernet interface For TCP client and TCP server make a 1 1 connection between the Touch and the external device for one user communication setting When t...

Page 128: ...mmunication driver name configured in the current project data External Device These options configure the communication driver to use For details refer to the External Device Setup Manual Transmission Wait x 10 msec Specifies the transmission interval for communication commands 0 to 255 Time Out x 100 msec Specifies the time to wait for a response from the external device 1 to 255 Retry Cycles Sp...

Page 129: ...ddress configured by Monitoring communication error information for each station number individually Batch monitoring the communication error information for all Station Numbers Specifies the device that stores communication error information for all station numbers Only the HMI devices can be configured for this option Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address...

Page 130: ...r to the defaults Station No Shows the station number of external device Double clicking the cell displays the Communication Driver Network Settings dialog box IP Address Shows the IP address of the external device Default 192 168 0 1 Double clicking the cell allows you to specify the external device s IP address The format is xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx stands for a numeric value from 0 to 255 When conne...

Page 131: ... than IP Address and Port vary based on the external device For details refer to the External Device Setup Manual Example MODBUS TCP Client is selected for Communication Driver IP Address Specifies the IP address of the destination external device The format is xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx stands for a numeric value from 0 to 255 When connecting multiple devices to the same network make sure to assign each...

Page 132: ...nsion Tab The Communication Driver Extension tab is used to configure the communication driver extension settings These settings vary based on the external device This tab is displayed when communication driver extension settings are required For details refer to the External Device Setup Manual ...

Page 133: ... Communication Interface tab O I Link Type Selects the slave station Slave1 to Slave15 This option can only be configured when O I Link Slave is selected for Protocol under Interface Settings on the Communication Interface tab Slave Settings Select the check boxes for the slave stations to connect to This option can only be configured when O I Link Master is selected for Protocol under Interface S...

Page 134: ...ce tab Settings Edits the user communication settings You can use up to three user communication settings Edit Registers or changes the selected user communication settings Select a user communication number and then click this button to display the User Communication Protocol Settings dialog box Browse Selects a Protocol to use as user communication with Protocol Manager Click this button to disp...

Page 135: ...us Shows the destination device for the send or receive size and error information Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box Trigger Type Shows the trigger type to execute the script Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box Trigger Condition The displayed content varies based on Trigger Type Rising edge Falling edge While ON or While OFF Shows the b...

Page 136: ...to erase the files saved in the External Memory Folder You cannot use the following characters in the folder name After operation starts the folders created in the External Memory Folder and the file names cannot be changed All Alarm Log files Select this check box to erase all the Alarm Log data saved in folder The folder name is ALARMLOG All Data Log files Select this check box to erase all the ...

Page 137: ... a USB flash drive is inserted in the Touch Open Popup Screen when USB flash drive is inserted Select this check box to display a Popup Screen when a USB flash drive is inserted in the Touch Screen No Specifies the Popup Screen number 1 to 3015 to display when a USB flash drive is inserted in the Touch Coordinates X Y Specifies the coordinates to display the Popup Screen With the upper left corner...

Page 138: ...total size of the data and the total size of only the image files when the current project data is downloaded Location Shows the save location for the current project data Created Shows the date and time the current project data was created Modified Shows the date and time the current project data was last saved Accessed Shows the date and time the current project data was opened User Enter the na...

Page 139: ... is also reflected in the project name displayed in the system information on the Touch s System Screen European Japanese Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic Cyrillic The display type for dates and times varies based on the selected language Japanese YYYY MM DD HH MM SS European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic Cyrillic MM DD YYYY HH MM SS ...

Page 140: ...1 Contents Tab The Contents tab is used to enter a comment for the project data Description Enter a comment for the project data The maximum number is 511 characters A newline is counted as two characters The content in Description is erased when the project is uploaded ...

Page 141: ...utine to execute an interrupt program Frequency measurement The pulse frequency of input signals to input terminals can be counted regardless of the scan time Input filter The input filter rejects short input pulses when the Touch is used with input signals containing noises Analog input Analog voltage inputs such as inputs from pressure sensors can be read and stored in special data registers as ...

Page 142: ...cation port settings are configured in Function Area Settings This section describes the configuration procedure for the Function Area Settings 1 On the WindO I NV3 View tab in the Workspace group click Control Function WindLDR starts 2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab in the Function Area Settings group click a button for special functions The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed 3 Chan...

Page 143: ...the special functions such as the external input filter settings and the high speed counter High speed counter Catch input Interrupt input Frequency measurement Input filter Analog input Timer interrupt Analog output Cartridges Configure the function to use the cartridge of the Touch Analog cartridge LCD Settings Configure the LCD settings for the Touch Ladder Monitor Self Diagnostic These setting...

Page 144: ...n the WindO I NV3 View tab in the Workspace group click Control Function WindLDR starts 2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab in the Function Area Settings group click Run Stop Control The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed 3 Select the Use Stop Input check box 4 Designate an external input ex I0 as a stop input 5 Click OK This concludes configuring the settings If I0 is set to ON after a...

Page 145: ... and execute the ladder program or FBD program once again it is necessary that M8000 is ON and that stop inputs are OFF if a stop input is set If these conditions are not satisfied then even if the reset input is OFF program execution will remain stopped and the ladder program or FBD program will not execute The external inputs that can be set as reset inputs are I0 to I7 Procedure 1 On the WindO ...

Page 146: ...r bits Counters and Data register values Special internal relay Special data register Not maintained data register Timer current value Keep designation range Clear designation range RUN Program operation Program operation Program operation Program operation Program operation Program operation Program operation STOP OFF Maintained Maintained Refer to Chapter 27 Maintained Maintained Maintained STOP...

Page 147: ...R Configuration tab in the Function Area Settings group click Run Stop Control The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed 3 Click Run under the Run Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error 4 Click OK This concludes configuring the settings Thanks to a lithium ion battery the RUN STOP M8000 state of the Touch immediately before it is powered OFF is retained so when it is powered ON again the T...

Page 148: ...Run Stop State at Power Down Run or Stop under the Run Stop Selection at Power Up 4 Click OK This concludes configuring the settings Configuration Operation Keep Run Stop State at Power Down Starts running the Touch with the ladder program or FBD program in the state at power down when the Touch is powered up Run M8000 is turned on Turns ON M8000 and starts running the Touch and the ladder program...

Page 149: ...ion starts Values in the powered OFF state are retained until power is turned on and operation starts Procedure 1 On the WindO I NV3 View tab in the Workspace group click Control Function WindLDR starts 2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab in the Function Area Settings group click Memory Backup The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed 3 Click the buttons under Internal Relay Shift Register...

Page 150: ...uration Operation Keep All Counter current values are retained when the Touch is powered OFF Clear All All counter current values are cleared when the Touch starts operation Clear Specified Range Only counter current values within the specified range are cleared when the Touch starts operation Counter current values outside the specified range are retained Configuration Operation Keep All Data reg...

Page 151: ...lses A phase B phase that carry the phase difference output from the rotary encoder are counted by the Touch two phase high speed counter When the current value reaches the preset value the specified external output turns on and the perforator punches a hole in the roll of paper High speed counter operation modes The high speed counter has the following two operation modes Single phase high speed ...

Page 152: ... group 1 can be used as two phase high speed counters External inputs I2 can be used as external clear inputs for group 1 In this situation external inputs I2 cannot be used as single phase high speed counters 1 If not used as the external clear input Z phase group 2 can be used as single phase high speed counters Group 1 2 3 4 5 External input I0 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 Single phase high speed counter Pul...

Page 153: ...se groups only support the reset input via a special internal relay When the reset is executed the current value returns to the reset value specified by the special data registers Two phase high speed counter Group 1 two phase high speed counter The two phase high speed counter counts by the phase difference between the A phase and B phase pulse input These groups support 5 kHz maximum pulse input...

Page 154: ...up with the rise and fall of B phase When B phase precedes A phase the counter counts down with the rise and fall of B phase 4 edge count two phase high speed counter This counter counts by the phase difference between A phase and B phase pulse input When A phase precedes B phase the counter counts up with the rise and fall of A phase and B phase When B phase precedes A phase the counter counts do...

Page 155: ... value number is automatically stored in Next Preset Value Number By changing the value of Next Preset Value Number in the ladder program or FBD program the next active preset value number can be changed The active preset value is stored for each group in the special data registers shown in the table above Example Group 1 number of preset values is 3 set to device address D0000 When the current va...

Page 156: ...nting Execute Comparison Output or Interrupt Program Comparison Output in this example Turn on the comparison special internal relay for only one scan Overwrite Current Preset Value Number with Next Preset Value Number and start the count with the preset value for Current Preset Value Number Add 1 to Next Preset Value Number 4 When the procedure is executed up to preset value 6 repeat again from t...

Page 157: ...terrupt input can only be used when ladder program is selected as the programming language 1 On the WindO I NV3 View tab in the Workspace group click Control Function WindLDR starts 2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab in the Function Area Settings group click Input Output Configuration The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed 3 Select Two phase High speed Counter or Single phase High spee...

Page 158: ...parison output or an interrupt program However the interrupt program can only be used when ladder program is selected as the programming language When Comparison Output is selected the specified external output is turned on when the current value and the preset value match When Interrupt Program is selected the subroutine program with the specified label number is executed as the interrupt program...

Page 159: ...pecial data register settings While the high speed counter is operating the current value control output and operating status value are reflected in the special internal relays and special data registers with each scan The high speed counter start and stop control signals and the current value preset values and reset values are allocated to the special internal relays and special data registers De...

Page 160: ...the special internal relay turns on for only one scan When the current value overflows it becomes 0 Underflow When the current value falls below 0 the special internal relay turns on for only one scan When the current value underflows it becomes 4 294 967 295 Group 1 I0 to I1 2 I2 3 I3 4 I4 5 I5 Read Write Current Value Upper word D8050 D8056 D8068 D8134 D8140 R Current Value Lower word D8051 D805...

Page 161: ...can be used as normal input high speed counters catch input interrupt input or frequency measurements Count direction flag These special internal relays maintain whether group 1 current value count is being added or subtracted When these special internal relays are on they indicate addition When they are off they indicate subtraction Group 1 I0 to I1 2 I2 3 I3 4 I4 5 I5 Read Write Comparison Outpu...

Page 162: ...173 turns on Preset value Comparison ON status M8176 turns on for only one scan 5 When the gate output turns off counting stops Current value D8140 D8141 Preset value 1 6 D8142 D8143 Pulse input I5 Q1 M8175 M8174 M8173 M8176 D8144 D8145 Gate input Preset value Comparison ON status Reset input One scan Comparison output reset Preset value 1 Comparison output 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Reset...

Page 163: ...phase pulse I1 the count goes up When B phase pulse I1 precedes A phase pulse I0 the count goes down 4 When the current value and preset value 1 D8052 D8053 match the preset value 1 comparison output Q1 and setting value match M8034 turn on When preset value 1 matches preset value 2 is stored in the preset value D8052 D8053 as the new preset value and counting continues 5 The preset value 1 compar...

Page 164: ...hase High speed Counter for Group 1 In High speed Counter Settings configure the settings as follows External input Group 2 I2 Operation Mode Single phase High speed Counter Counting Mode Adding Counter Comparison Action Comparison Output Comparison Settings Tag Name Device Address D0000 data register Number of Comparisons 1 Comparison output Q2 external output when matched Comparison1 D4 0 upper ...

Page 165: ...er counting in the END processing after the 3rd scan is executed Store the reset value in D8054 D8055 Store 1 in the next preset value number D0002 Turn off gate input M8031 Turn off M0000 D1 D0002 REP S1 1 MOV W D1 D8054 REP S1 0 MOV D D1 D0004 REP S1 1000 MOV D 2nd scan Detect the falling edge of the initialize pulse M0000 and M8032 turn on Initialize the current value with the reset value in th...

Page 166: ...ly connected to the paper feed roller and output pulses are counted by the high speed counter and controlled The cycle time is the time to count 2 700 pulses When the hole punch time is 0 5 seconds the operation condition is 2 700 pulse count time 0 5 seconds External input Group 1 I0 to I1 Operation Mode Two phase High speed Counter Counting Mode 4 Edge Count Comparison Action Comparison Output C...

Page 167: ... gate input M8031 Start high speed counter counting in the END processing after the 3rd scan is executed 2nd scan Detect the falling edge of the initialize pulse M0000 and M8032 turn on Initialize the current value with the reset value in the END processing after the 2nd scan is executed Store 0 in the reset value D8054 D8055 Turn off gate input M8031 Turn off M0000 M8032 reset input is a special ...

Page 168: ...g Edge of Input Pulse Catching Falling Edge of Input Pulse Catch Input Specifications Minimum Turn ON Pulse Width 50 μsec Minimum Turn OFF Pulse Width 50 μsec Input The Touch inputs can be configured as normal inputs high speed counters catch inputs interrupt inputs or frequency measurement To use catch inputs specify Catch Input for the applicable group under Function Area Settings The states of ...

Page 169: ...pull down list and then click OK 5 Click OK This concludes configuring the settings Example Maintaining Catch Input When a catch input is received the catch input relay assigned to a catch input is turned on for only one scan This example demonstrates a program to maintain a catch input status for more than one scan M8091 M0000 M0001 M0000 Input I2 is designated as a catch input using the Function...

Page 170: ...tion When interrupt inputs I2 I3 I4 and I5 are enabled special internal relay are turned on respectively For details refer to Chapter 16 Interrupt Control Instructions in SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual When the Touch starts operation interrupt inputs are set to the interrupt allowed state Notes for Using Interrupt Inputs and Timer Interrupt When using an interrupt input or timer interrupt sep...

Page 171: ...Function Area Settings group click Input Output Configuration The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed 3 Select Interrupt Input in the Groups 1 through 6 pull down list boxes The Interrupt Input dialog box is displayed 4 Select Interrupt Input Rising Edge Interrupt Input Falling Edge or Interrupt Both Edges in the pull down list and then click OK 5 Click OK This concludes configuring the...

Page 172: ...rrupt input I2 The interrupt program is separated from the main program by the END instruction When input I2 is on program execution jumps to label 0 M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay IOREF immediately reads input I0 status to internal relay M0300 M0300 turns on or off the output Q0 internal memory Another IOREF immediately writes the output Q0 internal memory status to actua...

Page 173: ...t high speed counters catch input interrupt input and frequency measurement To use frequency measurement specify the relevant group as Frequency Measurement in Function Area Settings tab The frequency measurement results are stored in the following special data registers Read only Any one of Groups 2 3 4 or 5 can be freely set Inputs I6 and I7 cannot be used for frequency measurement Group 1 2 3 4...

Page 174: ...n you download the ladder program or FBD program and set the Touch to run 1 On the WindO I NV3 View tab in the Workspace group click Control Function WindLDR starts 2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab in the Function Area Settings group click Input Output Configuration The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed 3 Specify Frequency Measurement for the group to use frequency measurement 4 Cli...

Page 175: ...ion Depending on the selected values the input filter has three response areas to reject or pass input signals The input filter rejects inputs shorter than the selected input filter value minus 2 milliseconds Example Input Filter To reject input pulses of 6 milliseconds or less select input filter value of 8 milliseconds Then input pulses of 8 milliseconds plus one scan time are accepted correctly...

Page 176: ...the Function Area Settings group click Input Output Configuration The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed 3 If an input to which an input filter is applied is not a normal input select Normal Input in the corresponding group 4 Select an input filter value for each group of inputs 5 Click OK This concludes configuring the settings The columns displayed next to I0000 indicate I0 to I7 ...

Page 177: ... as values between 0 and 1 000 The analog input status is also stored in special data registers D8042 D8043 and D8077 read only These values are updated with each scan Analog Input Status D8077 If the analog input signal exceeds 11 V or 21 mA the corresponding bit of D8077 turns on to indicate overflow For details refer to Chapter 27 2 2 Control Device Addresses on page 27 12 Analog Input Status D...

Page 178: ... input value is calculated with the equation below Analog Input Allocation Count Description 0 No filtering 1 to 255 The input value is set as the average value of n samples of analog input value n Count Analog input value after filtering Total analog input values for filter count n worth of scans Filter count n Input I0 I5 I6 I7 Analog input terminal AI0 AI1 Special data register that stores anal...

Page 179: ...nction WindLDR starts 2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab in the Function Area Settings group click Input Output Configuration The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed 3 Under Type for the external input to use as an analog input select Analog 4 Under Filter times specify the number of times to filter and under Signal Type select 0 to 10V DC or 4 to 20mA DC Click Default to set all the ex...

Page 180: ...uch is turned off For details refer to Chapter 16 Interrupt Control Instructions in SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual Notes for Using Timer Interrupt and Interrupt Inputs When using a timer interrupt or interrupt input separate the interrupt program from the main program using the END instruction at the end of the main program When an interrupt program calls another subroutine a maximum of 3 sub...

Page 181: ...The following example demonstrates a program of using the timer interrupt function The Function Area Settings must also be completed to use the timer interrupt function as described on the preceding page M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay D8036 stores 0 to designate jump destination label 0 for timer interrupt The interrupt program is separated from the main program by the END in...

Page 182: ...s are as follows In the cases below the minimum value of analog output is written to the special data registers for the analog outputs When the Touch is reset such as when the Touch is powered up When Ladder program or FBD program is in STOP state and M8025 Maintain Outputs While Program Operation Stopped is OFF Analog output FT1A 14KA FT1A 14SA FT1A 12RA 0 to 10 V YES 4 to 20 mA YES Analog output...

Page 183: ...ouch 1 On the WindO I NV3 View tab in the Workspace group click Control Function WindLDR starts 2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab in the Function Area Settings group click Input Output Configuration The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed 3 Under Signal Type for the external output to use as the analog output select 0 to 10V DC or 4 to 20mA DC 4 Click OK This concludes configuring the ...

Page 184: ...inputs and each channel can be set to a different operation mode The analog output cartridge is available in two types voltage output type FC6A PK2AV and current output type FC6A PK2AW A single analog output cartridge has two analog outputs and the operation mode is common to both To use an analog cartridge it must be configured in the Function Area Settings tab in Control Functions The analog inp...

Page 185: ...tage 0 to 10V DC 4 096 increments 12bit Current 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA FC6A PJ2CP Analog input 2 points Thermocouple Type K 15 000 increments 14bit Type J 12 000 increments 14bit Type R 17 600 increments 15bit Type S 17 600 increments 15bit Type B 18 200 increments 15bit Type E 10 000 increments 14bit Type T 6 000 increments 13bit Type N 15 000 increments 14bit Type C 23 150 increments 15bit Resist...

Page 186: ...nd an analog output cartridge is attached to analog cartridge port 2 Example 2 When an analog input cartridge is only attached to analog cartridge port 2 Touch Analog cartridge Port 1 Port 2 Channel CH0 CH1 CH0 CH1 Analog number AI AQ 0 1 2 3 4 5 Touch Analog cartridge Port 1 Port 2 Channel CH0 CH1 CH0 CH1 Analog input AI0 AI1 AI2 AI3 Analog output AQ0 AQ1 AQ4 AQ5 Touch Analog cartridge Port 1 Por...

Page 187: ...e analog input of analog cartridge reaches approximately 99 of analog input in the specified filter time by filtering You can decrease rapid fluctuations in the analog input by setting the filter time but increasing the filter time makes tracking for fluctuations in the analog input slower Description 0 20 40 60 Elapsed time ms Analog cartridge FC6A PJ2A input filter example Filter time 100 ms Ana...

Page 188: ... handled in the linear conversion range of the temperature sensor set in the data type For details refer to the analog input value linear conversion range when set to Celsius or Fahrenheit Fahrenheit Operation mode Celsius Fahrenheit Temperature C Analog input value Temperature F Analog input value Thermocouple Type K 200 to 1 300 2000 to 13 000 328 to 2 372 3280 to 23 720 Type J 200 to 1 000 2000...

Page 189: ...rmocouple Resistance thermometer RTD The input maximum value or greater The maximum value varies by the signal type For details refer to Chapter 3 Analog Input Value Linear Conversion Range When Set to Celsius or Fahrenheit on page 3 91 6 Wiring error out of the maximum ranger open current loop Minimum value Signal type Voltage DC 0 to 10 V For V100 1 0 V or lower For V201 1 and later 0 2 V or low...

Page 190: ...al 0 Operating normally Current analog output value 1 Reserved 2 Initializing 0 V 4 mA 3 Parameter setting error Analog output value immediately before the error occurred 4 to 7 Reserved 8 The setting in the ladder program or FBD program differs from the attached analog cartridge 0 V 4 mA 9 The analog cartridge has not been attached 10 The analog cartridge has been attached but it is set to unused...

Page 191: ...og Parameters Configuration dialog is displayed All of the parameters for the analog cartridge can be configured in this dialog box The detailed settings vary based on the type of analog cartridge 5 Enter the filter preset value 6 Under Signal Type select analog input type for each channel 7 Under Data Type select the data type for each channel ...

Page 192: ... If Optional range is selected for Data Type set the minimum and maximum of analog value for each channel in the range of 32 768 to 32 767 9 Click OK to close the Analog Parameters Configuration dialog box 10 Click OK This concludes configuring the settings ...

Page 193: ...ess of the Run Stop status of the Touch In order to monitor the ladder program on the LCD of the Touch you need to configure settings using WindLDR There are two restrictions in creating the ladder programs that can be displayed on the LCD Create ladder programs considering those restrictions A maximum of four ladder lines can be programmed in each ladder circuit A maximum of eleven instructions c...

Page 194: ...ting time The watchdog timer setting time can be changed in the function area settings Decide on the watchdog timer setting time in either of the following two ways Decide by user system specification Determine the maximum on time milliseconds so the output signals do not stay on if the Touch loses control and set that value as the watchdog timer setting time However if the ladder program processi...

Page 195: ...ab in the Workspace group click Control Function WindLDR starts 2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab in the Function Area Settings group click Self Diagnostic The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed 3 Select the preset value for watchdog timer 4 Click OK This concludes configuring the settings ...

Page 196: ...System Area or special data registers the time is not adjusted for daylight savings time even if the time after it was set is within the daylight savings time period Set the clock to the time adjusted for daylight savings time The set date and time becomes the date and time after being adjusted for daylight savings time Procedure Configure daylight savings time on the Touch 1 On the WindO I NV3 Vi...

Page 197: ...r is displayed in the dialog box as the initial value The settings can also be changed as necessary 5 Click OK The date and time configured in the dialog box is written to the Touch Function Description Read clock The current time calendar clock is updated every 500 milliseconds and automatically stored in the special data registers Set clock Sets the current time calendar clock Uses the System Ar...

Page 198: ... to special data registers D8015 to D8021 turn M8020 on to set the internal clock with the data in D8015 to D8021 as the calendar data year month day day of the week and the clock data hour minute second Calendar and clock data storage locations The calendar clock data is stored in the following special data registers For the day of the week data the values below are stored in the special data reg...

Page 199: ...a registers D8015 to D8018 Internal relay M0000 turns on for one scan only When external input I1 turns on the new clock data is stored in special data registers D8019 to D8021 Internal relay M0001 turns on for one scan only When external input M0000 or M0001 turns on M8020 turns on and the calendar clock data is written to the internal clock M8020 Calendar Clock Data Write Flag M8125 is a special...

Page 200: ... be confirmed with special internal relays M8110 to M8112 The When a connection is established with the server the corresponding special internal relay is turned on When the connection is disconnected the corresponding special internal relay is turned off The IP addresses of the devices can be confirmed with special data registers D8110 to D8121 Status Information Connected IP Addresses Special in...

Page 201: ... 2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab in the Function Area Settings group click Connection Settings The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed 3 Select Communication Mode for the connection to use The settings dialog box for the set communication mode is displayed As an example here Communication Mode is set to Remote I O Master Configure the communication mode allocated to a maximum of thre...

Page 202: ...remote host is registered a remote host number is automatically allocated to it When using the function listed above specify the remote host number as the device to communicate with Procedure 1 On the WindO I NV3 View tab in the Workspace group click Control Function WindLDR starts 2 On the WindLDR Project window double click Remote Host List The Remote Host List dialog box is displayed 3 Click Ne...

Page 203: ...is concludes configuring the settings IP Address Specify the remote host with an IP address The Touch performs communication by establishing a connection to the specified IP address and port number Port Specify the port number used in TCP IP communication Comment The comment for the remote host can be assigned The contents or the length of the comment has no effect on communication To delete a reg...

Page 204: ...Home tab in the Project group click Target Info The Target Information dialog box is displayed The project data size can be checked with Memory Space byte under Target Runtime Information The project data size varies based on the fonts downloaded to the Touch For details refer to Chapter 2 Font Size on page 2 9 Parts Number of parts Total number of Bit Buttons Word Buttons Goto Screen Buttons Mult...

Page 205: ...Screen 1 to 3 015 The Popup Screen that is displayed on the Base Screen when the Touch is in Run Mode The size and coordinates of the screen can be specified and this screen can also be moved on the Base Screen A Popup Screen for the standard Keypad 1 will automatically be created in screen numbers 3 001 to 3 015 Library Screen The screen that registers often used drawing objects and parts to the ...

Page 206: ...ayed 3 Change the settings on each tab as necessary and then click OK 2 2 Opening Screens Opening a screen You can open a single screen that has already been created Double click the screen to open in the Project window 2 Creating and Manipulating WindO I NV3 Screens To edit the properties for a Base Screen or Popup Screen that has already been created double click an area in the editing window wi...

Page 207: ...ed in Screen List All Base Screen Popup Screen Screen List This list shows screens that have already been created Opening the previous or next screen You can open the screen with the previous screen number or the next screen number of the screen displayed in the active editing window To open the screen with the previous screen number click Open Previous Screen in the Screens group on the Home tab ...

Page 208: ...can save multiple screens as a group 1 Right click a screen folder in the Project window and then click Save Screens The Save Screens dialog box is displayed 2 Click the screens to save in Screen List and then click OK Screen Type Select the type of screen to save from the following items The selected screen type is displayed in Screen List All Base Screen Popup Screen To select multiple screens p...

Page 209: ...ct window and then click Save Screen As The Save Screen As dialog box is displayed 2 Specify the screen number after saving and then click OK New No Specify the screen number Base Screen 1 to 3000 Popup Screen 1 to 3015 after saving Screen Title Enter or change the screen title The maximum number is 40 characters Screen List This list shows screens that have already been created If you specify an ...

Page 210: ...ouch User s Manual 2 4 Closing Screens Closing the displayed screen You can close the active editing window Click in the upper right of the editing window Closing all screens You can close all the editing windows On the View tab in the Window group click Close All ...

Page 211: ...ct the type of screen to close from the following items The selected screen type is displayed in Screen List All Base Screen Popup Screen Screen List This list shows the screens being edited Select All Selects all the screens displayed in Screen List To select multiple screens press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items If you specify an unsaved screen and then click OK a save ...

Page 212: ...or the new screen and the Number of copies to duplicate and then click OK Screen Type Select the type of screen to duplicate from the following items The selected screen type is displayed in Screen List All Base Screen Popup Screen Screen List This list shows screens that have already been created Screen No Specify the screen number Base Screen 1 to 3000 Popup Screen 1 to 3015 for the new screen N...

Page 213: ... for the screens duplicated from screen number 3 and 101 and 103 for the screens duplicated from screen number 5 If a screen number already exists after copying and you click OK on the Duplicate Screens dialog box an overwrite confirmation message is displayed Click Yes to overwrite the screen with the number displayed in the confirmation message Click Yes To All to overwrite all the screens Click...

Page 214: ...ete Screens A delete confirmation message is displayed 2 Click Yes The screen is deleted Click No or Cancel to stop deleting the screen Deleting specific screens You can delete multiple screens as a group 1 On the Home tab in the Screens group click Delete The Delete Screens dialog box is displayed If you right click a screen folder in the Project window and then click Delete Screens the Delete Sc...

Page 215: ...elect All Selects all the screens displayed in Screen List 3 Click Yes or Yes To All Click Yes to delete the screen with the number displayed in the confirmation message When deleting multiple screens the next message to confirm deleting a screen is displayed Click Yes To All to delete all the screens without displaying the confirmation message Click No to display the next message to confirm delet...

Page 216: ...copy from the following items The selected screen type is displayed in Screen List All Base Screen Popup Screen Screen List This list shows screens included in the source project data If you right click a screen folder or screen in the Project window and then click Reuse Screens the Open dialog box is displayed If a password has been configured for the project data the Password Screen will be disp...

Page 217: ...yed in the confirmation message If there are multiple redundant items a confirmation message is displayed for each of those items Click Yes To All to overwrite all of the picture numbers pictures text IDs and script IDs Click No to display a dialog box for each setting Change the item to a unique screen number or ID number and then click OK Click Cancel to stop overwriting the displayed in the con...

Page 218: ...eneral Tab Screen Type Select Base Screen as the screen type You can only select the screen type when creating a new screen No Enter the Base Screen s screen number 1 to 3000 Title Enter the Base Screen s title The maximum number is 40 characters Size Shows the screen size You cannot change the size of Base Screens Screen List This list shows screens that have already been created It is only displ...

Page 219: ...reen by overlaying screens 1 Monochrome LCD models only When Overlay with Base Screen is configured the background color for the Base Screen specified as the background is displayed 1 to 5 Select these to display the Base Screen by overlaying screens No Enter the overlay screen s screen number 1 to 3000 Coordinates X Y Specify the display location of the overlay screen in coordinates The coordinat...

Page 220: ...Screen being edited Overlay screen 5 screens max Base Screen being edited Overlay screen 3 None Displays the screen Blink 1 sec cycle The screen display is blinked in one second intervals Blink 0 5 sec cycle The screen display is blinked in half second intervals Backlight OFF Turns off the backlight until the screen is touched or until System Area 1 address 1 bit 0 or bit 7 is set to 1 Vertical Th...

Page 221: ...Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box If you create a security group in the Security Group Settings dialog box you can select that created group For details refer to Chapter 21 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 21 15 None Any user can open this screen Administrator Operator Reader Created security group Only a selected user can open this screen For details about the ...

Page 222: ...at is currently being edited as the bottom most layer Example Displaying a Base Screen currently being edited on the layered screen 3 For details about how to configure these settings refer to 3 1 Base Screen Settings on page 4 14 Example When Base Screen 100 which has a clock placed in it is used as a layered screen Base Screen 1 which is displayed as the base and Base Screen 2 will be displayed ...

Page 223: ...m layered screens may not display properly when placed outside of the displayed area 130 100 120 11 Feb 22 Tue 12 00 11 Feb 22 Tue 12 00 130 100 120 Base Screen 1 Base Screen 100 Base Screen 101 Display for Base Screen 1 Display for Base Screen 100 Layering Layering 0 11 Feb 22 Tue 12 00 130 100 120 0 11 Feb 22 Tue 12 00 0 Displayed as the base Layered Screen Layered Screen Layered Screen Base Scr...

Page 224: ...ase Screen 2 is layered with base 1 as the bottom most layer and the Numerical Display belonging to Base Screen 1 and Numerical Display belonging to Base Screen 2 overlap 1234 1234 Base Screen 1 Base Screen 2 Display for Base Screen 1 Layering The Numerical Display for Base Screen 1 is displayed in front 567 1234 1234 567 9999 567 Base Screen 1 Base Screen 2 Display for Base Screen 1 Layering The ...

Page 225: ...en 1 and 2 has not been pressed The switch for Base Screen 2 is displayed in front The switch for Base Screen 1 is displayed in front When touch switch two point push is enabled the touch switches will be activated and the display will be updated in order starting from the switch located one layer above the bottom most switch Touch switch two point push is selecting the check box labeled Enable Tw...

Page 226: ...ices Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic Cyrillic This option can only be selected when Use Text Manager is cleared Use Text Manager Select this to use text registered in Text Manager for the screen title However the text color is white not the color set in Text Manager Text ID Specify the Text Manager ID number 1 to 32000 to use text registered in Text Manager Click...

Page 227: ...creen can be seen Title Bar Select this to display the title bar on the Popup Screen The text set in Title on the General tab is displayed in the title bar The title bar is not displayed if superimpose is set Close while changing Base Screen Select this to close the displayed Popup Screen when changing the Base Screen Width Height Specify the width 40 dots to Base Screen width and the height 40 do...

Page 228: ...oup Settings dialog box you can select that created group For details refer to Chapter 21 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 21 15 Vertical The focus moves vertically from top to bottom Horizontal The focus moves horizontally from left to right Custom Sets the desired order for moving the focus On the View tab in the Screens group click Focus Order and then click the parts in the order...

Page 229: ...utton Title Bar Screen Display Area Touch Touch Touch When there is a title bar on the Popup Screen touch switches that are within 20 dots of the title bar will not respond 1 Press 2 Press the position where the screen will be moved to 3 The screen will move the position that was pressed Touch Touch Touch The location that was touched will become the location of The Popup Screen can be moved in th...

Page 230: ...ers 3001 to 3015 with the WindO I NV3 Decimal Number Value Keypad Uppercase Alphabet Keypad The Standard Keypad Popup Screen can also place drawing objects and parts in the same manner as Popup Screen numbers 1 to 3000 Screen numbers 3001 to 3015 are screen numbers that are empty when a new project has been created and are handled as normal Popup Screens Deleting a Standard Keypad Popup Screen and...

Page 231: ...rently displayed Popup Screens 1 The maintenance screen is not included 5 Screen Restrictions Item Number of screens Number of screens that can be created 3 000 max Number of layered screens 5 max Item Number of screens Number of screens that can be created 3 015 max Number of screens that can be displayed on the Base Screen 3 max Including the Device Monitor and Ladder Monitor 1 Screen Number of ...

Page 232: ...d vertically the next screen will be the same as horizontal installation and display System Mode Maintenance Screen Brightness contrast adjustment screen 1 brightness adjustment screen 2 Password Screen 1 Monochrome LCD models only 2 Color LCD models only External Device Address Number of Devices Write destination Device 512 max Read source Devices 256 max External Device Address Number of Devices...

Page 233: ...WindO I NV3 These screens can be accessed while editing project data You can quickly create screens by using Library Screens To copy Library Screens to other computers and use them as common Library Screens use the import and export functions 6 Using Library Screens Project data 1 Project data 2 Project data 3 Creating Library Screens Copying drawing objects and parts on Library Screen Library 1 L...

Page 234: ... dialog box is displayed 3 Enter a name in New Library and then click OK The Library Screen is displayed New Library Enter the name for the Library Screen Maximum number is 40 characters Library List This list displays the registered Library Screens 4 Configure parts and drawing objects in the Library Screen and create the screen You cannot use the following characters in the library name ...

Page 235: ...ng a Library Screen Open a registered Library Screen to use for creating a Base Screen or Popup Screen 1 On the Home tab in the Screens group click to the right of Open 2 Click the Library Screen The Open Library dialog box is displayed 3 Select the Library Screen and then click OK Library List This list displays registered Library Screens Delete Deletes the Library Screen selected in Library List...

Page 236: ... Touch User s Manual 4 Drag and drop or copy and paste objects to use from the Library Screen to the screen being edited Editing Screen Library Screen Drag and drop You can re edit objects placed on the edited screen from the Library Screen ...

Page 237: ... name displayed in the confirmation message When deleting multiple Library Screens the next message to confirm deleting a Library Screen is displayed Click Yes to All to delete all the Library Screens without displaying the confirmation message Click No to display the next message to confirm deleting a Library Screen without deleting the Library Screen with the library name displayed in the confir...

Page 238: ...he Home tab in the Screens group click to the right of Open 2 Click the Library Screen The Open Library dialog box is displayed 3 Select the Library Screens to export in Library List and then click Export The Save As dialog box is displayed 4 Specify Save in and click Save To select multiple screens key click the specific screens or key click the specific screens Shift Ctrl ...

Page 239: ...ter import those exported Library Screens into WindO I NV3 1 On the Home tab in the Screens group click to the right of Open 2 Click the Library Screen The Open Library dialog box is displayed 3 Click Import The Open dialog box is displayed 4 Select a Library Screen file r2f and click Open The imported Library Screen is displayed in Library List ...

Page 240: ...6 Using Library Screens 4 36 SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual ...

Page 241: ... static text Parts are objects that generate a variety of events when triggered by a change in the values of devices or by touch Chapter 5 Drawings and Parts 1 Overview Touch Caution Equilateral Triangle Polyline Line Text Picture External device External device Parts changed to reflect changes in the values of devices Tank 1 Touch Touch D10 80 D11 25 D12 2 D13 0 D14 0 D15 0 D10 99 D11 82 D12 5 D1...

Page 242: ...haracters Loads text that is registered in Text Manager 2 Drawing Objects Shapes Function Basic Shapes Line Draws a line Polyline Draws a polyline Polygon Draws an object that connects two or more vertices with straight lines Rectangle Draws a rectangle Circle Ellipse Draws a circle or ellipse Arc Draws an elliptical arc Pie Draws a pie Equilateral Polygon Draws a equilateral polygon triangle diam...

Page 243: ...Switches the displayed image according to the value of a word device Part Description Numerical Input Uses either a Keypad or Key Button to write entered numbers Character Input Uses either a Keypad or Key Button to write the character code for entered characters Picture Display Displays images Switches moves or enlarges reduces the displayed image according to the value of a word device the bit s...

Page 244: ...destination address or to perform operations on the written value Goto Screen Command Switches to another screen or displays a window when certain trigger conditions are satisfied Script Command Executes a script when certain trigger conditions are satisfied Multi Command Executes multiple commands at once when certain trigger conditions are satisfied Timer Starts a countdown when certain trigger ...

Page 245: ...nges to pencil 2 Click and hold the mouse button at the location starting point to start drawing the line on the edit screen 3 Drag the mouse to the ending point location A line is drawn that connects the starting point and ending point Chapter 6 Drawings 1 Shapes Ending point Starting point Drag To change the style of the drawn line perform one of the following operations Double click the line to...

Page 246: ...Long Dash Dot Dot can only be configured when 1 dot or 2 dots is selected for Line Width Line Color Selects the line color for the line color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click this button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Blink Select this check box to make the line blink The blink interval is specified with Blinking Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settin...

Page 247: ... drawn that connects the last corner point and the ending point Ending point Starting point Corner point Corner point The maximum number of corner points in a polyline including the starting point and the ending point is 300 points To change the style of the drawn polyline perform one of the following operations Double click the polyline to open the Properties dialog box Select the polyline and se...

Page 248: ...line color for the polyline color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click this button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Blink Select this check box to make the polyline blink The blink interval is specified with Blinking Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box Coordinates Size X Y Specifies the display position of the polyline in coordinates With th...

Page 249: ...reated 4 Double click at the ending point location A polygon is drawn with the starting point and ending point connected Corner point Starting point Ending point Corner point To change the style of the drawn polygon perform one of the following operations Double click the polygon to open the Properties dialog box Select the polygon and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab Select the...

Page 250: ... colors monochrome 8 shades Click either button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Pattern Selects the pattern for the polygon Click this button to display the Pattern Palette Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette Blink Select this check box to make the polygon blink The blink interval is specified with Blinking Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings di...

Page 251: ... start drawing the rectangle on the edit screen 3 Drag the mouse to the ending point location so that location becomes the opposite angle of the rectangle A rectangle is drawn with the starting point and ending point set to opposite angles Ending point Drag Starting point To change the style of the drawn rectangle perform one of the following operations Double click the rectangle to open the Prope...

Page 252: ...se for the rectangle color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click either button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Pattern Selects the pattern for the rectangle Click this button to display the Pattern Palette Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette Blink Select this check box to make the rectangle blink The blink interval is specified with Blinking Cycle on the Sys...

Page 253: ... selected for Line Type Coordinates Size Convex Concave None X Y Specifies the display position of the rectangle in coordinates With the upper left corner of the screen as the origin the upper left corner of the rectangle is the X and Y coordinates X 0 to Base Screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to Base Screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Rectangle W H Specifies the size of the rectangle in width and h...

Page 254: ...e on the edit screen 3 Drag the mouse to the ending point location so that location becomes the opposite angle of the rectangle A circle or ellipse is drawn that inscribes the rectangle made from the opposite angles of the starting point and the ending point Ending point Drag Starting point To change the style of the drawn circle or ellipse perform one of the following operations Double click the ...

Page 255: ...ects the foreground color and the background color to use for the circle or ellipse color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click either button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Pattern Selects the pattern for the circle or ellipse Click this button to display the Pattern Palette Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette Blink Select this check box to make the circle ...

Page 256: ...origin the upper left corner of the rectangle that circumscribes the circle or ellipse is the X and Y coordinates X 0 to Base Screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to Base Screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Circle ellipse W H Specifies the size of the circle or ellipse in width and height W 3 to Base Screen horizontal size H 3 to Base Screen vertical size Width Height Screen Circle ellipse ...

Page 257: ...ectangle An arc is drawn that inscribes the rectangle made from the opposite angles of the starting point and the ending point Ending point Drag Starting point To change the style of the drawn arc perform one of the following operations Double click the arc to open the Properties dialog box Select the arc and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab Select the arc and right click to dis...

Page 258: ...e line color for the arc color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click this button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Blink Select this check box to make the arc blink The blink interval is specified with Blinking Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box Coordinates Size X Y Specifies the display position of the arc in coordinates With the upper left ...

Page 259: ...le of the rectangle A pie is drawn that inscribes the rectangle made from the opposite angles of the starting point and the ending point Ending point Drag Starting point To change the style of the drawn pie perform one of the following operations Double click the pie to open the Properties dialog box Select the pie and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab Select the pie and right cl...

Page 260: ...or and the background color to use for the pie color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click either button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Pattern Selects the pattern for the pie Click this button to display the Pattern Palette Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette Blink Select this check box to make the pie blink The blink interval is specified with Blinking Cy...

Page 261: ...artAXIS Touch User s Manual 6 17 1 Shapes 6 Drawings Size W H Specifies the size of the pie in width and height W 3 to Base Screen horizontal size H 3 to Base Screen vertical size Width Height Screen Pie ...

Page 262: ...pencil 2 Click and hold the mouse button at the location starting point on the edit screen to start drawing the square that will circumscribe the equilateral polygon 3 Drag the mouse to the ending point location so that location becomes the opposite angle of the square An equilateral polygon is drawn that inscribes the square made from the opposite angles of the starting point and the ending point...

Page 263: ...round color and the background color to use for the equilateral polygon color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click either button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Pattern Selects the pattern for the equilateral polygon Click this button to display the Pattern Palette Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette Blink Select this check box to make the equilateral polyg...

Page 264: ...0 SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual Size W H Specifies the size of the equilateral polygon in width and height W 1 to Base Screen horizontal size H 1 to Base Screen vertical size Width Height Screen Equilateral polygon ...

Page 265: ... shape last drawn or the shape that last had its style changed The clicked location is the fill starting point Fill starting point To change the fill style perform one of the following operations Double click the fill starting point to open the Properties dialog box Select the fill starting point and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab Select the fill starting point and right click...

Page 266: ...e 8 shades Click either button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Pattern Selects the pattern to fill with Click this button to display the Pattern Palette Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette Coordinates X Y Specifies the display position of the fill start position in coordinates The upper left corner of the screen is the origin X 0 to Base Screen horizontal s...

Page 267: ...sor changes to picture 2 Click the location on the edit screen to place the picture Picture Manager is displayed 3 Select a picture and then click Select The selected picture is placed on the screen 2 Picture To change the picture that was placed on the screen perform one of the following operations Double click the picture to open the Properties dialog box and then click Browse Replace the pictur...

Page 268: ...ng Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box Coordinates Size X Y Specifies the display position of the picture in coordinates With the upper left corner of the screen as the origin the upper left corner of the rectangle that circumscribes the picture is the X and Y coordinates X 0 to Base Screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to Base Screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Picture W H Speci...

Page 269: ...box is displayed 3 Enter the text to display in Text and configure the options as necessary The maximum number is 3 750 characters 4 Click OK The text is placed on the screen 3 Text To change the style of the text placed on the screen perform one of the following operations You can change the entered text in the Properties dialog box Double click the text to open the Properties dialog box Select t...

Page 270: ...o Appendix 5 Text Alignment on page A 5 Align Text Vertical Selects text alignment in the vertical direction Top Center Bottom Top when the Vertical Writing check box is selected For details refer to Appendix 5 Text Alignment on page A 5 Vertical Writing Select this check box to display text vertically This option can only be configured when Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central Europ...

Page 271: ...xt Manager check box is cleared Text Color Selects the color for the displayed text color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click this button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Magnification This option can only be configured when Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic is selected for Font Background Color Selects the background ...

Page 272: ...text or the upper left corner of the text area is the X and Y coordinates When the Use Text Area check box is cleared the coordinates are for the text When the Use Text Area check box is selected the coordinates are for the text area X 0 to Base Screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to Base Screen vertical size 1 IDEC IDEC 0 0 X Y 0 0 X Y Screen Text Screen Text area When Use Text Area is cleared When Use ...

Page 273: ... to a bit device Set Reset Chapter 7 Buttons 1 Bit Button Touch External device 0 1 Pressing the button writes a 1 to the bit device Release Initial image Press Release Press 1 Operation and view Data written 1 Write Action Write Pressing the button writes a 0 to the bit device Release Initial image Press Release Press 0 Operation and view Data written 0 Write Action Write ...

Page 274: ... to the bit device Each press of the button alternately writes a 1 or 0 to the bit device Release Initial image Press Release Press 1 Operation and view Data written 0 Write Action Write Pressing the button inverts the value of the bit device If the value of the bit device is 0 it changes to 1 and vice versa Release Initial image Press Release Press Operation and view Toggle Action Toggle Pressing...

Page 275: ...ab in the Parts group click Buttons and then click Bit Button 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Bit Button 3 Double click the dropped Bit Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode To switch to Advanced mode click Advanced ...

Page 276: ...the button is OFF or ON Action Mode Select the behavior of the button from the following To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON select the Set by State check box on the Registration Text tab If left unchecked the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state is displayed for the ON state as well Set Pressing the button writes a 1 to the bit device Reset Pressing the butt...

Page 277: ...ite Write Pressing and holding the button until the screen changes causes a 0 to be written to the bit device Alternate Each press of the button alternately writes a 1 or 0 to the bit device Toggle Pressing the button inverts the value of the bit device If the value of the bit device is 0 it changes to 1 and vice versa Move Pressing the button writes the value in the source bit device to the value...

Page 278: ...is set to Move Example This button writes the values in a contiguous block of bit devices to a contiguous block of devices at the destination 1 Advanced mode only 1 1 M0 1 M1 1 M2 1 M3 1 M4 Action Mode Set Write 5 Destination Device M0 bit bit 15 0 1 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 1 1 1 1 Action Mode Set Write 5 Destination Device D0 15 Device Specify the source bit device Click to display the Device Address Sett...

Page 279: ...not displayed on the screen The button appears as a dashed line frame on the edit screen Pressing the corresponding area on the Touch activates the assigned function If No Image is selected the settings for View and Registration Text are disabled Selecting Device in View Switching Method allows you to create an illuminated pushbutton The illuminated pushbutton switches state or image according to ...

Page 280: ...ON Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF Blink Select this check box if blinking is desired alternating ON and OFF when a part is ON Standard Uses the default graphics contained within WindO I NV3 Picture Uses an image file saved in Picture Manager For details about image file restrictions refer to Chapter 2 1 5 Available Image Files on page 2 19 Foreground Color Ba...

Page 281: ...nd Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to Base Screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to Base Screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 20 to Base Screen horizontal size H 20 to Base Screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 282: ...et when Font is set to Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Magnification Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Align Text Vertical Selects text alignment in the vertical direction Top Center Bottom For details refer to Appendix 5 Text Alignment on page A 5 Align Text Horizontal S...

Page 283: ...Text Manager ID No 1 to 32000 when using the text registered in Text Manager Click to display Text Manager Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected Text Color Selects the color of the text displayed on the part color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click the Color button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Windows Font Sets the font to be used a...

Page 284: ...LM0 While LM0 is 0 the condition is not satisfied and the Button is not operational While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the Button is operational Trigger Type Selects the condition to enable the Button from the following Always Enabled The Button is always enabled While ON Enables the Button when the value of device is 1 LM0 Touch 0 LM0 1 Button Does not operate Button Operates Condition...

Page 285: ...is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Conditio...

Page 286: ...splay of parts is restricted Default None None No security function is used Administrator Operator Reader Three security groups are set up by default Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box If you create a security group on the Security Group Settings dialog box you can select that created group For details refer to Chapter 21 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 21 15 In...

Page 287: ...User Name Security Group None Group A Group A Group B User1 User2 User3 Touch 130 Line Chart and Bar Chart Display Group A Button Display Group A Input Group B Numerical Display Display None Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 Group A parts are not displayed to User1 Group A parts are displayed to User2 Touch 130 Touch Touch 130 User1 User2 130 Password ENT User2 BS CLR OK A B ...

Page 288: ...ose to No Name or Type in the object list Description Enter a comment comments about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Button on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over the par...

Page 289: ...ing the button writes the value of device address to a word device Pressing the button performs arithmetic on the value to write before writing it to a word device 2 Word Button Touch External device D1 0 100 D1 100 Write Destination word device 100 Value 100 D1 External device D0 123 D1 0 D0 123 D1 123 Move Value in device Destination word device D0 D1 Touch External device D0 100 D1 23 D2 0 D0 1...

Page 290: ...n Write Value in device Pressing the button writes the constant value of ON data to a word device Releasing the button writes the constant value of OFF data to a word device Release Press Release Press Initial image Write ON data Operation and view Action Data written Write ON data Write OFF data Write OFF data Pressing and holding the button until the screen changes causes the OFF data to be writ...

Page 291: ...dition Pressing the button adds the value in the Source 1 to the Source 2 value and writes the sum in the word device Release Initial image Press Release Press Arithmetic operation Write Operation and view Action Data written Result Arithmetic operation Write Result Release Initial image Press Release Press Addition Write Operation and view Action Value of Reference Device 100 200 300 400 500 Data...

Page 292: ...n the Parts group click Buttons and then click Word Button 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Word Button 3 Double click the dropped Word Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode To switch to Advanced mode click Advanced ...

Page 293: ...elect the behavior of the button from the following To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON select the Set by State check box on the Registration Text tab If left unchecked the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state is displayed for the ON state as well Set Pressing the button writes a constant value to a word device Move Pressing the button writes the value in the...

Page 294: ...Div Mod OR AND XOR Pressing the button performs arithmetic on the value in a reference device and a constant value or the value in a device address and writes the result to a word device Example Add Addition Pressing the button adds the value in the Source 1 to the Source 2 value and writes the sum in the word device Release Press Release Press Initial image Write ON data Operation and view Action...

Page 295: ...rror on page 3 25 Value Use a constant Only a Value can be handled if Action Mode is set to Set Momentary or Alternate If Action Mode is set to Momentary or Alternate the value in the ON Data is written when the button is ON and the value in the OFF Data is written when the button is OFF Hexadecimal Select this check box to enter the ON Data and OFF Data values in hexadecimal Device Use a word dev...

Page 296: ... Settings on page 2 5 Write Specify the number of word devices 1 to 64 at the destination For Move specify how many times to write This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Set Momentary Alternate or Move Example If Data Type is set to BIN16 and Write is set to 5 the same data will be written to 5 continuous word addresses Example If Data Type is set to BIN32 and Write is set to 5 the ...

Page 297: ...not displayed on the screen The button appears as a dashed line frame on the edit screen Pressing the corresponding area on the Touch activates the assigned function If No Image is selected the settings for View and Registration Text are disabled Selecting Device in View Switching Method allows you to create an illuminated pushbutton The illuminated pushbutton switches state or image according to ...

Page 298: ... ON Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF Blink Select this check box if blinking is desired alternating ON and OFF when a part is ON Standard Uses the default graphics contained within WindO I NV3 Picture Uses an image file saved in Picture Manager For details about image file restrictions refer to Chapter 2 1 5 Available Image Files on page 2 19 Foreground Color B...

Page 299: ...and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to Base Screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to Base Screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 20 to Base Screen horizontal size H 20 to Base Screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 300: ...et when Font is set to Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Magnification Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Align Text Vertical Selects text alignment in the vertical direction Top Center Bottom For details refer to Appendix 5 Text Alignment on page A 5 Align Text Horizontal S...

Page 301: ...Text Manager ID No 1 to 32000 when using the text registered in Text Manager Click to display Text Manager Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected Text Color Selects the color of the text displayed on the part color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click the Color button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Windows Font Sets the font to be used a...

Page 302: ... LM0 While LM0 is 0 the condition is not satisfied and the Button is not operational While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the Button is operational Trigger Type Selects the condition to enable the Button from the following Always Enabled The Button is always enabled While ON Enables the Button when the value of device is 1 LM0 Touch 0 LM0 1 Button Does not operate Button Operates Conditio...

Page 303: ...is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Conditio...

Page 304: ...splay of parts is restricted Default None None No security function is used Administrator Operator Reader Three security groups are set up by default Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box If you create a security group on the Security Group Settings dialog box you can select that created group For details refer to Chapter 21 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 21 15 In...

Page 305: ... User Name Security Group None Group A Group A Group B User1 User2 User3 Touch 130 Line Chart and Bar Chart Display Group A Button Display Group A Input Group B Numerical Display Display None Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 Group A parts are not displayed to User1 Group A parts are displayed to User2 Touch 130 Touch Touch 130 User1 User2 130 Password ENT User2 BS CLR OK A B...

Page 306: ...ed close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Enter a comment about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Button on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over the part ...

Page 307: ...ns and closes other windows such as the Popup Screen Device Monitor Ladder Monitor Password Screen and Adjust Contrast Screen Pressing the button switches to the System Mode Pressing the button resets the current screen 3 Goto Screen Button Touch Touch 130 Full Tank 1 Touch Touch D51 D52 456 D53 0 999 123 Touch D51 D52 456 D53 0 999 123 Touch Touch Touch 130 3 GG 3 8 5 6 67 0 02 723 3 5 71 66 5XQ ...

Page 308: ...n the Parts group click Buttons and then click Goto Screen Button 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Goto Screen Button 3 Double click the dropped Goto Screen Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode To switch to Advanced mode click Advanced ...

Page 309: ... 20 characters OFF Text ON Text Applies the text entered in the Part Name field to the Text field under the OFF or ON fields on the Registration Text tab This is used as the Registration Text when the button is OFF or ON To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON select the Set by State check box on the Registration Text tab If left unchecked the same Registration Text assigned ...

Page 310: ...he Ladder Monitor For details refer to Chapter 24 2 3 Ladder Monitor on page 24 23 Open Password Screen Opens the Password Screen For details refer to Chapter 21 4 1 Entering the Password on the Touch on page 21 36 Close Password Screen Closes the Password Screen For details refer to CChapter 21 4 1 Entering the Password on the Touch on page 21 36 Open Adjust contrast Screen Opens the Adjust contr...

Page 311: ... specify a device to specify the coordinates using the value of the specified device Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup Screen Button Pressing the button changes the drawing object displayed Device The drawi...

Page 312: ... OFF ON Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF Blink Select this check box if blinking is desired alternating ON and OFF when a part is ON Standard Uses the default graphics contained within WindO I NV3 Picture Uses an image file saved in Picture Manager For details about image file restrictions refer to Chapter 2 1 5 Available Image Files on page 2 19 Foreground Col...

Page 313: ...e X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to Base Screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to Base Screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 20 to Base Screen horizontal size H 20 to Base Screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 314: ...be set when Font is set to Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Magnification Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Align Text Vertical Selects text alignment in the vertical direction Top Center Bottom For details refer to Appendix 5 Text Alignment on page A 5 Align Text Horizont...

Page 315: ...the Text Manager ID No 1 to 32000 when using the text registered in Text Manager Click to display Text Manager Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected Text Color Selects the color of the text displayed on the part color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click the Color button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Windows Font Sets the font to be us...

Page 316: ... is LM0 While LM0 is 0 the condition is not satisfied and the Button is not operational While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the Button is operational Trigger Type Selects the condition to enable the Button from the following Always Enabled The Button is always enabled While ON Enables the Button when the value of device is 1 LM0 Touch 0 LM0 1 Button Does not operate Button Operates Condi...

Page 317: ...OFF is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Cond...

Page 318: ...h display of parts is restricted Default None None No security function is used Administrator Operator Reader Three security groups are set up by default Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box If you create a security group on the Security Group Settings dialog box you can select that created group For details refer to Chapter 21 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 21 1...

Page 319: ...art User Name Security Group None Group A Group A Group B User1 User2 User3 Touch 130 Line Chart and Bar Chart Display Group A Button Display Group A Input Group B Numerical Display Display None Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 Group A parts are not displayed to User1 Group A parts are displayed to User2 Touch 130 Touch Touch 130 User1 User2 130 Password ENT User2 BS CLR OK ...

Page 320: ...placed close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Enter a comment about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Button on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over the par...

Page 321: ...utton Display reference screen Time 09 15 Motor fault Message 10 02 Pump1 fault REV Up Dwn Del Ref 10 28 High pressure 13 02 Pump 1 fault Time 09 15 Motor fault Message 10 02 Pump1 fault REV Up Dwn Del Ref 10 28 High pressure 13 02 Pump 1 fault Time 09 15 Motor fault Message 10 02 Pump1 fault REV Up Dwn Del Ref 10 28 High pressure 13 02 Pump 1 fault Time 09 15 Motor fault Message 10 02 Pump1 fault...

Page 322: ...n the Parts group click Buttons and then click Key Button 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Key Button 3 Double click the dropped Key Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode To switch to Advanced mode click Advanced ...

Page 323: ... number to open a Keypad for This setting is enabled only if Alt was selected using the Key Browser Displays settings applicable to the selected key Key To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON select the Set by State check box on the Registration Text tab If left unchecked the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state is displayed for the ON state as well Language Swi...

Page 324: ... and destination This setting is enabled only if one of these keys is selected after clicking Data Transfer in the Key Browser If Download Project is selected If Upload Project is selected Source This is set to the USB flash drive on which the project file to transfer ZNV was saved File Path Specify the path to the project file ZNV to transfer The maximum number is 247 characters Example Where FT_...

Page 325: ...ot displayed on the screen The button appears as a dashed line frame on the edit screen Pressing the corresponding area on the Touch activates the assigned function If No Image is selected the settings for View and Registration Text are disabled Selecting Device in View Switching Method allows you to create an illuminated pushbutton The illuminated pushbutton switches state or image according to O...

Page 326: ...b OFF ON Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF Blink Select this check box if blinking is desired alternating ON and OFF when a part is ON Standard Uses the default graphic for WindO I NV3 Picture Uses an image file saved using Picture Manager For details about image file restrictions refer to Chapter 2 1 5 Available Image Files on page 2 19 Foreground Color Backgro...

Page 327: ...and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to Base Screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to Base Screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 20 to Base Screen horizontal size H 20 to Base Screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 328: ...et when Font is set to Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Magnification Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Align Text Vertical Selects text alignment in the vertical direction Top Center Bottom For details refer to Appendix 5 Text Alignment on page A 5 Align Text Horizontal S...

Page 329: ...Text Manager ID No 1 to 32000 when using the text registered in Text Manager Click to display Text Manager Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected Text Color Selects the color of the text displayed on the part color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click the Color button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Windows Font Sets the font to be used a...

Page 330: ...LM0 While LM0 is 0 the condition is not satisfied and the Button is not operational While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the Button is operational Trigger Type Selects the condition to enable the Button from the following Always Enabled The Button is always enabled While ON Enables the Button when the value of device is 1 LM0 Touch 0 LM0 1 Button Does not operate Button Operates Condition...

Page 331: ...is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Conditio...

Page 332: ...splay of parts is restricted Default None None No security function is used Administrator Operator Reader Three security groups are set up by default Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box If you create a security group on the Security Group Settings dialog box you can select that created group For details refer to Chapter 21 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 21 15 In...

Page 333: ...User Name Security Group None Group A Group A Group B User1 User2 User3 Touch 130 Line Chart and Bar Chart Display Group A Button Display Group A Input Group B Numerical Display Display None Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 Group A parts are not displayed to User1 Group A parts are displayed to User2 Touch 130 Touch Touch 130 User1 User2 130 Password ENT User2 BS CLR OK A B ...

Page 334: ...ed close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Enter a comment about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Button on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over the part ...

Page 335: ...moved according to the Focus Order setting Focus Order can be set on the Options tab of the Screen Properties dialog box Fcs Moves the focus one item before the current one as per the Focus Order setting Focus Order can be set on the Options tab of the Screen Properties dialog box Fcs Moves the focus one item after the current one as per the Focus Order setting Focus Order can be set on the Option...

Page 336: ...ut in ASCII code form to a device After the data is written the focus can be moved according to the Focus Order setting Focus Order can be set on the Options tab of the Screen Properties dialog box SP Inputs a space Cur Moves the cursor right Cur Moves the cursor left Fcs Moves the focus one item before the current one as per the Focus Order setting Focus Order can be set on the Options tab of the...

Page 337: ...Dwn Moves the focus the number of lines 1 to 1023 specified in Scroll Size The current point of focus can be shown by pressing REVERSE REVERSE Toggles the focus between show and hide Ref The reference screen appears Press and hold the Pg Up Pg Dwn Cur and Cur keys for more than one second to move the focus repeatedly Key Operation Fcs Up Moves the focus the number of lines 1 to 1023 specified in S...

Page 338: ...hown in Key Type Settings that apply to the selected key are displayed Select the key type from the following uses Keypad Data Transfer Alarm Display Keypad These buttons are used for Numerical Input and Character Input Data Transfer These buttons are used to execute Data Transfer functions When you select a key the label for that key is assigned as the Registration Text ...

Page 339: ...SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual 7 67 4 Key Button 7 Buttons Alarm Display These buttons are used to manipulate the Alarm List Display and Alarm Log Display parts ...

Page 340: ...Command Description Bit Write Writes a 0 or 1 to the specified bit device when pressed Word Write Writes a value to a word device when pressed You can specify the destination address indirectly and perform arithmetic on the value to be written Goto Screen Switches screens or opens other windows when pressed Key Performs downloads or uploads when pressed Also used to manipulate other parts Script E...

Page 341: ...tab in the Parts group click Buttons and then click Multi Button 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Multi Button 3 Double click the dropped Multi Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode To switch to Advanced mode click Advanced ...

Page 342: ...he button is OFF or ON Action Mode Select the Action Mode for the Multi Button Momentary or Alternate To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON select the Set by State check box on the Registration Text tab If left unchecked the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state is displayed for the ON state as well Momentary The button turns ON when pressed and OFF when release...

Page 343: ... the command to add Bit Write Writes a 0 or 1 to the bit device or bit of the word device For details refer to Properties of Bit Write for Multi Functions dialog box on page 7 73 Word Write Writes a value to a word device Can be used to indirectly specify the destination address or to perform operations on the written value For details refer to Properties of Word Write for Multi Functions dialog b...

Page 344: ...isplayed on the screen The button appears as a dashed line frame on the edit screen Pressing the corresponding area on the Touch activates the assigned function If No Image is selected the settings for View and Registration Text are disabled Selecting Device in View Switching Method allows you to create an illuminated pushbutton The illuminated pushbutton switches state or image according to ON or...

Page 345: ... enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move For details refer to Source Data on page 7 6 1 Advanced mode only Set Pressing the button writes a 1 to the bit device Reset Pressing the button writes a 0 to the bit device Set Reset Pressing the button writes a 1 to the bit device Releasing the button writes a 0 to the bit device Toggle Pressing the button inverts the value of the bit device If the val...

Page 346: ...rd device Move Pressing the button writes the value in the source device to the destination word device Set ON OFF Data Pressing the button writes the constant value of ON data to a word device Releasing the button writes the constant value of OFF data to a word device Add Sub Multi Div Mod OR AND XOR Pressing the button performs arithmetic on the value in a reference device and a constant value o...

Page 347: ...ified device This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move For details refer to Chapter 2 Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings on page 2 5 Transfer 1 Specify the number of word devices 1 to 64 to transfer This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move For details refer to Transfer on page 7 23 Destination Device Specify the destination word device Click to display the...

Page 348: ... Close Device Monitor Screen Closes the Device Monitor Screen Open Ladder Monitor Opens the Ladder Monitor Close Ladder Monitor Closes the Ladder Monitor Open Password Screen Opens the Password Screen Close Password Screen Closes the Password Screen Open Adjust contrast Screen Opens the Adjust contrast Screen Close Adjust contrast Screen Closes the Adjust contrast Screen Switch to System Mode Swit...

Page 349: ... page 2 62 This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup Screen or Close Popup Screen Coordinates X Y Specify the coordinates on the Base Screen for displaying a window X and Y specify the upper left corner of the window using the upper left corner of the screen as the origin This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup Screen Open Device Monitor Screen Open ...

Page 350: ...ns Fcs Up and Fcs Dwn move the focus up and down respectively This settings specifies the number of pages or lines 1 to 1023 lines to scroll or move the focus per each press of the button This setting is enabled only if Pg Up Pg Dwn Fcs Up and Fcs Dwn are selected using the Key Browser Displays settings applicable to the selected key Key Language Switches the display of the key that is displayed w...

Page 351: ... selected Source This is set to the USB flash drive on which the project file to transfer ZNV was saved File Path Specify the path to the project file ZNV to transfer The maximum number is 247 characters Example Where FT_DEMO_1 ZNV is a project file saved on the root directory of a USB flash drive FT_DEMO_1 ZNV Source Specify where to save the project uploaded from Touch The location is the USB fl...

Page 352: ...000 of the script to operate Script Manager will open when is clicked Select a script from the script list For details refer to Chapter 20 2 2 Script Manager on page 20 7 Script Name Displays the name of the script selected in Script Manager Script Displays the contents of the script selected in Script Manager Once this area is double clicked the Script Editor will open and editing can be done For...

Page 353: ...ab OFF ON Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF Blink Select this check box if blinking is desired alternating ON and OFF when a part is ON Standard Uses the default graphics contained within WindO I NV3 Picture Uses an image file saved in Picture Manager For details about image file restrictions refer to Chapter 2 1 5 Available Image Files on page 2 19 Foreground C...

Page 354: ...Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to Base Screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to Base Screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 20 to Base Screen horizontal size H 20 to Base Screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 355: ...y be set when Font is set to Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Magnification Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Align Text Vertical Selects text alignment in the vertical direction Top Center Bottom For details refer to Appendix 5 Text Alignment on page A 5 Align Text Horizo...

Page 356: ... Manager ID No 1 to 32000 when using the text registered in Text Manager Click to display Text Manager Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected Text Color Selects the color of the text displayed on the part color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click the Color button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Windows Font Sets the font to be used as th...

Page 357: ...ce is LM0 While LM0 is 0 the condition is not satisfied and the Button is not operational While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the Button is operational Trigger Type Selects the condition to enable the Button from the following Always Enabled The Button is always enabled While ON Enables the Button when the value of device is 1 LM0 Touch 0 LM0 1 Button Does not operate Button Operates Con...

Page 358: ...elected for Trigger Type Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Condition Se...

Page 359: ...ich display of parts is restricted Default None None No security function is used Administrator Operator Reader Three security groups are set up by default Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box If you create a security group on the Security Group Settings dialog box you can select that created group For details refer to Chapter 21 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 21...

Page 360: ... Name Security Group None Group A Group A Group B User1 User2 User3 Touch 130 Line Chart and Bar Chart Display Group A Button Display Group A Input Group B Numerical Display Display None Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 Group A parts are not displayed to User1 Group A parts are displayed to User2 Touch 130 Touch Touch 130 User1 User2 130 Password ENT User2 BS CLR OK A B C D ...

Page 361: ...s placed close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Enter a comment about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Button on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over the p...

Page 362: ...nto Numerical or Character Input parts Entering numbers in the Numerical Input Entering characters in the Character Input 6 Keypad 1230 Touch Numerical Input Keypad Touch Character Input Keypad Do not use the Keypad part with the Goto Screen Button or a combination of Goto Screen Commands For details refer to 4 Key Button on page 7 49 ...

Page 363: ...nge the settings on each tab as necessary The Keypad Properties dialog box is displayed until OK is clicked F Refer to 6 3 Properties of Keypad Dialog Box on page 7 92 After OK on the Keypad Properties dialog box is clicked double clicking the Keypad thereafter displays the Properties dialog box for the Key Buttons as a group This allows editing of settings common to each button View View Tab on p...

Page 364: ...ette Font Select one of the following fonts to use for the text on the buttons Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic Cyrillic The characters that can be displayed depend on the font For details refer to Chapter 2 1 3 Available Text on page 2 6 Style Select a character style Regular or Bold Magnification W H Select the zoom factor 0 5 1 to 8 to use on the text This sett...

Page 365: ...Touch User s Manual 7 93 6 Keypad 7 Buttons Size W H Specify the size of the Keypad by specifying width and height W 20 to Base Screen horizontal size H 20 to Base Screen vertical size Width Height Screen Keypad ...

Page 366: ...nd Auto Switching between three Run Modes Filling Stop Discharge 7 Selector Switch Automatic Manual Automatic Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual R button Ch2 Ch1 L button Knob Press L button to switch to Auto Press R button to switch to Manual Operate manually F S D F S D F S D F S D R button Ch3 Ch2 Ch1 L button Knob Press L button to switch to Filling Switch to Stop The operation varies based o...

Page 367: ...me tab in the Parts group click Buttons and then click Selector Switch 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Selector Switch 3 Double click the dropped Selector Switch and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode To switch to Advanced mode click Advanced ...

Page 368: ... device for Ch1 is set to 1 and Ch2 is set to 0 The 3 notch action is as follows The knob behaves as follows for 3 Notch No return 3 Notch R return and 3 Notch L return button Press R button knob switches from Ch1 left Ch2 middle Ch3 right in that order Press L button knob switches from Ch3 right Ch2 middle Ch1 left in that order Switching the knob writes 1 to the device for the new knob position ...

Page 369: ...sed If the knob is switched to Ch1 or from Ch1 to Ch2 it stays where it is even if the button is released Release Default state Press 0 1 1 0 Write Write Ch1 Ch2 Action Operation and view Data written Release Default state Press 0 1 1 0 Write Write Ch1 Ch2 Action Operation and view Data written Release Default state Press R button Release Press L button Release Press L button 0 0 1 Ch1 Ch2 0 1 0 C...

Page 370: ...ermines the number of channels Double clicking the cell displays the Notch Settings dialog box where you can edit the notch settings For details refer to Notch Settings dialog box on page 7 100 Device Shows the destination bit device or bit in the destination word device Double clicking the cell displays the Device Address Settings dialog box where you can edit the device address For the device ad...

Page 371: ...es 0 to the devices configured for the other channels Ch3 Makes Ch3 the default knob position Writes 1 to the device configured for Ch3 writes 0 to the devices configured for the other channels Read from Destination Device The position of the knob is determined by the value of device The default knob position is fixed for these two switch types because of the return functionality 2 Notch R return ...

Page 372: ...ers that can be entered depends on the font selected for Font on the Format tab For details refer to Chapter 2 1 3 Available Text on page 2 6 Text ID To use the text registered in Text Manager as the Registration Text for the channel specify the ID number from 1 to 32 000 Click to display Text Manager This setting is only enabled if you select the Use Text Manager check box Text Color Select the R...

Page 373: ...background colors of the flange color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click the Color button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Pattern Selects a pattern for the flange Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette Flange Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and background colors of the buttons c...

Page 374: ...d Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to Base Screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to Base Screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 20 to Base Screen horizontal size H 20 to Base Screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 375: ...m the following Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic Cyrillic The characters that can be displayed depend on the font For details refer to Chapter 2 1 3 Available Text on page 2 6 Style Selects Regular or Bold for text style Magnification W H Selects the magnification 0 5 1 to 8 for text display ...

Page 376: ... 0 the condition is not satisfied and the Selector Switch is not operational While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the Selector Switch is operational Trigger Type Selects the condition to enable the Selector Switch from the following Always Enabled The Selector Switch is always enabled While ON Enables the Selector Switch when the value of device is 1 LM0 Touch 0 LM0 1 Button Does not oper...

Page 377: ...FF is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Condi...

Page 378: ... Security Group Settings dialog box you can select that created group For details refer to Chapter 21 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 21 15 Input Selects the security group for which operation of parts is restricted Default None None No security function is used Administrator Operator Reader Three security groups are set up by default Click to display the Security Group Settings dia...

Page 379: ...rt User Name Security Group None Group A Group A Group B User1 User2 User3 Touch 130 Line Chart and Bar Chart Display Group A Button Display Group A Input Group B Numerical Display Display None Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 Group A parts are not displayed to User1 Group A parts are displayed to User2 Touch 130 Touch Touch 130 User1 User2 130 Password ENT User2 BS CLR OK A...

Page 380: ... close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Enter a comment about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Selector Switch on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over the ...

Page 381: ...pressed The value of the slider at the displayed position is written to the device when the button is released 8 Potentiometer D0 0 Value of slider at displayed position 105 127 Value of slider at displayed position D0 127 Touch D0 Value of slider at displayed position 0 External device 0 Write to device Default state Press R button Release Press L button Release Operation and view Slider Stop Mov...

Page 382: ...b in the Parts group click Buttons and then click Potentiometer 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Potentiometer 3 Double click the dropped Potentiometer and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode To switch to Advanced mode click Advanced ...

Page 383: ... the Potentiometer For details refer to Chapter 2 1 2 Available Data on page 2 2 Minimum Specify the minimum value that can be entered The minimum value varies based on the data type Maximum Specify the maximum value that can be entered The maximum value varies based on the data type Destination Device Specify the destination word device Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For ...

Page 384: ...he Color Palette Plate Color Selects the plate color color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click the Color button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Flange Slider Plate color Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click the Color button to display the Color Palette Select a col...

Page 385: ...tern for the button Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette Buttons X Y Sets the display position of parts using coordinates The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to Base Screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to Base Screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and h...

Page 386: ...0 is 0 the condition is not satisfied and the Potentiometer is not operational While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the Potentiometer is operational Trigger Type Selects the condition to enable the Potentiometer from the following Always Enabled The Potentiometer is always enabled While ON Enables the Potentiometer when the value of device is 1 LM0 Touch 0 LM0 1 Button Does not operate Bu...

Page 387: ...F is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Condit...

Page 388: ...Security Group Settings dialog box you can select that created group For details refer to Chapter 21 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 21 15 Input Selects the security group for which operation of parts is restricted Default None None No security function is used Administrator Operator Reader Three security groups are set up by default Click to display the Security Group Settings dial...

Page 389: ...t User Name Security Group None Group A Group A Group B User1 User2 User3 Touch 130 Line Chart and Bar Chart Display Group A Button Display Group A Input Group B Numerical Display Display None Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 Group A parts are not displayed to User1 Group A parts are displayed to User2 Touch 130 Touch Touch 130 User1 User2 130 Password ENT User2 BS CLR OK A ...

Page 390: ... close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Enter a comment about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Potentiometer on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over the pa...

Page 391: ... parts and related Touch operations 1 1 How the Pilot Lamp is Used Pilot Lamp parts display drawing objects The value of a bit device is used to switch the drawing object displayed Switch and display pictures by the values of devices Chapter 8 Lamps 1 Pilot Lamps Touch External device 0 1 ...

Page 392: ...he Home tab in the Parts group click Lamps and then click Pilot Lamp 2 Click a point on the Edit screen where you want to place the Pilot Lamp 3 Double click the dropped Pilot Lamp and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode To switch to Advanced mode click Advanced ...

Page 393: ...ecked the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state is displayed for the ON state as well No Blink only ON Displays the drawing object for the ON state when the trigger condition is satisfied Blink ON Blink When the condition is satisfied and the value of the trigger device is 1 the object blinks alternates between the drawing object for the ON and OFF states at fixed time interval The bli...

Page 394: ...ON Device is LM0 0 Displayed drawing object Trigger Condition Device LM0 value 1 1 0 0 Action Mode Value in trigger device M0 0 1 1 Displays OFF drawing object Action Displays ON drawing object Blinking Displays OFF drawing object The lamp will neither turn on or blink if the trigger conditions are not met Lamp trigger conditions are configured on the Trigger Condition tab ...

Page 395: ...o drawing object in the OFF state 1 Advanced mode only Standard Uses the default graphic for WindO I NV3 Picture Uses an image file saved using Picture Manager For details about image file restrictions refer to Chapter 2 1 5 Available Image Files on page 2 19 Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and background colors of the standard graphic color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades ...

Page 396: ... mode only Pilot Lamp Check box cleared Check box selected Drawing Since background parts and drawings are redrawn they return to their original state The screen is filled with Background Color so background parts and drawings are missing If the Recover Background check box is selected the number of parts that can be placed on a single screen decreases If an error message appears when the Picture ...

Page 397: ...nese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Magnification Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Align Text Vertical Selects text alignment in the vertical direction Top Center Bottom For details refer to Appendix 5 Text Alignment on page A 5 Align Text Horizontal Selects text alignment in the horizontal direction Left...

Page 398: ...Manager ID No 1 to 32000 when using the text registered in Text Manager Click to display Text Manager Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected Text Color Selects the color of the text displayed on the part color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click the Color button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Windows Font Sets the font to be used as the...

Page 399: ...ger Type is While ON and Device is LM0 When LM0 is 0 condition is not satisfied so Lamp displays OFF graphic When LM0 is 1 condition is satisfied so Lamp displays OFF graphic Trigger Type Selects the condition to turn on the Pilot Lamp from the following LM0 Touch 0 LM0 1 Condition Not satisfied Condition Satisfied Lamp Displays OFF graphic Lamp Displays ON graphic While ON Turns on the Pilot Lamp...

Page 400: ...edure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the on condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box For the conditional expression configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 2 Setting Conditional Expressio...

Page 401: ...estricted Default None None No security function is used Administrator Operator Reader Three security groups are set up by default Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box If you create a security group on the Security Group Settings dialog box you can select that created group For details refer to Chapter 21 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 21 15 For details about sec...

Page 402: ...ser 2 of Group A Group A parts are displayed User Name Security Group None Group A User1 User2 Touch 130 Line Chart and Bar Chart Display Group A Button Display Group A Numerical Display Display None Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 Group A parts are not displayed to User1 Group A parts are displayed to User2 Touch 130 Touch Touch 130 User1 User2 130 Password ENT User2 BS CL...

Page 403: ...aced close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Enter a comment about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Pilot Lamp on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over the p...

Page 404: ...play drawing objects The value of a specified word device is used to switch the drawing object to be displayed Switch and display pictures by the values of devices 2 Multi State Lamps External device Touch D0 bit15 bit0 bit3 D0 0100 bit0 bit3 D0 0001 bit0 bit3 D0 0010 bit0 bit3 D0 0100 bit0 bit3 State 0 State 1 State 2 ...

Page 405: ... On the Home tab in the Parts group click Lamps and then click Multi State Lamp 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Multi State Lamp 3 Double click the dropped Multi State Lamp and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode To switch to Advanced mode click Advanced ...

Page 406: ... and the bits of trigger device D0 are allocated to the following pictures Switches the picture to display according to the status of the bits bit15 bit0 bit3 Trigger device D0 value Picture State 0 State 1 State 2 Display picture for bit 0 Display picture for bit 1 Display picture for bit 2 No picture Display picture for bit 1 Display picture for bit 2 0001 0010 0100 1000 1110 1100 State 0 State ...

Page 407: ...es the drawing object displayed according to the value of the device Example When Value is selected and the values of Trigger Device D0 are allocated to the following pictures Switches the picture to display according to the value of the device 0 1 2 Trigger device D0 value Picture State 2 State 1 State 0 Display picture for 0 Display picture for 1 Display picture for 2 No picture 0 1 2 3 State 0 ...

Page 408: ...ackground part is the Alarm List Display Alarm Log Display bar chart line chart or pie chart the missing sections will remain 1 Advanced mode only Standard Uses the default graphic for WindO I NV3 Picture Uses an image file saved using Picture Manager For details about image file restrictions refer to Chapter 2 1 5 Available Image Files on page 2 19 Multi State Lamp Check box cleared Check box sel...

Page 409: ...e X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to Base Screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to Base Screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 5 to Base Screen horizontal size H 5 to Base Screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 410: ...ese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Magnification Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic or Cyrillic Align Text Vertical Selects text alignment in the vertical direction Top Center Bottom For details refer to Appendix 5 Text Alignment on page A 5 Align Text Horizontal Selects text alignment in the horizontal direction Left ...

Page 411: ...ndard on the View tab Pattern Shows the pattern for standard images Double clicking the cell opens the Pattern Palette where you can change the pattern of the image This setting can only be changed if Image Type is set to Standard on the View tab Text Color Shows the color of the registration text Double clicking the cell opens the Color Palette where you can change the color of the text Blink Ind...

Page 412: ... in the Font property on the Registration Text tab To change the settings click Change to display the Font Settings dialog box The text ID setting is only enabled if the Use Text Manager check box is cleared For details refer to Chapter 2 Windows Font on page 2 13 Browse Select the drawing object to use for the lamp part Clicking this button opens the View Browser if Standard is selected under Ima...

Page 413: ...s restricted Default None None No security function is used Administrator Operator Reader Three security groups are set up by default Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box If you create a security group on the Security Group Settings dialog box you can select that created group For details refer to Chapter 21 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 21 15 For details about ...

Page 414: ...o User 2 of Group A Group A parts are displayed User Name Security Group None Group A User1 User2 Touch 130 Line Chart and Bar Chart Display Group A Button Display Group A Numerical Display Display None Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 Group A parts are not displayed to User1 Group A parts are displayed to User2 Touch 130 Touch Touch 130 User1 User2 130 Password ENT User2 BS...

Page 415: ...aced close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Enter a comment about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Multi State Lamp on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over...

Page 416: ...2 Multi State Lamps 8 26 SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual ...

Page 417: ... in display mode To enter a value by pressing the keypad or key buttons touch the Numerical Input to switch it to entry mode In entry mode the value of device is displayed until a value is entered The Numerical Input can perform the following functions Write a value entered with the keypad or key buttons to a device Display the current value of device Enter and display decimal numbers Display the ...

Page 418: ... group click Data Displays and then click Numerical Input 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Numerical Input 3 Double click the dropped Numerical Input and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Data Over tab Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode To switch to Advanced mode click Advanced ...

Page 419: ...play Type Popup Uses a keypad configured as a Popup Screen Current Screen Uses the keypad configured on the same screen as the Numerical Input Screen No Specifies the screen number of the Popup Screen configured as the keypad 1 to 3015 This option can only be configured if Popup is selected for Type Adjust location automatically Select this check box to display the Popup Screen configured as the k...

Page 420: ...alue is entered on the keypad in entry mode but an integer is written to the device In display mode source data is an integer but the value is displayed with a decimal point added at the number of floating digits configured for the Numerical Input However if float32 is selected for Data Type both the destination data and the source data are decimal values Example When Display Type is configured as...

Page 421: ...on the standard keypad To change the decimal point symbol on the standard keypad please change the keypad button Suppress Zeros Select this check box to hide 0 for the upper digits of the integer part Example Suppress Zeros selected 1234 Suppress Zeros cleared 00001234 Not Display Sign Select this check box to hide the negative symbol when displaying negative values This option can only be configu...

Page 422: ...ry mode Write value to device Entry mode Display value of device Display mode Display focus Entry mode Display value of device Display mode 1234 Operations and display 1234 999 Value of Destination Device Action 1234 999 999 1234 1234 1234 999 Press Numerical Input A Enter a value Press ENT Enter a value Press ENT Move focus from Numerical Input A to B Write value of device Entry mode Display valu...

Page 423: ...only When a value outside the input range is entered and ENT is pressed is shown in the display The value is not written to the device Press Numerical Input Enter a value Press ENT Display value of device Entry mode Write value to device Entry mode Display value of device Display mode Display focus Entry mode Display value of device Display mode 1234 Operations and display 1234 999 999 1234 999 Va...

Page 424: ...utton to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Flange Plate color Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard graphic color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click the Color button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Pattern Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic...

Page 425: ...he X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to Base Screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to Base Screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 20 to Base Screen horizontal size H 20 to Base Screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 426: ...lignment on page A 5 Text Color Selects the color of displayed text color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click the Color button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette This option can configure the text color in display mode and in entry mode However for Entry Mode text color can be set only when the Reverse check box is cleared Reverse Select this check box to reverse t...

Page 427: ...th Unit 1 Select this check box to display units or other characters at the end of a number Displayed characters must be registered in Text Manager The displayed text color will be as set for Text Color under the Format tab 1 Advanced mode only Text ID Specifies the Text Manager ID No 1 to 32000 Click to display Text Manager Text Displays the characters of the specified Text ID The maximum number ...

Page 428: ...evice is selected these options specify the source word devices Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Select BIN16 BIN16 BIN32 BIN32 BCD4 or BCD8 for Data Type under the General tab and to display a fractional number specify the values of Minimum and Maximum as an integer Ex...

Page 429: ... value is not written and is displayed 1 is written to When Data Over report device LM0 Report Select this check box and specify the report device to write 1 in this device when the entered data or the value of device to display exceeds the allowable range Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Se...

Page 430: ...s not satisfied and the Numerical Input is not operational While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the Numerical Input is operational Trigger Type Selects the condition to enable the Numerical Input from the following Always Enabled The Numerical Input is always enabled While ON Enables the Numerical Input when the value of device is 1 LM0 Touch Condition Not satisfied 0 LM0 Condition Satisf...

Page 431: ...gger Type Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog b...

Page 432: ... Security Group Settings dialog box you can select that created group For details refer to Chapter 21 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 21 15 Input Selects the security group for which operation of parts is restricted Default None None No security function is used Administrator Operator Reader Three security groups are set up by default Click to display the Security Group Settings dia...

Page 433: ...ted User Name Security Group None Group A Group A Group B User1 User2 User3 Touch 130 999 Line Chart and Bar Chart Display Group A Numerical Input Display Group A Input Group B Numerical Display Display None Touch 130 Touch 130 999 Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 Group A parts are not displayed to User1 Group A parts are displayed to User2 User1 User2 Touch 130 Password ENT...

Page 434: ...e 20 53 External device Touch D0 700 42000 60 Write value of entered value divided by 60 42000 Numerical Input Destination Device D0 Input with Arithmetic Operation 60 Item Description The device on which the arithmetic operation is performed is specified in the arithmetic formula Only 1 device can be set for an arithmetic operation The device is as specified for Destination Device under the Gener...

Page 435: ...d 1 to the value entered using the Keypad and write the result to the device To perform the arithmetic operation and display the result add 1 to the value of device and display the result LDR 0 100 To perform the arithmetic operation and input the result add the value of LDR0 to the value entered using the Keypad and add 100 and write the result to the device To perform the arithmetic operation an...

Page 436: ... close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Enter a comment about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Numerical Input on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over the ...

Page 437: ...99 999 D100 1234 D100 1234 D100 999 999 D100 999 Press Numerical Input Write value to device Press ENT Display value of device Entry mode Display value of device Entry mode Close standard keypad Display standard keypad Enter 999 Display value of device Display mode Display value of device Display mode When the following operations are performed entry mode is canceled and the current value of devic...

Page 438: ...el bit address 3 bit 1 To clear the System Area 2 Numerical Input setting complete bit or the Numerical Input setting cancel bit write 1 to System Area 1 Numerical Input setting clear bit address 1 bit 10 To automatically clear these bits when the Numerical Input keypad is pressed in entry mode select the Clear Keypad bit in System Area automatically check box on the System tab in the Project Sett...

Page 439: ...ssing the keypad or key buttons touch the Character Input to switch it to entry mode The Character Input can perform the following functions Write the character codes for text entered with the keypad or key buttons to devices Display the character codes in current values of devices as text Display entered text as asterisk 2 Character Input D100 D101 4654 Hex F T 2053 Hex 4552 Hex 4945 Hex 5300 Hex...

Page 440: ...he Parts group click Data Displays and then click Character Input 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Character Input 3 Double click the dropped Character Input and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode To switch to Advanced mode click Advanced ...

Page 441: ...onfigured as a Popup Screen Current Screen Uses the keypad configured on the same screen as the Character Input Screen No Specifies the screen number of the Popup Screen configured as the keypad 1 to 3015 This option can only be configured if Popup is selected for Type Adjust location automatically Select this check box to display the Popup Screen configured as the keypad in a location where it wi...

Page 442: ...device to change the destination word device by the value of this device Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 For details on indirect writing refer to Chapter 2 Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings on page 2 5 Enter text Press CLR Press ENT 4944 Hex 4543 Hex I D 4654 H...

Page 443: ...NT Display values of devices as text Display mode Display focus Entry mode Display focus Entry mode Display values of devices as text Display mode Display values of devices as text Display mode Move focus from Character Input A to B Write character codes to devices Entry mode Display text being entered Entry mode Write character codes to devices Entry mode 4352 Hex 4120 Hex 4D49 Hex 534D Hex 4152 ...

Page 444: ...utton to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Flange Plate color Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard graphic color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click the Color button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Pattern Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic...

Page 445: ...The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to Base Screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to Base Screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 20 to Base Screen horizontal size H 20 to Base Screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 446: ...t alignment in the horizontal direction from the following Left Center Right For details refer to Appendix 5 Text Alignment on page A 5 Text Color Selects the color of displayed text color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click the Color button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette This option can configure the text color in display mode and in entry mode However for Ent...

Page 447: ...o be changed when Standard or Popup is selected for Type under Keypad on the General tab 1 Advanced mode only Trigger Device Specifies the word device 2 words to use as the condition to change the font Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Example With Trigger Device set to ...

Page 448: ...t satisfied and the Character Input is not operational While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the Character Input is operational Trigger Type Selects the condition to enable the Character Input from the following Always Enabled The Character Input is always enabled While ON Enables the Character Input when the value of device is 1 LM0 Touch 0 LM0 1 Operational Condition Satisfied Condition ...

Page 449: ...ype Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Condition Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box For...

Page 450: ... Security Group Settings dialog box you can select that created group For details refer to Chapter 21 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 21 15 Input Selects the security group for which operation of parts is restricted Default None None No security function is used Administrator Operator Reader Three security groups are set up by default Click to display the Security Group Settings dia...

Page 451: ...this part User Name Security Group None Group A Group A Group B User1 User2 User3 Touch 130 FT SERIES Line Chart and Bar Chart Display Group A Character Input Display Group A Input Group B Numerical Display Display None Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 Group A parts are not displayed to User1 Group A parts are displayed to User2 Touch Touch Touch 130 FT SERIES User1 User2 13...

Page 452: ... close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Enter a comment about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Character Input on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over the ...

Page 453: ...00 D101 4654 Hex F T 2053 Hex 4552 Hex 4945 Hex 5300 Hex E R D102 D103 D104 S NULL I E S I E S NULL S Press Character Input Write text character codes to devices Press ENT Display values of device as text Entry mode Display values of device as text Entry mode Close standard keypad Display standard keypad Enter text as FT SERIES Display values of device as text Display mode Display values of device...

Page 454: ... Data setting Storage Method of String Data is configured on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box For details refer to Chapter 3 3 1 System Tab on page 3 19 Example When the destination device is LDR100 and the entered text is ABCDE When from Upper byte is selected for Storage Method of String Data When from Lower byte is selected for Storage Method of String Data External device Touc...

Page 455: ...opup Screen s title bar or another Character Input is pressed and selected before finished entering the text by pressing ENT entry mode is canceled and 1 is not written to the System Area 2 Character Input setting cancel bit address 3 bit 5 To clear the System Area 2 Character Input setting complete bit or the Character Input setting cancel bit write 1 to System Area 1 Character Input setting clea...

Page 456: ... Display displays pictures It can change move or scale the displayed picture according to values of devices Switch and display pictures by values of devices 3 Picture Display External device Touch D0 bit15 bit0 bit3 D0 0100 bit0 bit3 D0 0001 bit0 bit3 D0 0010 bit0 bit3 D0 0100 bit0 bit3 Pic0 Pic1 Pic2 ...

Page 457: ...e pictures are displayed with the same size as Pic0 External device Touch Display picture at X 0 Y 0 Move picture to X 108 Y 45 Move picture to X 216 Y 90 X coordinate D100 0 Y coordinate D101 X coordinate D100 Y coordinate D101 X coordinate D100 Y coordinate D101 0 108 45 216 90 External device Touch Shrink picture to W 24 H 10 Scale picture to W 120 H 50 Scale picture to W 216 H 90 Width D100 24...

Page 458: ...he Parts group click Data Displays and then click Picture Display 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Picture Display 3 Double click the dropped Picture Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode To switch to Advanced mode click Advanced ...

Page 459: ...s of bits in a device Example When Bit is selected and the bits of trigger device D0 are allocated to the following pictures Switches the picture to display according to the status of the bits bit15 bit0 bit3 Trigger device D0 Picture Pic0 Pic1 Pic2 0001 Picture to display Trigger device D0 bit state 0010 0100 1000 Display picture for bit 0 Display picture for bit 1 Display picture for bit 2 No pi...

Page 460: ... option can only be configured when Bit or Value is selected 0 1 2 Trigger device D0 value Picture Pic2 Pic1 Pic0 Pic 1 Pic 0 Pic 2 0 Picture to display Trigger device D0 value 1 2 3 Display picture for 0 Action Display picture for 1 Display picture for 2 No picture If the value of device has no picture associated with it display nothing When the size of pictures to switch differs and the Dynamic ...

Page 461: ...k to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Height Specifies the word device that is the height of the picture Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 When the si...

Page 462: ... to all the Pic numbers Remove Deletes the registered picture from the list Select a Pic number on the list and then click this button to delete the selected picture from the list Up Shifts the selected settings upward in the list Down Shifts the selected settings downward in the list Recover Background 1 Select this check box to recover the background of the area where the picture had been displa...

Page 463: ...on check box or the Dynamic Size check box is selected on the General tab the Recover Background check box cannot be selected When the Recover Background check box and the Blink check box on the General tab are selected the picture is repeatedly displayed and hidden X Y Sets the display position of parts using coordinates The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top...

Page 464: ...hile LM0 is 0 the condition is not satisfied and the Picture Display does not display the picture While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the Picture Display displays the picture Trigger Type Selects the condition to enable the Picture Display from the following LM0 Touch 0 LM0 1 Condition Not satisfied Condition Satisfied Show picture Hide picture Always Enabled The Picture Display is alway...

Page 465: ...apter 2 5 2 Setting Conditional Expressions on page 2 64 Comment Enter a comment about trigger conditions The maximum number is 80 characters While ON Enables the Picture Display when the value of device is 1 Example When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Picture data While OFF Enables the Picture Display when the value of device is 0 Example When While not satisfying the condition ...

Page 466: ...tricted Default None None No security function is used Administrator Operator Reader Three security groups are set up by default Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box If you create a security group on the Security Group Settings dialog box you can select that created group For details refer to Chapter 21 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 21 15 For details about secur...

Page 467: ... made to User 2 of Group A Group A parts are displayed User Name Security Group None Group A User1 User2 Touch 130 Line Chart and Bar Chart Display Group A Button Display Group A Numerical Display Display None Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 Group A parts are not displayed to User1 Group A parts are displayed to User2 Touch 130 Touch Touch 130 User1 User2 130 Password ENT U...

Page 468: ... close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Enter a comment about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Picture Display on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over the ...

Page 469: ...3 Hex D102 4B00 Hex D100 D101 3132 Hex 1 2 3334 Hex D102 4B00 Hex D100 D101 3536 Hex 5 6 3738 Hex D102 4B00 Hex 4 3 K 7 NULL 1 3 2 8 NULL K NULL K NULL Always show Show according to value of devices Goal Message details Display D100 D101 D102 Display only always shown text Do not show if upper byte of the Reference Device starting address is 00 NULL Value of Reference Devices Action Display always...

Page 470: ... device Touch Line A A 1234K pcs pcs Line B 8K pcs Message details Line A 1234K pcs Line B 5678K pcs External device Touch FT SERIES FT SERIES D0 D0 D0 D0 Lower byte Upper byte 0x00 Lower byte Upper byte 0xF7 Lower byte Upper byte 0x90 0xF7 0x00 0xF7 Lower byte Upper byte 0x90 0xF7 Text color Plate color Text color Plate color ...

Page 471: ...tab in the Parts group click Data Displays and then click Message Display 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Message Display 3 Double click the dropped Message Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode To switch to Advanced mode click Advance...

Page 472: ...haracter codes with text registered in Text Manager and display it as text enter 1 to 8 in Text for the Text ID at the position to display the value of device as text The channels configured under Data are allocated in order from the first The text is displayed according to the values of devices in order from the first reference device However in the following situations is not handled as text to ...

Page 473: ...numbers Ch1 to Ch8 Device Shows the reference device configured for the channel Words Shows the number of words used by the reference device Reference Device Specifies the word device that stores the values read as character codes Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Set th...

Page 474: ...utton to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Flange Plate color Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard graphic color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click the Color button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Pattern Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic...

Page 475: ... The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to Base Screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to Base Screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 5 to Base Screen horizontal size H 5 to Base Screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 476: ... 6 Style Selects Regular or Bold for text style Magnification Align Text Vertical Selects the text alignment in the vertical direction from the following Top Center Bottom Center Top Set to Center when the Vertical Writing check box is selected For details refer to Appendix 5 Text Alignment on page A 5 Align Text Horizontal Selects the text alignment in the horizontal direction from the following ...

Page 477: ...s selected take care about the following points This is applicable for Windows supports East Asian characters When there is a mixture of double byte and single byte characters the half width characters are left aligned Dashes are displayed horizontally Symbols representing voiced and semi voiced sounds of single byte characters are shown as follows When using text displayed according to values of ...

Page 478: ...e text is drawn When the text displayed according to values of devices the text color or the displayed text changes the message is scrolled from the beginning When the Scroll check box is selected take care about the following points This setting is only enabled when the Enable check box in the Blink group box on the Option tab is cleared The number of parts that can be arranged on a single screen...

Page 479: ...age is not displayed Example When Trigger Type is While ON Device is LM0 While LM0 is 0 the condition is not satisfied and the Message Display does not display the message While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the Message Display displays the message Trigger Type Selects the condition to enable the Message Display from the following LM0 Touch 0 LM0 1 FT SERIES Condition Not satisfied Condi...

Page 480: ... 2 64 Comment Enter a comment about trigger conditions The maximum number is 80 characters While ON Enables the Message Display when the value of device is 1 Example When While not satisfying the condition is Not display message While OFF Enables the Message Display when the value of device is 0 Example When While not satisfying the condition is Not display message While satisfying the condition E...

Page 481: ...to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Color data assignments that are stored to devices are given below This uses address 1 to specify the text color and plate color when the Enable check box has been selected For color data refer to Appendix 1 Color Number Correspondence Table on page A 1 D0 Lower byte Upper byte 0x00 Lower byte Upper byte 0xF7 D0 Lower byte Upper byte 0x90 0xF7 D...

Page 482: ...hades of text when flashing Click this button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette This can be set only when the Enable check box is cleared Plate Color This selects the plate color color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades when flashing Click this button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette This can be set only when the Enable check box is cl...

Page 483: ...roups are set up by default Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box If you create a security group on the Security Group Settings dialog box you can select that created group For details refer to Chapter 21 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 21 15 For details about security functions refer to Chapter 21 User Accounts and the Security Function on page 21 1 User Name Secu...

Page 484: ... close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Enter a comment about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Message Display on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over the ...

Page 485: ...ected for Storage Method of String Data NULL terminating character Device Stored value Displayed string Upper byte Lower byte D100 31 Hex 32 Hex 12 D101 33 Hex 34 Hex 34 D102 35 Hex 0 5 When handling values of devices as character codes 0 is handled as the NULL terminating character to end the string Therefore when the upper byte is 0 nothing is displayed NULL terminating character Device Stored v...

Page 486: ... The Message Switching Display is used to switch the displayed message according to the value of a word device 5 Message Switching Display External device Touch D0 0001 bit0 bit3 D0 0010 bit0 bit3 D0 0100 bit0 bit3 D0 bit15 bit0 bit3 Msg0 Drying Heating Cooling Msg1 Msg2 Message details Drying Heating Cooling ...

Page 487: ...On the Home tab in the Parts group click Data Displays and then click Message Switching Display 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Message Switching Display 3 Double click the dropped Message Switching Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode To switch to Advanced m...

Page 488: ...according to the status of bits in a device Example When Bit is selected and the bits of trigger device D0 are allocated to the following messages Switches the message to display according to the status of the bits bit15 bit0 bit3 Trigger Device D0 Msg0 Drying Heating Cooling Msg1 Msg2 Message 0001 Message to display 0010 0100 1000 Display Msg0 Action Display Msg1 Display Msg2 1110 Display Msg1 No...

Page 489: ...Switches the message to display according to the value of device Example When Value is selected and the value of Trigger Device D0 are allocated to the following messages Switches the message to display according to the value of device 0 1 2 Trigger Device D0 value Msg0 Drying Heating Cooling Msg1 Msg2 Message details 0 Message to display 1 2 3 Display Msg0 Action Display Msg1 Display Msg2 No mess...

Page 490: ...the font selected for Font on the Format tab For details refer to Chapter 2 1 3 Available Text on page 2 6 This option can only be configured if the Use Text Manager check box is cleared No Shows the message number Msg number The number of messages that can be registered varies based on Switching Method on the General tab Bit Msg0 to Msg15 Value Msg0 to Msg999 Message Shows the registered message ...

Page 491: ...ed on the list Select a Msg number on the list and then click this button to insert the Message and Change Color settings The settings at the insertion point shift down one line Settings cannot be inserted if all Msg numbers are configured Remove Deletes the registered settings from the list Select a Msg number and then click this button to delete the selected settings from the list Text Color Sel...

Page 492: ...lor button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Flange Plate color Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard graphic color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click the Color button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Pattern Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard gr...

Page 493: ...nates The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to Base Screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to Base Screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 5 to Base Screen horizontal size H 5 to Base Screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 494: ...age 2 6 Style Selects Regular or Bold for text style Magnification Align Text Horizontal Selects the text alignment in the horizontal direction from the following Left Center Right For details refer to Appendix 5 Text Alignment on page A 5 Align Text Vertical Selects the text alignment in the vertical direction from the following Top Center Bottom Center Top Set to Center when the Vertical Writing...

Page 495: ...acters are left aligned Dashes are displayed horizontally Symbols representing voiced and semi voiced sounds of single byte characters are shown as follows Aligned to left edge Horizontal display Next characters Speed 1 Fastest Sets the scrolling speed 1 to 10 1 is fastest 10 is slowest When the Scroll check box is selected operation is follows Messages that include CRs are displayed without the C...

Page 496: ...s restricted Default None None No security function is used Administrator Operator Reader Three security groups are set up by default Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box If you create a security group on the Security Group Settings dialog box you can select that created group For details refer to Chapter 21 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 21 15 For details about ...

Page 497: ...ch is made to User 2 of Group A Group A parts are displayed User Name Security Group None Group A User1 User2 Touch 130 Line Chart and Bar Chart Display Group A Button Display Group A Numerical Display Display None Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 Group A parts are not displayed to User1 Group A parts are displayed to User2 Touch 130 Touch Touch 130 User1 User2 130 Password ...

Page 498: ... close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Enter a comment about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Message Switching Display on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing...

Page 499: ...gured on the Channel tab in the Alarm Log Settings dialog box For the key buttons used with the Alarm List Display refer to Chapter 7 Alarm List Display on page 7 65 The number of the message channel when using the Alarm function that has focus on the Alarm List Display is stored in HMI Special Data Register LSD50 The information about where on the list the message that has focus is displayed out ...

Page 500: ...ome tab in the Parts group click Data Displays and then click Alarm List Display 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Alarm List Display 3 Double click the dropped Alarm List Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode To switch to Advanced mode click Advanced ...

Page 501: ...configured by the Alarm Log settings Alarm Log Settings Displays the Alarm Log Settings dialog box New Message List Displays the messages registered in Text Manager according to the state of bits in the trigger device configured on the List tab D0 0 D0 1 D0 2 D0 3 ID1 Current fault ID2 ID3 ID4 Pump fault High pressure Low air pressure Message Source Message to display Source bit state D0 0 Display...

Page 502: ...Pg Dwn If all bits in the device are 0 or if a bit with no associated message becomes 1 display nothing List Simultaneously displays multiple messages Sort Selects the display order when displaying multiple messages Old and New can only be configured when the Use Alarm Log Settings check box is selected Ascending Sorts the list in alphabetic order from A to Z Descending Sorts the list in alphabeti...

Page 503: ...sequential addresses Random Configures trigger devices for each block number Block No Shows the block numbers in the amount specified by Number of Blocks Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box For details refer to Individual Settings Dialog Box on page 9 88 Trigger Device Shows the word device to use as the condition to display messages Double clicking the cell displa...

Page 504: ... Settings dialog box For details refer to Individual Settings Dialog Box on page 9 88 The settings at the insertion point shift down one line Settings cannot be inserted if all block numbers are configured Delete Deletes the registered settings from the list Select a block number on the list and then click this button to delete the selected settings from the list Settings D0 0 D0 1 D0 2 D0 14 D0 1...

Page 505: ...n lines are displayed select the check box and select line color color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click the Color button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Flange Plate color Lines Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click the Color button to display the Color Palette S...

Page 506: ...he Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette Buttons Can be set only when there are grouped Key Buttons X Y Sets the display position of parts using coordinates The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to Base Screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to Base Screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Par...

Page 507: ...set the text color for all messages to the same color select this check box and select the text color to display color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click this button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette When this check box is cleared the color for messages is the text color configured in Text Manager W H Selects text magnification 0 5 1 to 8 ...

Page 508: ...sage is 2 lines 2nd line is not shown Since the alarm line spacing is adjusted with the number of lines for the message fixed this option is convenient to use when displaying multi line messages Set with Dots Specifies the line spacing for the message to display for one alarm line in dots Height dots Enter the height 8 to 160 To completely display a message a height equal to or greater than Magnif...

Page 509: ...ages that include CRs are displayed without the CRs Messages scroll in the direction in which the text is drawn When the text displayed according to values of devices the text color the displayed text or the alarm state changes the message is scrolled from the beginning When the Scroll check box is selected take care about the following points The number of parts that can be arranged on a single s...

Page 510: ... Log Settings dialog box Coordinates Reference screen list Motor fault Pump1 fault REV Up Dwn Del Ref High pressure Pump 1 fault Motor fault Pump1 fault REV Up Dwn Del Ref High pressure Pump 1 fault Motor fault Pump1 fault REV Up Dwn Del Ref High pressure Pump 1 fault Key button Ref Reference screen Key buttons Up and Dwn 1 Select a message displayed on the Alarm List Display 2 Press the key butto...

Page 511: ...der from message number 1 5 Random Specifies a reference screen number 1 to 3000 for each message number Message No Displays the message number Screen No Displays the reference screen number The screen number can be set according to the Screen No Setting Method The screen number is specified in the screen number input dialog box that appears after double clicking on a cell Enter a screen number 1 ...

Page 512: ...he security group for which operation of parts is restricted Default None None No security function is used Administrator Operator Reader Three security groups are set up by default Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box If you create a security group on the Security Group Settings dialog box you can select that created group For details refer to Chapter 21 2 2 Adding and Editing ...

Page 513: ...to User 3 who is part of both Group A and Group B Group A buttons can be displayed and Group B buttons can be operated Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User3 For User2 Group A parts are displayed but Group B parts cannot be operated For User3 Group A parts are displayed and Group B parts can be operated Touch 130 Touch Touch 130 130 User2 User3 Button Can operate ENT BS CLR OK Pas...

Page 514: ... close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Enter a comment about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Alarm List Display on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over t...

Page 515: ...wn Del Ref 10 28 High pressure 13 02 Pump 1 fault Time 09 15 Motor fault Message 10 02 Pump1 fault REV Up Dwn Del Ref 10 28 High pressure 13 02 Pump 1 fault Time 09 15 Motor fault Message 10 02 Pump1 fault REV Up Dwn Del Ref 10 28 High pressure 13 02 Pump 1 fault Time 09 15 Motor fault Message 10 02 Pump1 fault REV Up Dwn Del Ref 10 28 High pressure 13 02 Pump 1 fault Pump 1 fault Pump 1 fault Pum...

Page 516: ...ome tab in the Parts group click Data Displays and then click Alarm Log Display 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Alarm Log Display 3 Double click the dropped Alarm Log Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode To switch to Advanced mode click Advanced ...

Page 517: ...or New Display Focus on List after changing Screens or occurring Alarms 1 Select this check box to automatically display the focus at the first item in the list after switching screens and when an alarm occurs Display Reference Screen 1 Select this check box to automatically display the reference screen for the alarm that has focus under the following conditions When the focus is displayed When th...

Page 518: ...th no focus displayed the focus is displayed on that alarm When an alarm is pressed that does not have focus when the focus is displayed the focus is moved to that alarm The focus is no longer displayed when an alarm with focus is pressed Alarm Log Settings Displays the Alarm Log Settings dialog box 1 Advanced mode only Display First Alarm to 1st line on List Always displays the first alarm on the...

Page 519: ...de Input dialog box Enter the characters in the Unicode Input dialog box and then click OK Width Specifies the number of characters to display 1 to 40 1 is the width of a single byte character 2 is the width of a double byte character Date Selects the display type of the date from the following YY MM DD MM DD YY DD MM YY MM DD DD MM non display Time Selects the display type of the time from the fo...

Page 520: ... settings The Text ID message configured for Occurrence Time Message Recovery Time and Confirmation Time is displayed in Show Items detailed settings Text ID Specifies the Text Manager ID number 1 to 32000 when using text registered in Text Manager Click to display Text Manager This option can only be configured when the Use Text Manager check box is selected ...

Page 521: ...or When lines are displayed select the check box and select line color color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click this button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Flange Plate color Lines Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click this button to display the Color Palette Selec...

Page 522: ...this button to display the Pattern Palette Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette Buttons Can be set only when there are grouped Key Buttons X Y Sets the display position of parts using coordinates The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to Base Screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to Base Screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H...

Page 523: ...ades of the occurred alarm recovered alarm confirmed alarm and first alarm Click this button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette 1 Advanced mode only W H Selects text magnification 0 5 1 to 8 Blink 1 Select this check box to flash alarms that are displayed on the list The flash interval is specified in Blinking Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog b...

Page 524: ...ient to use when displaying multi line messages Set with Dots Specifies the line spacing for the message to display for one alarm line in dots Height dots Enter the height 8 to 160 To completely display a message a height equal to or greater than Magnification H x 16 dots x the number of message lines is required When Magnification H is 1 To display a one line message 1 x 16 16 dots a height of 16...

Page 525: ...gin the X and Y coordinates are the upper left corner of the reference screen This option can only be configured when Base Screen or Popup Screen is selected for Reference Screen Specify the coordinates in 1 dot units X 0 to Base Screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to Base Screen vertical size 1 Time 09 15 Motor fault Message 10 02 Pump1 fault REV Up Dwn Del Ref 10 28 High pressure 13 02 Pump 1 fault Pum...

Page 526: ... 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 13 1 14 1 15 D100 0 D100 1 D100 2 D100 13 D100 14 D100 15 2 0 2 1 2 2 2 13 2 14 2 15 D101 0 D101 1 D101 2 D101 13 D101 14 D101 15 Block 1 Block 2 5 0 5 1 5 2 5 13 5 14 5 15 D104 0 D104 1 D104 2 D104 13 D104 14 D104 15 Block 5 6 0 6 1 6 2 6 13 6 14 6 15 D105 0 D105 1 D105 2 D105 13 D105 14 D105 15 Block 6 Number of Blocks Specified numbers 1 3 6 Block 1 Block 2 Block 3 Block 4 Block ...

Page 527: ...Selects the security group for which operation of parts is restricted Default None None No security function is used Administrator Operator Reader Three security groups are set up by default Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box If you create a security group on the Security Group Settings dialog box you can select that created group For details refer to Chapter 21 2 2 Adding and...

Page 528: ...3 who is part of both Group A and Group B Group A buttons can be displayed and Group B buttons can be operated Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User3 For User2 Group A parts are displayed but Group B parts cannot be operated For User3 Group A parts are displayed and Group B parts can be operated Touch 130 Touch Touch 130 130 User2 User3 Button Can operate ENT BS CLR OK Password Us...

Page 529: ...s placed close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Enter a comment about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Alarm Log Display on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing...

Page 530: ...l Data Type BIN16 Digits 5 Hex AD2 External device Touch D100 1234 Display Device D100 Display Type Hexadecimal Data Type BIN16 Digits 4 Display Device D100 Display Type Decimal Data Type BCD4 Digits 4 Decimal 123 4 External device Touch D100 1234 Display Device D100 Display Type Decimal Data Type BIN16 Digits 4 Display Floating Point On Floating Digits 1 Decimal 1234 pcs External device Touch D10...

Page 531: ...the Parts group click Data Displays and then click Numerical Display 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Numerical Display 3 Double click the dropped Numerical Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Data Over tab Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode To switch to Advanced mode ...

Page 532: ... 2 1 2 Available Data on page 2 2 Digits Specifies the digits to display The range of digits that can be set varies based on the display type and data type The digits that can be set are as follows Display Type Data Type Digits Decimal display BIN16 BIN16 1 to 5 BIN32 BIN32 1 to 10 BCD4 1 to 4 BCD8 1 to 8 float32 1 to 10 Hexadecimal display BIN16 1 to 4 BIN32 1 to 8 Display Floating Point Select t...

Page 533: ...ng Point check box is selected Example When Digits is 4 and Floating Digits is 2 When Floating Symbol is dot 12 34 When Floating Symbol is slash 12 34 Suppress Zeros Select this check box to hide 0 for the upper digits of the integer part Example Suppress Zeros selected 1234 Suppress Zeros cleared 00001234 Not Display Sign Select this check box to hide the negative symbol when displaying negative ...

Page 534: ... 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click the Color button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Flange Plate color Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard graphic color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click the Color button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Pattern Selects...

Page 535: ...s The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to Base Screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to Base Screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 5 to Base Screen horizontal size H 5 to Base Screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 536: ...eck box to display units or other characters at the end of a number Displayed characters must be registered in Text Manager The displayed text color will be as set for Text Color under the Format tab 1 Advanced mode only W H Selects text magnification 0 5 1 to 8 Text ID Specifies the Text Manager ID No 1 to 32000 Click to display Text Manager Text Displays the characters of the specified Text ID T...

Page 537: ...ith Data Format on the General tab For details on data types refer to Chapter 2 1 2 Available Data on page 2 2 When Device is selected these options specify the source word devices Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Select BIN16 BIN16 BIN32 BIN32 BCD4 or BCD8 for Data Typ...

Page 538: ...ten to LM0 and the displayed numerical value will blink Blink Select this check box to make the value blink when the displayed data exceeds the allowable range Report Select this check box and specify the device to write 1 in the report device when the displayed data exceeds the allowable range Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure r...

Page 539: ...play Numerical data While LM0 is 0 the condition is not satisfied and the Numerical Display does not display the number While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the Numerical Display displays the number Trigger Type Selects the condition to enable the Numerical Display from the following LM0 Touch 0 LM0 1 1234 Condition Not satisfied Condition Satisfied Show number Hide number Data over does ...

Page 540: ... a comment about trigger conditions The maximum number is 80 characters While ON Enables the Numerical Display when the value of device is 1 Example When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Numerical data While OFF Enables the Numerical Display when the value of device is 0 Example When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Numerical data While satisfying the condition Enab...

Page 541: ...rity function is used Administrator Operator Reader Three security groups are set up by default Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box If you create a security group on the Security Group Settings dialog box you can select that created group For details refer to Chapter 21 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 21 15 For details about security functions refer to Chapter 21...

Page 542: ...up A parts are not displayed to User1 Group A parts are displayed to User2 Touch 130 Touch Touch 130 User1 User2 130 Password ENT User2 BS CLR OK A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 A 5 6 7 8 9 Item Description The device on which the arithmetic operation is performed is specified in the arithmetic formula Only 1 device can be set for an arithmetic operation The device is a...

Page 543: ...it of and Left shift Shifts each bit of to left by bit s Right shift Shifts each bit of to right by bit s Input Examples Description 1 To perform the arithmetic operation and input the result add 1 to the value entered using the Keypad and write the result to the device To perform the arithmetic operation and display the result add 1 to the value of device and display the result LDR0 100 To perfor...

Page 544: ... close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Enter a comment about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Numerical Display on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over th...

Page 545: ...or 1 to a device at the configured times 9 Calendar Touch 12 07 13 45 Touch External device ON Time 10 00 OFF Time 11 00 09 00 10 00 11 00 0 1 10 00 0 1 11 00 0 09 00 Report device M0 Action Time 09 00 09 30 10 00 10 30 11 00 Write Value of Report Device M0 1 0 0 1 0 Write ON Time OFF Time When Alarm is selected for Calendar Type you can use just the alarm function without displaying the clock on ...

Page 546: ...he Parts group click Data Displays and then click Calendar 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Calendar 3 Double click the dropped Calendar and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode To switch to Advanced mode click Advanced ...

Page 547: ... by writing 1 ON Time or 0 OFF Time to a device at the configured times Clock Type Selects the items to display for the clock from the following Time Day of the Week Time Date Time Date Day of the Week Time Date Selects the display type of the date from the following YY MM DD MM DD YY DD MM YY MM DD DD MM This option can only be configured when Date Time or Date Day of the Week Time is selected fo...

Page 548: ...ed when the Year check box is cleared Alarm conditions Value Specifies the alarm time as values and the day of the week Year Enter the year 0 to 99 Month Enter the month 1 to 12 Day Enter the day 1 to 31 Day of the Week Select the day of the week Hour Enter the hour 0 to 23 Minute Enter the minute 0 to 59 Second Enter the second 0 to 59 Device Configures the alarm time as values of word device Cli...

Page 549: ...splayed if the time is in between ON Time and OFF Time 1 is written to the report device Value of device retained after ON Time elapses 1 0 09 00 09 30 10 00 10 30 11 00 Value of Report Device M0 Time ON Time Turn on Touch power Open screen 1 0 09 00 09 30 10 00 10 30 11 00 Value of Report Device M0 Time ON Time Writes 1 to notify that ON Time has already elapsed OFF Time The value of Report Devic...

Page 550: ...on to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Flange Plate color Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard graphic color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click the Color button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Pattern Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic Cl...

Page 551: ...e X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to Base Screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to Base Screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 5 to Base Screen horizontal size H 5 to Base Screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 552: ...ext Selects the text alignment in the horizontal direction from the following Left Center Right For details refer to Appendix 5 Text Alignment on page A 5 Text Color Selects the color of displayed text color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click the Color button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette W H Selects text magnification 0 5 1 to 8 ...

Page 553: ...t the time is not displayed Example When Trigger Type is While ON Device is LM0 While LM0 is 0 the condition is not satisfied and the Calendar does not display the time While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the Calendar displays the time Trigger Type Selects the condition to enable the Calendar from the following LM0 Touch 0 LM0 1 12 07 13 45 Condition Not satisfied Condition Satisfied Sho...

Page 554: ... page 2 64 Comment Enter a comment about trigger conditions The maximum number is 80 characters While ON Enables the Calendar when the value of device is 1 Example When the Not show Calendar check box is cleared under While not satisfying the condition While OFF Enables the Calendar when the value of device is 0 Example When the Not show Calendar check box is cleared under While not satisfying the...

Page 555: ...s restricted Default None None No security function is used Administrator Operator Reader Three security groups are set up by default Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box If you create a security group on the Security Group Settings dialog box you can select that created group For details refer to Chapter 21 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 21 15 For details about ...

Page 556: ...er 2 of Group A Group A parts are displayed User Name Security Group None Group A User1 User2 Touch 130 Line Chart and Bar Chart Display Group A Button Display Group A Numerical Display Display None Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 Group A parts are not displayed to User1 Group A parts are displayed to User2 Touch 130 Touch Touch 130 User1 User2 130 Password ENT User2 BS CLR...

Page 557: ...s placed close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Enter a comment about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Calendar on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over the...

Page 558: ...9 Calendar 9 142 SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual ...

Page 559: ...evices Display values of word devices in a bar chart Display values of word devices in a peak chart Make the chart blink when the displayed data exceeds the maximum or minimum Chapter 10 Charts 1 Bar Chart External device Touch D100 50 D200 120 D300 40 External device Touch D100 50 D200 120 D300 40 External device Touch Range Value Minimum 0 Maximum 100 When Data Over Blink Selected D100 20 D200 8...

Page 560: ...group click Charts and then click Bar Chart 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Bar Chart 3 Double click the dropped Bar Chart and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Data Over tab Scale tab Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode To switch to Advanced mode click Advanced ...

Page 561: ... and buttons in the Properties dialog box General Tab Part Name Enter a name for the part The maximum number is 20 characters Chart Type Selects the type of chart from the following items Horizontal Bar Vertical Bar Horizontal Peak Vertical Peak Peak charts only display the tip of the bar chart Horizontal Bar Horizontal Peak ...

Page 562: ... is selected vary based on the data type For details refer to Chapter 2 1 2 Available Data on page 2 2 When Device is selected these options specify the source word devices Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 If the data displayed in the chart is invalid 1 is written to Sy...

Page 563: ...rder from top For Vertical Bar and Vertical Peak the numbers are listed in order from the left Device Shows the source word device for the data to display in the chart Fg Normal Shows the foreground color of the chart when normal Fg Over 1 Shows the foreground color of the chart when data over Bg Normal Shows the background color of the chart when normal Bg Over 1 Shows the background color of the...

Page 564: ... settings Insert Inserts the chart settings in the position selected on the list Select a Ch number on the list and then click this button to insert the Reference Device Foreground Color Background Color and Pattern settings The settings at the insertion point shift down one line Settings cannot be inserted if all Ch numbers are configured Remove Deletes the registered settings from the list Selec...

Page 565: ... Click the Color button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Flange Plate color Foreground Color Background Color Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click the Color button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Pattern Selects a pattern for the flange Click the Pattern button to o...

Page 566: ... spacing Chart spacing 100 200 0 Scale not shown Show scale 10 dots 10 dots 10 dots X Y Sets the display position of parts using coordinates The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to Base Screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to Base Screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 5 to B...

Page 567: ...Minimum Maximum Select these check boxes to specify the minimum and or maximum The minimum and maximum that can be specified when Value is selected vary based on the data type selected with Data Format on the General tab For details on data types refer to Chapter 2 1 2 Available Data on page 2 2 When Device is selected these options specify the source word devices Click to display the Device Addre...

Page 568: ...will blink Blink Select this check box to make the chart blink when the displayed data exceeds the allowable range Report Select this check box to write 1 in the report device when the displayed data exceeds the allowable range Report Device Specifies the report device Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Devi...

Page 569: ...he number of major scale divisions 1 to 20 Minor Divisions Enter the number of minor scale divisions 1 to 20 Show Tick Numbers Select this check box to display numbers along the scale The values are displayed in the same color as the scale This can only be set if Value is selected for Data Format under the General tab Color Selects the color of scales color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click the...

Page 570: ...s the font for text used in labels from the following Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic Cyrillic Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared The characters that can be displayed depend on the font For details refer to Chapter 2 1 3 Available Text on page 2 6 Text ID Specifies the Text Manager ID No 1 to 32 000 when text registered in Text Manager...

Page 571: ... display Chart data While LM0 is 0 the condition is not satisfied and the bar chart is not displayed While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the bar chart is displayed Trigger Type Selects the condition to enable the bar chart from the following LM0 Touch Condition Not satisfied 0 LM0 Condition Satisfied 1 Show chart Hide chart 100 50 0 100 50 0 Data over does not operate for hidden bar char...

Page 572: ...apter 2 5 2 Setting Conditional Expressions on page 2 64 While ON Enables the bar chart when the value of device is 1 Example When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Chart data While OFF Enables the bar chart when the value of device is 0 Example When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Chart data While satisfying the condition Enables the bar chart when the condition is...

Page 573: ...f the Bar Chart when condition is not satisfied Comment Enter a comment about trigger conditions The maximum number is 80 characters Not display Chart data The plate and flange are displayed but Bar Chart is not displayed Not update Chart data The last updated Bar Chart is displayed The Bar Chart does not change ...

Page 574: ...icted Default None None No security function is used Administrator Operator Reader Three security groups are set up by default Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box If you create a security group on the Security Group Settings dialog box you can select that created group For details refer to Chapter 21 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 21 15 For details about securit...

Page 575: ... logs in Group A parts are displayed User Name Security Group None Group A User1 User2 Touch 130 Line Chart and Bar Chart Display Group A Button Display Group A Numerical Display Display None Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 Group A parts are not displayed to User1 Group A parts are displayed to User2 Touch 130 Touch Touch 130 User1 User2 130 Password ENT User2 BS CLR OK A B...

Page 576: ... close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Enter a comment about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the bar chart on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over the part ...

Page 577: ...es sampled with the Data Log function in a trend chart Display the values of multiple continuous devices in a single line chart 2 Line Chart External device Touch D100 60 80 70 70 90 D101 30 40 40 50 70 D102 10 10 20 10 10 0 20 40 60 80 100 20 0 20 40 60 80 100 20 There are two types of trend charts a normal trend chart and a pen recorder trend chart External device Touch D100 1 D101 5 D102 10 D10...

Page 578: ... group click Charts and then click Line Chart 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Line Chart 3 Double click the dropped Line Chart and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Data Over tab Scale tab Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode To switch to Advanced mode click Advanced ...

Page 579: ... updated each time the latest data is sampled and the latest data is charted from the left edge If the sampled data exceeds the number of display points the entire chart is shifted to the left by the configured scroll size and the display is updated Example When Display Points is 5 and Scroll Size is 1 Ch1 data 30 Ch2 data 10 Display 80 30 90 40 110 40 110 30 5 Action 0 Scroll display point 6 Disp...

Page 580: ... settings The data cannot be displayed if its sampling conditions or data size is different Device Display Display the values of multiple continuous devices as a single line chart The data size for the devices is 16 bits Updating and erasing the display is controlled by the lower 2 bits of the starting address value control status of the continuous devices The number of values of devices to displa...

Page 581: ...Recorder is selected for Chart Type Data Type Selects the data type handled by the chart from the following BIN16 BIN16 BCD4 For details refer to Chapter 2 1 2 Available Data on page 2 2 Minimum Maximum Specifies the minimum and maximum for the chart The minimum and maximum vary based on the selected data type For details refer to Chapter 2 1 2 Available Data on page 2 2 If BCD4 is selected for Da...

Page 582: ... Pen Recorder is selected for Chart Type Right Scroll Device Left Scroll Device The chart can be scrolled to the right or to the left when display updating is stopped This option specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to scroll the chart left or right Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Add...

Page 583: ... Color Background Color Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click the Color button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Pattern Selects a pattern for the flange Click the Pattern button to open the Pattern Palette Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette Flange X Y Sets the display position of parts using co...

Page 584: ...2 Line Chart 10 26 SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual Size W H Sets width and height to define the size of parts W 5 to Base Screen horizontal size H 5 to Base Screen vertical size Width Height Screen Parts ...

Page 585: ... Dash Dot Long Dash Dot Dot Line Size Selects the line size from the following 1 dot 2 dots 3 dots 5 dots No Shows the numbers for the chart Ch1 to Ch20 Channel No Shows the Data Log channel number to display on the chart Data No Out of the data contained in the selected Data Log channel number shows the data number to display on the chart Line Type Shows the chart line type Line Size Shows the ch...

Page 586: ...e settings for the Data Log Channel No and Data No and the chart Line Type Line Size and Line Color Always register the settings from Ch1 Insert Inserts the chart settings in the position selected on the list Select a Ch number on the list and then click this button to insert the settings for the Data Log Channel No and Data No and the chart Line Type Line Size and Line Color The settings at the i...

Page 587: ...e starting address value control status The number of values of devices to display is specified by the value of starting address 1 The values of devices from starting address 2 are displayed on the chart Example If Reference Device is set to D100 continuous devices are used starting from D100 The used devices are as follows Bit 15 Bit 0 Bit 2 0 Do not update 1 Update 0 Do not erase 1 Erase Reserve...

Page 588: ...Solid Dot Dash Long Dash Long Dash Dot Long Dash Dot Dot Line Size Selects the line size from the following 1 dot 2 dots 3 dots 5 dots Line Color Selects the line color for the chart color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click this button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette ...

Page 589: ...um The minimum and maximum that can be specified differ according to the data type selected with Data Format on the General tab For details on data types refer to Chapter 2 1 2 Available Data on page 2 2 When grid lines are displayed for the minimum and maximum select the Show Gridline check box on the Scale tab and then select Data Over Ch1 data 60 Ch2 data 70 20 110 50 80 30 10 Display Range Val...

Page 590: ...s Enter the number of minor scale divisions 1 to 20 Show Tick Numbers Select this check box to display numbers along the scale Can only be set for Y Axis Color Selects the color of scales color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click the Color button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette The numbers and scales will be the same color If the area for displaying the scale is...

Page 591: ... Japanese European Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic Cyrillic Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared The characters that can be displayed depend on the font For details refer to Chapter 2 1 3 Available Text on page 2 6 Text ID Specifies the Text Manager ID No 1 to 32 000 when text registered in Text Manager are used for labels Click to display Text Manager Ca...

Page 592: ...yed Example When Trigger Type is While ON and Device is LM0 While LM0 is 0 the condition is not satisfied and the line chart is not displayed While LM0 is 1 the condition is satisfied and the line chart is displayed Trigger Type Selects the condition to enable the line chart from the following LM0 Touch Condition Not satisfied 0 LM0 Condition Satisfied 1 Show chart Hide chart 0 20 40 60 80 100 20 ...

Page 593: ...omment Enter a comment about trigger conditions The maximum number is 80 characters While ON Enables the line chart when the value of device is 1 While OFF Enables the line chart when the value of device is 0 While satisfying the condition Enables the line chart when the condition is satisfied 1 0 Hide chart Show chart Hide chart Show chart Show chart Show chart Hide chart Value of Device Chart st...

Page 594: ...icted Default None None No security function is used Administrator Operator Reader Three security groups are set up by default Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box If you create a security group on the Security Group Settings dialog box you can select that created group For details refer to Chapter 21 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 21 15 For details about securit...

Page 595: ...2 logs in Group A parts are displayed User Name Security Group None Group A User1 User2 Touch 130 Line Chart and Bar Chart Display Group A Button Display Group A Numerical Display Display None Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 Group A parts are not displayed to User1 Group A parts are displayed to User2 Touch 130 Touch Touch 130 User1 User2 130 Password ENT User2 BS CLR OK A ...

Page 596: ... close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Enter a comment about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the line chart on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over the part ...

Page 597: ...m of the data They can be used to check the relative change in the values of multiple devices in real time Display the proportion for the sum of values of multiple devices in a stacked bar chart or a pie chart 3 Pie Chart External device Touch 1 1 1 4 2 1 D100 10 D200 10 D300 10 D100 120 D200 60 D300 30 If the source data is all 0 the chart shows the same proportion for all the data ...

Page 598: ...he Home tab in the Parts group click Charts and then click Pie Chart 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Pie Chart 3 Double click the dropped Pie Chart and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode To switch to Advanced mode click Advanced ...

Page 599: ...l Bar Shows the proportion of the sum of the data as a horizontal stacked bar chart Example When displaying the values for three devices Vertical Bar Shows the proportion of the sum of the data as a vertical stacked bar chart Example When displaying the values for three devices Horizontal Bar display Ch3 data 0 Ch2 data 0 50 100 30 60 10 50 Ch1 data 0 100 120 150 Proportion 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 15 5 ...

Page 600: ...lick this button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Pie Shows the proportion of the sum of the data as a pie chart Example When displaying the values for three devices Ch3 data 0 Ch2 data 0 50 100 30 60 10 50 Ch1 data 0 100 120 300 Proportion 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 30 5 1 Pie chart display If BCD4 or BCD8 is selected and the read data contains A through F 1 is written to...

Page 601: ... this button to register the Reference Device Foreground Color Background Color and Pattern settings Insert Inserts the chart settings in the position selected on the list Select a Ch number on the list and then click this button to insert the Reference Device Foreground Color Background Color and Pattern settings The settings at the insertion point shift down one line Settings cannot be inserted ...

Page 602: ...or Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Pattern Selects a pattern for the flange Click the Pattern button to open the Pattern Palette Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette Flange X Y Sets the display position of parts using coordinates The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to Base Screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to Bas...

Page 603: ...restricted Default None None No security function is used Administrator Operator Reader Three security groups are set up by default Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box If you create a security group on the Security Group Settings dialog box you can select that created group For details refer to Chapter 21 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 21 15 For details about se...

Page 604: ... in Group A parts are displayed User Name Security Group None Group A User1 User2 Touch 130 Line Chart and Bar Chart Display Group A Button Display Group A Numerical Display Display None Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 Group A parts are not displayed to User1 Group A parts are displayed to User2 Touch 130 Touch Touch 130 User1 User2 130 Password ENT User2 BS CLR OK A B C D ...

Page 605: ...laced close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Enter a comment about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the pie chart on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over the p...

Page 606: ... s Manual 4 1 How the Meter is Used The meter displays the value of a word device as the movement of a needle Display the value of a word device in a meter 4 Meter External device Touch D100 0 D100 75 0 100 20 80 40 60 0 100 20 80 40 60 ...

Page 607: ...e tab in the Parts group click Charts and then click Meter 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Meter 3 Double click the dropped Meter and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary The Range tab Scale tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode To switch to Advanced mode click Advanced ...

Page 608: ...operties dialog box General Tab Part Name Enter a name for the part The maximum number is 20 characters Meter Type Select the type of meter from the following items 90 Degree Meter 180 Degree Meter 270 Degree Meter Example 180 Degree Meter 90 degree meter 180 degree meter 270 degree meter 180 degree meter display Data 0 10 40 75 ...

Page 609: ...able Data on page 2 2 Minimum Maximum Specifies the minimum and maximum for the data The minimum and maximum vary based on the selected data type For details refer to Chapter 2 1 2 Available Data on page 2 2 The needle does not move past the left edge when the data value is the minimum or lower The needle stops at the right edge when the data value is the maximum or higher If BCD4 is selected for ...

Page 610: ...wser Needle Selects the needle color of the Meter color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click the Color button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Plate Color Selects the plate color of the standard graphic color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click the Color button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Needle color Plate color ...

Page 611: ...n for the flange of the standard graphic Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette Flange X Y Sets the display position of parts using coordinates The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top left corner of the screen X 0 to Base Screen horizontal size 1 Y 0 to Base Screen vertical size 1 0 0 X Y Screen Parts ...

Page 612: ...rome 8 shades Click this button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette Limits Specifies the limit for the range The limit varies based on the selected data type For details refer to Chapter 2 1 2 Available Data on page 2 2 Example 180 degree meter data minimum is 0 maximum is 100 the number of ranges is set to 5 The limit between range 1 and 2 20 The limit between range...

Page 613: ...inor Divisions Enter the number of minor scale divisions 1 to 20 Show Tick Numbers Select this check box to display numbers along the scale The values are displayed in the same color as the scale Color Selects the color of scales color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click the Color button to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Palette If the area for displaying the scale is sma...

Page 614: ...ted Default None None No security function is used Administrator Operator Reader Three security groups are set up by default Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box If you create a security group on the Security Group Settings dialog box you can select that created group For details refer to Chapter 21 2 2 Adding and Editing Security Groups on page 21 15 For details about security ...

Page 615: ...ogs in Group A parts are displayed User Name Security Group None Group A User1 User2 Touch 130 Line Chart and Bar Chart Display Group A Button Display Group A Numerical Display Display None Open Password Screen enter password and switch to User2 Group A parts are not displayed to User1 Group A parts are displayed to User2 Touch 130 Touch Touch 130 User1 User2 130 Password ENT User2 BS CLR OK A B C...

Page 616: ... close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Enter a comment about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the meter on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over the part ...

Page 617: ...d Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Writes a 0 to the specified bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied 0 State of condition Data written 0 Action Write Write Condition Condition Condition Condition Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Writes a...

Page 618: ...Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied This function writes the value in the source bit device to the value in the destination bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied State of condition Action Move Move Condition Condition Condition Condition Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfi...

Page 619: ...uration procedure for the Bit Write Command 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Commands and then click Bit Write Command 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Bit Write Command 3 Double click the dropped Bit Write Command and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary ...

Page 620: ...the trigger condition is no longer satisfied a 0 is written to the specified bit device 1 State of condition Data written 1 Action Write Write Condition Condition Condition Condition Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied 0 State of condition Data written 0 Action Write Write Condition Conditio...

Page 621: ...d vice versa Move This function writes the value in the source bit device to the value in the destination bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied State of condition Action Toggle Toggle Condition Condition Condition Condition Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied State of condition ...

Page 622: ...dition to execute the command from the following LM0 Touch 0 LM0 1 Not executed Executed Condition Not satisfied Condition Satisfied Rising edge Command is executed when device changes from 0 to 1 Falling edge Command is executed when device changes from 1 to 0 Satisfy the condition Command is executed when condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied Value of Device 1 0 Action Execution Exec...

Page 623: ... box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Condition Sets the condition formula Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box For the conditional expression configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 2 Setting Con...

Page 624: ... close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Enter a comment about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Bit Write Command on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over th...

Page 625: ...te before writing it to a word device when the trigger condition is satisfied 2 Word Write Command Touch External device D1 0 100 D1 100 Write Destination word device 100 Value Condition Condition Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Touch External device D0 123 D1 0 D0 123 D1 123 Move Value of device Destination word device Condition Condition Satisfied Satisfie...

Page 626: ...er condition is no longer satisfied State of condition Data written Write Action OFF Data Write ON Data Write OFF Data Write ON Data Condition Condition Condition Condition Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Performs arithmetic on the value in a source device and a fixed value or a value of...

Page 627: ...uration procedure for the Word Write Command 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Commands and then click Word Write Command 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Word Write Command 3 Double click the dropped Word Write Command and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary ...

Page 628: ...F Data value to the specified word device when the trigger condition is no longer satisfied State of condition Data written Write Action Write Fixed Value Fixed Value Condition Condition Condition Condition Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied State of condition Data written Write Action Writ...

Page 629: ...ult Arithmetic operation Write Result Arithmetic operation Write Condition Condition Condition Condition Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied State of condition Data written Action Result Result Addition Write Addition Write Condition Condition Condition Condition Satisfied Satisfied Satisfie...

Page 630: ...to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Use Reference Device 1 Select this check box and specify a device to change the destination word device according to the value of the specified device This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move For details refer to Chapter 2 In...

Page 631: ...ce is LM0 The command is executed when LM0 changes from 0 to 1 Trigger Type Selects the condition to execute the command from the following LM0 Touch 0 LM0 1 Not executed Executed Condition Not satisfied Condition Satisfied Rising edge Command is executed when device changes from 0 to 1 Falling edge Command is executed when device changes from 1 to 0 Value of Device 1 0 Action Execution Execution ...

Page 632: ... Settings on page 2 62 Condition Sets the condition formula Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box For the conditional expression configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 2 Setting Conditional Expressions on page 2 64 Comment Enter a comment about trigger conditions The ma...

Page 633: ...placed close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Enter a comment about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Word Write Command on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing ...

Page 634: ...Screen when the trigger condition is satisfied Switches to the System Mode when the trigger condition is satisfied Resets the current screen when the trigger condition is satisfied 3 Goto Screen Command Touch Touch 130 Full Tank 1 Condition Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Touch Touch D51 D52 456 D53 0 999 123 Condition Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Touch Touch D51 D52 456 D53 0 999 123 Condition Sat...

Page 635: ...ration procedure for the Goto Screen Command 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Commands and then click Goto Screen Command 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Goto Screen Command 3 Double click the dropped Goto Screen Command and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary ...

Page 636: ...the Device Monitor Screen Close Device Monitor Screen Closes the Device Monitor Screen Open Ladder Monitor Opens the Ladder Monitor Close Ladder Monitor Closes the Ladder Monitor Open Password Screen Opens the Password Screen Close Password Screen Closes the Password Screen Open Adjust contrast Screen Opens the Adjust contrast Screen Close Adjust contrast Screen Closes the Adjust contrast Screen S...

Page 637: ...n procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup Screen or Close Popup Screen Coordinates X Y Specify the coordinates on the Base Screen for displaying a window X and Y specify the upper left corner of the window using the upper left corner of the screen as the origin This setting is enabled only if Action Mode...

Page 638: ...ondition to execute the command from the following LM0 Touch 0 LM0 1 Not executed Executed Condition Not satisfied Condition Satisfied Rising edge Command is executed when device changes from 0 to 1 Falling edge Command is executed when device changes from 1 to 0 Satisfy the condition Command is executed when condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied Value of Device 1 0 Action Execution Ex...

Page 639: ...og box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Condition Sets the condition formula Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box For the conditional expression configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 2 Setting C...

Page 640: ... close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Enter a comment about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Goto Screen Command on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over ...

Page 641: ... are satisfied 4 Script Command Touch Script A D 100 D 100 1 if D 100 50 D 100 0 Executes Script Start Condition Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Complex processes such as conditional branching logical operation arithmetic operation function etc can be programmed in a text format using Scripts For details refer to Chapter 20 Script on page 20 1 ...

Page 642: ...ration procedure for Script Commands 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Commands and then click Script Command 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Script Command 3 Double click the dropped Script Command and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary ...

Page 643: ...e script ID 1 to 32000 of the script to operate Script Manager will open when is clicked Select a script from the script list For details refer to Chapter 20 2 2 Script Manager on page 20 7 Script Name Displays the name of the script selected in Script Manager Script Displays the contents of the script selected in Script Manager Once this area is double clicked the Script Editor will open and edit...

Page 644: ...0 The command is executed when LM0 changes from 0 to 1 Trigger Type Selects the condition to execute the command from the following LM0 Touch 0 LM0 1 Not executed Executed Condition Not satisfied Condition Satisfied Rising edge Command is executed when device changes from 0 to 1 Falling edge Command is executed when device changes from 1 to 0 Value of Device 1 0 Action Execution Execution Executio...

Page 645: ...ted as Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box For the conditional expression configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 2 Setting Conditional Expressions on page 2 64 Period Sets the period for command execution from 1 to 3600 seconds Can only be set if Fixed Period is selected as Trigger Type Comment Enter a comment about trigger conditions The maximum number is...

Page 646: ... close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Enter a comment about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Script Command on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over the p...

Page 647: ...n 5 Multi Command Command Description Bit Write Writes a 0 or 1 to the specified bit device Word Write Writes a value to a word device You can specify the destination address indirectly and perform arithmetic on the value to be written Goto Screen Switches screens or opens other windows Key Performs downloads or uploads Also used to manipulate other parts Script Executes a script Touch External de...

Page 648: ...uration procedure for Multi Commands 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Commands and then click Multi Command 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Multi Command 3 Double click the dropped Multi Command and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary ...

Page 649: ...ot executed from top to bottom as they appear in the Function List Rather they are executed at the end of the scan of the Touch when the trigger condition is satisfied The function of Key button will affect on the next scan when the trigger condition is satisfied If multiple Key commands are set only the first and second Key commands in the Function List are executed The third and following Key co...

Page 650: ...2 commands may be added Click this button to display the Properties dialog box for the command selected from Command Type Edit Changes a command in the list Click this button to display the Properties dialog box for the command selected in Function List Delete Deletes a command from the list Select the command in the list and then click this button Copy Copies a command in the list Select a comman...

Page 651: ...ge 11 5 1 Advanced mode only Set Writes a 1 to the specified bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied Reset Writes a 0 to the specified bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied Set Reset Writes a 1 to the specified bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied When the trigger condition is no longer satisfied a 0 is written to the specified bit device Toggle Toggles the va...

Page 652: ...rites the value in the source device to the destination word device when the trigger condition is satisfied Set ON OFF Data Writes a fixed value of ON Data to the specified word device when the trigger condition is satisfied Writes a fixed value of OFF Data to the specified word device when the trigger condition is no longer satisfied Add Sub Multi Div Mod OR AND XOR Performs arithmetic on the val...

Page 653: ...the value of the specified device This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move For details refer to Chapter 2 Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings on page 2 5 Transfer 1 Specify the number of word devices 1 to 64 to move This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move For details refer to Transfer on page 11 14 Destination Device Specify the destination word device Cl...

Page 654: ...onitor Screen Close Device Monitor Screen Closes the Device Monitor Screen Open Ladder Monitor Opens the Ladder Monitor Close Ladder Monitor Closes the Ladder Monitor Open Password Screen Opens the Password Screen Close Password Screen Closes the Password Screen Open Adjust contrast Screen Opens the Adjust contrast Screen Close Adjust contrast Screen Closes the Adjust contrast Screen Switch to Sys...

Page 655: ...rocedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup Screen or Close Popup Screen Coordinates X Y Specify the coordinates on the Base Screen for displaying a window X and Y specify the upper left corner of the window using the upper left corner of the screen as the origin This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is...

Page 656: ...st up and down respectively Key Buttons Fcs Up and Fcs Dwn move the focus up and down respectively This settings specifies the number of pages or lines 1 to 1023 lines to scroll or move the focus per each press of the button This setting is enabled only if Pg Up Pg Dwn Fcs Up and Fcs Dwn are selected using the Key Browser Displays settings applicable to the selected key Key Language Switches the d...

Page 657: ...is selected Source This is set to the USB flash drive on which the project file to transfer ZNV was saved File Path Specify the path to the project file ZNV to transfer The maximum number is 247 characters Example Where FT_DEMO_1 ZNV is a project file saved on the root directory of a USB flash drive FT_DEMO_1 ZNV Source Specify where to save the project uploaded from Touch The location is the USB ...

Page 658: ...0 of the script to operate Script Manager will open when is clicked Select a script from the script list For details refer to Chapter 20 2 2 Script Manager on page 20 7 Script Name Displays the name of the script selected in Script Manager Script Displays the contents of the script selected in Script Manager Once this area is double clicked the Script Editor will open and editing can be done For d...

Page 659: ...e condition to execute the command from the following LM0 Touch 0 LM0 1 Not executed Executed Condition Not satisfied Condition Satisfied Rising edge Command is executed when device changes from 0 to 1 Falling edge Command is executed when device changes from 1 to 0 Satisfy the condition Command is executed when condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied Value of Device 1 0 Action Execution...

Page 660: ...r the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Condition Sets the condition formula Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box For the conditional expression configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 2 Setting Conditiona...

Page 661: ...placed close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Enter a comment about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Multi Command on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over ...

Page 662: ... Current Value LTD0 value 1999 1999 1998 999 1 1999 0 Condition Condition Condition Condition Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied The HMI Timer Relay LTC is an internal device bit device that changes to 1 once the time set for the timer has elapsed The HMI Timer Current Value LTD is an inter...

Page 663: ...bes the configuration procedure for Timers 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Commands and then click Timer 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Timer 3 Double click the dropped Timer and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary ...

Page 664: ...use and the enter the preset value The preset value is the time from when the timer starts its countdown until 1 is written to the HMI Timer Relay LTC Example When 0 is specified for Timer Address HMI Timer Relay LTC0 HMI Timer Current Value LTD0 Value When selecting sec in Unit the preset value is specified with 1 to 65535 second units up to a maximum of 1092 minutes 15 seconds When selecting 100...

Page 665: ...he condition formula Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type For details refer to Chapter 2 1 2 Available Data on page 2 2 LM0 Touch 0 LM0 1 Not executed Executed Condition Not satisfied Condition Satisfied While ON Command is executed when device is 1 While OFF Command is executed when device is 0 While satisfying the condition The command continues being exe...

Page 666: ...ess configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Condition Sets the condition formula Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box For the conditional expression configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 2 Setting Conditional Expressions on page 2 64 Comment Enter a...

Page 667: ...placed close to No Name or Type in the object list Description Enter a comment about parts The maximum number is 80 characters Example When mousing over the Timer on the editing screen When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen this features makes it possible to distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part by just mousing over the part...

Page 668: ...6 Timer 11 52 SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual ...

Page 669: ... execution period Ladder or FBD process Executes the ladder program or FBD program Output refresh Updates the relay output Q Chapter 12 Control Function 1 Control Function Actions I Q I Start of processing for part at top of screen Q Input Output Output delay Output process Input process Input delay Execution Period Input refresh Output refresh Ladder or FBD process Sleep HMI function execution Co...

Page 670: ...goes to sleep again When processing reaches the bottom of the screen processing returns to the top of the screen When an output occurs immediately after the output refresh ends the output delay will be the longest because the processor waits for the output refresh in the next scan before reflecting the output to the output relay Q Q Output process Input refresh Output refresh Ladder or FBD process...

Page 671: ... Maintain Outputs While Ladder Program Operation Stopped For details on M8025 Maintain Outputs While Ladder Program Operation Stopped refer to Chapter 27 Special Internal Relay M on page 27 5 The current values of timer instructions and timer FB are reset For details refer to the follows Ladder program Timer instruction F refer to TML 1 Second Timer in Chapter 5 Basic Instructions TML 1 sec Timer ...

Page 672: ...ladder program 2 Ladder Program The programming language can be changed in the PLC Selection dialog box The PLC Selection dialog box can also be accessed using the following methods Click PLC Type on the status bar and then click PLC Selection on the displayed drop down list On the Configuration tab in the PLC group click PLC To change the default programming language select the programming langua...

Page 673: ... turned on When both inputs I0 and I1 are turned on output Q2 flashes in 1 sec increments For details about basic and advanced instructions refer to the SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual Rung No Input I0 Input I1 Output Operation 1 ON OFF Output Q0 is turned ON 2 OFF ON Output Q1 is turned ON 3 ON ON Output Q2 flashes in 1 sec increments One collection of a group of instructions that control out...

Page 674: ...d on the ladder line and the properties are displayed in the Property window 3 Set the device in the Property window Enter I0 for Device and press ENTER A NO contact of input I0 is programmed in the first column of the first ladder line Instructions can be entered using the right click menu or the keyboard If entering an instruction using the right click menu open the menu click Basic Command B an...

Page 675: ...splayed at the mouse pointer 2 Move the mouse pointer to the second column of the first ladder line where you want to insert a NC contact and then click the left mouse button The NC contact is created on the ladder line and the properties are displayed in the Property window 3 Set the device in the Property window Enter I1 for Device and press ENTER A NC contact of input I1 is programmed in the fi...

Page 676: ...r to the third column of the first ladder line where you want to insert an output coil and then click the left mouse button The output is created on the ladder line and the properties are displayed in the Property window 3 Set the device in the Property window Enter Q0 for Device and press ENTER Output Q0 is connected to the series circuit of the NO contact for input I0 and the NC contact for inpu...

Page 677: ...1 and Output Q1 Enter NC contact I0 and NO contact I1 and Output Q1 in the same way as described from Inserting a NO contact of input I0 on page 12 6 to Inserting Output Q0 on page 12 8 Rungs can be added using the right click menu or the keyboard If inserting a rung using the right click menu open the menu and click Append N and then click Rung R If inserting a rung from the keyboard press ENTER ...

Page 678: ...es ON OFF on a 1 second cycle This completes programming for rung 1 to 3 One output or computation instruction can be laid out on each ladder line If entering multiple outputs or computation instructions within a single rung or if setting input conditions that extend over multiple lines insert a ladder line to the rung Ladder lines can be inserted using the right click menu or the keyboard If inse...

Page 679: ... that programs have been correctly created On the Home tab in the Program group click Convert When the instruction symbols are connected correctly conversion is completed successfully If any error is found the errors are listed on the Info Window screen Then make corrections as necessary Information window ...

Page 680: ...e WindLDR Online tab in the Monitor group click Monitor When both inputs I0 and I1 are on the ladder diagram on the monitor screen looks as follows Rung 1 When both inputs I0 and I1 are on output Q0 is turned off Rung 2 When both inputs I0 and I1 are on output Q1 is turned off Rung 3 When both inputs I0 and I1 are on internal relay M10 is turned on M8121 is the 1 sec clock special internal relay W...

Page 681: ...ck in WindLDR and then click Exit WindLDR WindLDR closes Application button If project data is saved during editing in WindO I NV3 control function are also saved If you click in WindLDR and then click Close or if you close the project file while editing in WindO I NV3 you will exit WindLDR ...

Page 682: ...uires specialist knowledge To make effective use of the SmartAXIS take the time to develop a thorough understanding of the contents and programs in this manual Symbol Name and Diagram Function Interrupt Program Execution LOD Load The LOD instruction starts the logical operation with an NO normally open contact Stores intermediate results and reads contact status YES LODN Load Not The LODN instruct...

Page 683: ...utput Up Falling edge differentiation output NO SOTD Single Output Down Rising edge differentiation output NO TML 1 sec Timer 1 sec On Delay timer NO TIM 100 ms Timer 100 msec ON Delay timer NO TMH 10 ms Timer 10 msec ON Delay timer NO TMS 1 ms Timer 1 msec ON Delay timer NO TMLO 1 sec Off delay Timer 1 sec OFF Delay timer NO TIMO 100 ms Off delay Timer 100 msec OFF Delay timer NO TMHO 10 ms Off d...

Page 684: ...Forward shift register NO SFRN Reverse shift register Reverse shift register NO CC Counter Comparison Equal to comparison of counter current value YES CC Counter Comparison Greater than or equal to comparison of counter current value YES DC Data Register Comparison Equal to comparison of data register value YES DC Data Register Comparison Greater than or equal to comparison of data register value ...

Page 685: ...AXIS Touch User s Manual 12 17 2 Ladder Program 12 Control Function JEND Jump End Ends a jump instruction YES END End Ends a program YES Symbol Name and Diagram Function Interrupt Program Execution JEND END ...

Page 686: ...ion which is determined by the sum of values contained in devices designed by D1 and D2 S1 S2 D1 D2 YES IBMVN Indirect Bit Move Not When input is on the values contained in devices designated by S1 and S2 are added to determine the source of data The 1 bit data so determined is inverted and moved to destination which is determined by the sum of values contained in devices designated by D1 and D2 S...

Page 687: ...1 on Data type D L or F S1 S1 1 S2 S2 1 D1 on CMP Compare Less Than or Equal To When input is on 16 or 32 bit data designated by source devices S1 and S2 are compared When S1 data is less than or equal to S2 data destination device D1 is turned on When the condition is not met D1 is turned off YES Data type W or I S1 S2 D1 on Data type D L or F S1 S1 1 S2 S2 1 D1 on CMP Compare Greater Than or Equ...

Page 688: ...pe W or I S1 S2 Data type D L or F S1 S1 1 S2 S2 1 LC Load Compare Greater Than or Equal To This instruction constantly compares 16 or 32 bit data designated by S1 and S2 When S1 data is greater than or equal to S2 data the output to the following instructions is turned on When the condition is not met the output is turned off YES Data type W or I S1 S2 Data type D L or F S1 S1 1 S2 S2 1 ADD Addit...

Page 689: ...n the square root of device designated by S1 is extracted and is stored to the destination designated by D1 The square root is calculated to two decimals omitting the figures below the second place of decimals and multiplied by 100 YES Data type W When input is on the square root of device designated by S1 S1 1 is extracted and is stored to the destination designated by D1 D1 1 The square root is ...

Page 690: ...ated by S2 and converted back to 32 bit binary data Valid values for each of S1 and S1 1 are 0 through 9999 The quantity of digits to shift can be 1 through 7 Zeros are set to the lowest digits as many as the digits shifted YES WSFT Word Shift When input is on N blocks of 16 bit word data starting with device designated by D1 are shifted up to the next 16 bit positions At the same time the data de...

Page 691: ...5 for the word data type and 1 through 10 for the double word data type YES Word data type S1 D1 D1 1 D1 2 D1 3 D1 4 Double word data type S1 S1 1 D1 D1 1 D1 2 D1 9 ATOB ASCII to BCD When input is on the ASCII data designated by S1 as many as the quantity of digits designated by S2 is converted into BCD and converted into 16 or 32 bit binary data The result is stored to the destination designated ...

Page 692: ...stination data type S1 D1 YES DTDV Data Divide When input is on the 16 bit binary data designated by S1 is divided into upper and lower bytes The upper byte data is stored to the destination designated by device D1 The lower byte data is stored to the device next to D1 S1 D1 D1 1 YES DTCB Data Combine When input is on the lower byte data is read out from 2 consecutive sources starting with device ...

Page 693: ...rogram after the branch is executed A LRET instruction see below must be placed at the end of a program branch which is called so that normal program execution resumes by returning to the instruction following the LCAL instruction Note The END instruction must be used to separate the main program from any subroutines called by the LCAL instruction A maximum of four LCAL instructions can be nested ...

Page 694: ...ion is set The XY coordinates define the linear relationship between X and Y NO CVXTY Convert X to Y When input is on the X value designated by device S2 is converted into corresponding Y value according to the linear relationship defined in the XYFS instruction The conversion result is set to the device designated by D1 NO CVYTX Convert Y to X When input is on the Y value designated by device S2 ...

Page 695: ...input is on the arc sine of the value designated by source device S1 is stored in radians to the destination designated by device D1 asin S1 S1 1 D1 D1 1 rad If the S1 S1 1 value is not within this range an indefinite value is stored to D1 D1 1 The S1 S1 1 value must be within the following range 1 0 S1 S1 1 1 0 If the S1 S1 1 value is not within this range an indefinite value is stored to D1 D1 1...

Page 696: ...nd 0 is stored in device D 1 NO TADD Time Addition When input is on time data designated by source device S2 are added to date time data designated by source device S1 depending on the selected mode The result is stored to destination device D1 and carry M8003 S1 S2 D1 CY YES TSUB Time Subtraction When input is on time data designated by source device S2 are subtracted from date time data designat...

Page 697: ...ES YES YES YES YES NRS YES YES YES YES YES XCHG YES NO YES NO NO TCCST YES NO YES NO NO Data Comparison CMP YES YES YES YES YES CMP YES YES YES YES YES CMP YES YES YES YES YES CMP YES YES YES YES YES CMP YES YES YES YES YES CMP YES YES YES YES YES ICMP YES YES YES YES YES LC YES YES YES YES YES LC YES YES YES YES YES LC YES YES YES YES YES LC YES YES YES YES YES LC YES YES YES YES YES LC YES YES Y...

Page 698: ...YES NO NO NO NO DTCB YES NO NO NO NO SWAP YES NO YES NO NO Week Programmer WEEK NO NO NO NO NO YEAR NO NO NO NO NO Program Branching LABEL NO NO NO NO NO LJMP NO NO NO NO NO LCAL NO NO NO NO NO LRET NO NO NO NO NO DJNZ NO NO NO NO NO I O Refresh IOREF NO NO NO NO NO HSCRF NO NO NO NO NO Enable Disable Interrupt DI NO NO NO NO NO EI NO NO NO NO NO Coordinate Conversion XYFS YES YES NO NO NO CVXTY Y...

Page 699: ... NO NO NO YES Logarithm Power LOGE NO NO NO NO YES LOG10 NO NO NO NO YES EXP NO NO NO NO YES POW NO NO NO NO YES File Data Processing FIFOF YES NO NO NO NO FIEX YES NO NO NO NO FOEX YES NO NO NO NO NDSRC YES YES YES YES YES Clock TADD NO NO NO NO NO TSUB NO NO NO NO NO HOUR NO NO NO NO NO HTOS NO NO NO NO NO STOH NO NO NO NO NO Script SCRPT YES YES YES YES YES PID PID NO NO NO NO NO Group Data Typ...

Page 700: ...r program editing screen is displayed click FT1A Touch on the status bar and then click PLC Selection on the displayed drop down list The PLC Selection dialog box is displayed 3 Select FBD and then click OK Next create a FBD program 3 FBD Program The PLC Selection dialog box can also be displayed by clicking PLC Type in the PLC group on the Configuration tab To change the default programming langu...

Page 701: ... tab in the Function Block group click Terminal and then click I Digital Input 2 Move the mouse pointer to the FBD editor and then click the mouse button Input I0 is inserted at the position of the mouse pointer For details about FB refer to the SmartAXIS FBD Programming Manual Circuit block Input I0 Input I1 Input I2 Action Q0 ON ON Turn output Q0 on Q1 OFF ON Repeatedly turn output Q2 on and off...

Page 702: ...ck Basic and then click AND Logical AND 2 Move the mouse pointer to the FBD editor and then click the mouse button AND B0 is inserted at the position of the mouse pointer Connect input I0 and AND B0 with a connection line 1 On the WindLDR Home tab in the Line group click Draw Line 2 Move the mouse pointer to the input I0 output connector ...

Page 703: ... and connect it to the AND B0 output 1 On the WindLDR Home tab in the Function Block group click Terminal and then click Q Digital Output 2 Move the mouse pointer to the FBD editor and then click the mouse button Output Q0 is inserted at the position of the mouse pointer 3 Connect the AND B0 output connector and the output Q0 input connector with a connection line Connect them in the same manner a...

Page 704: ...nd connect it with a connection line in the same manner as Connect input I0 and AND B0 with a connection line on page 12 34 Insert input I2 and XOR B1 and connect input I1 and input I2 to XOR B1 input 1 and input 2 The FB output connectors can be connected to multiple FB input connectors Multiple FB output connectors cannot be connected to a single FB input connector ...

Page 705: ...een correctly created On the WindLDR Home tab in the Program group click Convert If the FBs are correctly connected the conversion will be successful If errors are found a list of errors is displayed in the information window Fix those errors in order M8121 is a special internal relay that repeatedly turns on and off in a one second cycle For details on the special internal relay see Chapter 27 Sp...

Page 706: ...ng operations When you turn on both input I0 and input I1 output Q0 turns on When you turn on either input I1 or input I2 output Q1 repeatedly turns on and off in a one second cycle This concludes the monitor operation You can monitor the state of the input connectors and output connectors for each FB When input connectors output connectors and connection lines are red they are on Blue is off For ...

Page 707: ... in WindLDR and then click Exit WindLDR WindLDR closes Application button If project data is saved during editing in WindO I NV3 control function are also saved If you click in WindLDR and then click Close or if you close the project file while editing in WindO I NV3 you will exit WindLDR ...

Page 708: ...pecial Internal Relay Special internal relays can be used as bit inputs for FBs Special function is allocated to each special internal relay For details on the individual special internal relays see Chapter 7 Devices Special internal relay list in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual NO R Shift Register Outputs ON OFF state of a shift register device NO AI Analog Input For the analog inputs A10 AI...

Page 709: ...clusive logical OR for a maximum of two input signals ON OFF and outputs the result NO XNOR Negative Exclusive Logical OR Implements negative exclusive logical OR for a maximum of two input signals ON OFF and outputs the result NO NOT Negation Outputs the result of negating the input signal ON OFF NO SOTU Shot Up Turns on the output for one scan when the input signal turns from off to on NO SOTD S...

Page 710: ...t Down Timer When the execution input turns on the output is turned on After the execution input turns off the output is turned off when the off delay time elapses The current value is decremented from the preset values to zero NO TIMCU On off delay Timer After the execution input turns on the output is turned on when the on delay time elapses After the execution input turns off the output is turn...

Page 711: ...the accumulated time reaches the configured time NO CNT RST OUT UP CUD PRST OUT CLK U D HOUR EN OUT RST Symbol Name and Diagram Function Output Inversion SFR Shift Register When the execution input turns on the shift registers are shifted to the specified shift direction YES SFR TRG OUT RST DI DIR Symbol Name and Diagram Function Output Inversion CMP Data Comparison Two comparison values are compa...

Page 712: ...d Diagram Function Output Inversion SCRPT Script Enables you to program complicated processing with the script language that supports conditional branching logical operations arithmetic operations and functions NO SCRPT EN OUT Symbol Name and Diagram Function Output Inversion HSC High speed Counter Operates the high speed counter configured in the function area settings Turns on off the high speed...

Page 713: ...ive Logical OR NOR NO NO NO NO NO Exclusive Logical OR XOR NO NO NO NO NO Negative Exclusive Logical OR XNOR NO NO NO NO NO Negation NOT NO NO NO NO NO Shot Up SOTU NO NO NO NO NO Shot Down SOTD NO NO NO NO NO Truth Table TRUTH NO NO NO NO NO Timer On delay Count Up Timer TIMU YES NO NO NO NO On delay Count Down Timer TIMD YES NO NO NO NO Off delay Count Up Timer TIMOU YES NO NO NO NO Off delay Co...

Page 714: ... remote I O slaves For the remote I O slave function and configuration procedure refer to the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual 4 Remote I O Ethernet Connection 1 Connection 2 Connection 3 Pro Lite Remote I O slave Pro Lite Remote I O slave Touch Remote I O master Pro Lite Remote I O slave If a communication timeout occurs at a remote I O slave all outputs of the remote I O slave are turned off Dep...

Page 715: ...escription Connection 1 Digital inputs I40 to I75 Digital outputs Q40 to Q61 Analog inputs D8149 AI10 to D8156 AI17 Remote I O slave 1 communication error status D8148 Remote I O slave 1 communication error M8005 Remote host IP address 000 000 000 000 to 255 255 255 255 Port number 0 to 65535 Timeout 100 ms to 25 500 ms 100 ms increments Connection 2 Digital inputs I80 to I115 Digital outputs Q80 ...

Page 716: ...g inputs D8040 to D8047 Connection 1 I40 to I75 Q40 to Q61 Analog inputs D8149 to D8156 Connection 2 I80 to I115 Q80 to Q101 Analog inputs D8158 to D8165 Connection 3 I120 to I155 Q120 to Q141 Analog inputs D8167 to D8174 I0 to I35 Q0 to Q21 Analog inputs D8040 to D8047 Remote I O master Remote I O slave 1 Item Connection port Device Description Connection status Connection 1 M8110 Indicates the c...

Page 717: ...ror status D8148 D8157 D8166 is 2 connection disconnected 2 The remote I O master attempts to establish a connection with remote I O slave 1 but the connection cannot be established At the event above the remote I O slave 1 communication error M8005 is kept on and the remote I O slave 1 communication status D8148 is kept as 2 connection disconnected 3 When the connection is successfully establishe...

Page 718: ...only issued for remote I O slaves that have returned a response 3 When multiple responses are received in one scan new requests are issued for all of those simultaneously in END processing Remote I O master Remote I O slave 1 1 2 3 Remote I O slave 2 Remote I O slave 3 END processing One scan Remote Communication Speed The communication speed in remote I O communication is affected by such factors...

Page 719: ...V3 View tab in the Workspace group click Control Function WindLDR starts 2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab in the Function Area Settings group click Connection Settings The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed 3 Click Communication Mode for the connection to configure and then select Remote I O Master The Remote I O Master dialog box is displayed 4 Click Remote Host No and select New Re...

Page 720: ... OK When the settings are correctly configured the details configured in the Remote Host dialog box is displayed in Remote Host No 7 For Receive Timeout ms configure the receive timeout with the remote I O slave 8 Click OK Configuring the remote I O master is completed The default port number of the remote I O slave is 2110 ...

Page 721: ...te Alarm Log data Monitor device states and detect alarms Display an alarm screen when an alarm occurs Make a sound of the buzzer and screen flashing the screen when an alarm occurs Chapter 13 Alarm Log Function 1 Overview Touch External device 0 1 12 00 0 1 12 53 12 00 Alarm occurred 12 53 Recovered 12 54 Confirmed Alarm Log data No Message Occurrence Time Recovery Time Confirmation Time 1 1 Volt...

Page 722: ...1 Overview 13 2 SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual Output Alarm Log data to the external memory USB flash drive Output to USB flash drive Alarm Log data CSV Touch ...

Page 723: ...he first alarm that occurs in a state where no alarms have occurred Second and later An alarm that has occurred while another alarm is active Recovered Indicates that the alarm that occurred has been recovered from However for channels set to lock the alarm is not recovered from until a key button is pressed CHECK or All Chk Confirmed Indicates the key button CHECK or All Chk was pressed Record oc...

Page 724: ...d Ch No Message Occurrence Time Recovery Time Confirmation Time 12 50 30 1 1 Voltage drop 12 01 2011 12 50 00 12 01 12 50 20 12 01 12 50 30 Channel No 1 2 Alarm 1 2 Temperature abnormal 12 01 2011 12 50 10 12 50 10 5 Channel No 1 1 Alarm occurred Ch No Message Occurrence Time Recovery Time Confirmation Time 12 51 00 1 1 Voltage drop 12 01 2011 12 50 00 12 01 12 50 20 12 01 12 50 30 Channel No 1 2 ...

Page 725: ...larm has occurred 4 Alarm state and time The alarm state occurred recovered confirmed and the time the alarm occurred was recovered from and confirmed When the sampled data is output as a CSV file the displayed label varies based on the output method 5 Label When the sampled data is output as a CSV file this is the text displayed in the label row This cannot be changed Ś EŽ DĞƐƐĂŐĞ KĐĐƵƌƌĞŶĐĞ dŝŵĞ...

Page 726: ...state and the time the alarm became that state on a single line each time an alarm occurs is recovered from or is confirmed The labels displayed in the label row are Ch No Message State and Time Example When the message for channel number 1 1 is Voltage drop and the message for channel number 1 2 is Temperature abnormal Ch No Message Occurrence Time Recovery Time Confirmation Time 1 1 Voltage drop...

Page 727: ...e following methods Fixed If the saved data exceeds the Alarm Log data storage amount the new data is not saved Rotate If the saved data exceeds the Alarm Log data storage amount the oldest data is deleted and the new data is saved Data Storage Amount The maximum amount of data that can be saved in the data storage area is 5011 Touch External device 0 1 12 00 0 1 12 53 12 00 Alarm occurred 12 53 R...

Page 728: ...ve alarms on the Alarm List Display Deleting Data The method to delete sampled data from the data storage area is as follows On the Online tab in WindO I NV3 click the arrow under Clear and then click All or Alarm Log Data For details refer to Chapter 23 4 Clear on page 23 22 On the Top Page in the System Mode press Main Menu Initial Setting Initialize and Alarm Log in order Alarm List Display Tou...

Page 729: ...saved in a CSV file format into the external memory which it can be read on your computer For details refer to 4 4 Saving Data as a CSV File on page 13 32 To use with the Touch To use with devices other than the Touch Alarm Log data Ch No Message Occurrence Time Recovery Time Confirmation Time 1 1 Voltage drop 12 01 2011 12 00 05 12 01 12 01 10 12 01 12 01 30 1 2 Temperature abnormal 12 01 2011 12...

Page 730: ...Bit devices are configured per channel 3 Set the number of blocks to manage in Number of Blocks One channel is used for one device to monitor One block is 16 channels The number of blocks that can be set varies based on the Source Device Type setting 4 Select the reference screen type in Reference Screen The reference screen is associated with the channel This screen is displayed when the key butt...

Page 731: ...NC select the alarm detection condition If you select NO the alarm occurs when the monitored bit changes from 0 to 1 If you select NC the alarm occurs when the monitored bit changes from 1 to 0 10 Under Lock Unlock select whether or not to automatically recover based on the state of the monitored bit If you select Unlock the alarm is automatically recovered from based on the bit state when the mon...

Page 732: ...es configuring the devices to monitor and the alarm detection condition Next configure the functions to execute using saved data and detected alarms F 4 1 Displaying Saved Data with the Alarm Log Display on page 13 25 F 4 2 Displaying Registered Messages with the Alarm List Display According to the Active Alarm on page 13 27 F 4 3 Make a Sound of the Buzzer and Flash the Screen when an Alarm has O...

Page 733: ...g and deleting the sampled data Storage Method Selects the data processing method when the number of active alarms exceeds the Alarm Log data storage amount set for the data storage area 3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box Fixed If the saved data exceeds the Alarm Log data storage amount the new data is not saved Rotate If the saved data exceeds the Alarm Log data storage amount the oldest data is del...

Page 734: ...hat has occurred for channel number 2 15 is saved Starting device Block 1 16 channels Block 2 16 channels Channel No LKR100 LKR101 LKR102 LKR114 LKR115 LKR116 LKR117 LKR118 LKR130 LKR131 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 14 1 15 2 0 2 1 2 2 2 14 2 15 If you specify HMI Keep Registers LKR as the destination word device the number of alarms that has occurred is retained even when the Touch power is turned off The amoun...

Page 735: ... Data Storage Area Management dialog box You can change the allocation of data storage area memory in the Data Storage Area Management dialog box For details refer to Chapter 16 Data Storage Area on page 16 1 Call Popup Screen Select this check box to display the alarm screen when an alarm occurs Screen No Specifies the alarm screen number 1 to 3015 to display when an alarm occurs Coordinates X Y ...

Page 736: ...t is the Base Screen or Popup Screen associated with each channel Word Uses a word device Devices are configured per block Bit Uses a bit device Devices are configured per channel Word 0 to 128 Bit 0 to 8 One block is composed of 16 channels One device can be monitored for each channel The maximum number of devices that can be monitored is 16 for each block Time 09 15 Motor fault Message 10 02 Pum...

Page 737: ...ration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Data Shows whether or not to save Alarm Log data in the date storage area Double clicking the cell switches between Store and No Store Alarm function Shows whether or not the alarm function is used Double clicking the cell switches between Enable and Disable Channels switched to Disable cannot be configured Device states ...

Page 738: ...equentially set from block number 1 channel number 1 starting with the specified device address For the Individual Settings dialog box if Source Device Type on the Channel tab is Word the 16 channels for the block selected at the start of the specified device address are batch configured For Bit the selected channel is individually configured Click to open the Device Address Settings dialog box wh...

Page 739: ...mal state Example When NO NC is NO Press CHECK Record confirmation time Record recovery time Record occurrence time Unlock Record confirmation time Record recovery time No operation Record occurrence time Lock 0 1 0 1 Monitored bit Alarm occurred The display on the Alarm List Display disappears when the alarm is recovered from regardless of the Lock Unlock setting To keep displaying the alarm unti...

Page 740: ...d data to the external memory The output data is stored in the following folder on the external memory External memory folder ALARMLOG The default External Memory Folder name is HGDATA01 For details refer to Chapter 26 1 5 Setting the External Memory Folder on page 26 12 Sampled data after starting output to the external memory is not included in the output data ...

Page 741: ...there is insufficient free space on the external memory USB flash drive error information is stored in HMI Special Data Register LSD33 Trigger Device Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition for batch output For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Data is output to file when the trigger device change...

Page 742: ...Real time output stops when the file size of the Alarm Log data exceeds 256 MB or when there is insufficient space on the external memory USB flash drive error information is stored in HMI Special Data Register LSD33 When the value of HMI Special Relay LSM18 changes from 0 to 1 the data at that time is first output in real time to the USB flash drive and then access to the USB flash drive is stopp...

Page 743: ...erase files during operation using parts on the External Memory tab on the Project Settings dialog box select the Remove Files stored in External Memory check box and the All Alarm Log data check box and then configure the trigger device Assign that trigger device to a part To erase files with WindO I NV3 click Clear on the Online tab and then click Stored Data in External Memory to open the Clear...

Page 744: ... The sound of the buzzer and screen flashing stops when you touch anywhere on the screen When press CHECK All Chk button The sound of the buzzer and screen flashing stops when you touch the key buttons CHECK or All Chk on the Alarm Log Display When all Alarms are recovered The sound of the buzzer and screen flashing stops when all the alarms are recovered from While the sound of the buzzer is soun...

Page 745: ... group click Alarm Log The Alarm Log Settings dialog box is displayed 2 Select the type of device to monitor under Source Device Type on the Channel tab and specify Number of Blocks 3 Select the channel number to register and then click Edit The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed 4 Specify the device to monitor in Source and select Store under Data 4 Using Data and Detected Alarms ...

Page 746: ...ata Displays and then click Alarm Log Display 9 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Alarm Log Display 10 Double click the dropped Alarm Log Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 11 Change the settings on each tab as necessary For details refer to Chapter 9 7 3 Properties of Alarm Log Display Dialog Box on page 9 101 12 Click OK The Properties of Alarm Log D...

Page 747: ...ings dialog box is displayed 2 Select the type of device to monitor under Source Device Type on the Channel tab and specify Number of Blocks 3 Select the channel number to register a message to and then click Edit The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed 4 Specify the device to monitor in Source and select No Store under Data 5 Select Enable under Alarm function and configure NO NC and Lock...

Page 748: ...ick OK in the Individual Settings dialog box The registered message is displayed in Settings of the Alarm Log Settings dialog box 10 Repeat steps 3 through 9 to register messages for all the channels 11 Click OK The Alarm Log Settings dialog box closes The messages to use can be registered in advance in Text Manager ...

Page 749: ...larm List Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 15 On the General tab under Message Settings select Use Alarm Log Settings 16 Configure the other settings and the settings on each tab as necessary For details refer to Chapter 9 6 3 Properties of Alarm List Display Dialog Box on page 9 85 17 Click OK The Properties of Alarm List Display dialog box closes This concludes configuring t...

Page 750: ... Log Settings dialog box is displayed 2 Select the type of device to monitor under Source Device Type on the Channel tab and specify Number of Blocks 3 Select the channel number to register a message to and then click Edit The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed 4 Specify the device to monitor in Source and select Store under Data 5 Select Enable under Alarm function configure NO NC and Lo...

Page 751: ...uzzer when Alarm occurs check box to make a sound of the buzzer when an alarm has occurred 8 Select the Screen flashing when Alarm occurs check box to have the screen flashing when an alarm has occurred 9 Click OK The Alarm Log Settings dialog box closes This concludes configuring the settings to make a sound of the buzzer and the screen flashing when an alarm has occurred ...

Page 752: ...ems are replaced by the Alarm Log settings sampled data project file name and WindO I NV3 version Files saved to external memory are read using WindO I NV3 On the WindO I NV3 Online tab click the arrow under Upload and then click Data in external memory to display the Upload from external memory dialog box Select the Alarm Log Data check box specify the location to save the files in Path and then ...

Page 753: ...ct Name Dimmer Console V1 00 41 bytes File Type Alarm Log Data 30 bytes 2 bytes Time State Ch No Message 35 bytes 08 11 2011 14 46 12 Occurred 1 0 Voltage drop 57 bytes 08 11 2011 14 46 13 Recovered 1 0 Voltage drop 58 bytes 08 11 2011 14 46 16 Confirmed 1 0 Voltage drop 58 bytes 08 11 2011 14 47 18 Occurred 1 1 Temperature abnormal 65 bytes The data size for each row is counted as 2 bytes for ful...

Page 754: ...4 Using Data and Detected Alarms 13 34 SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual ...

Page 755: ...sampled values of devices are saved in internal memory along with the sampling time The Data Log function can perform the following functions Sample values of devices at a fixed time interval Sample values of devices when a value of device changes Output Data Log data to the external memory Chapter 14 Data Log Function 1 Overview Touch External device D100 123 D100 55 12 00 12 05 12 10 D100 0 Touc...

Page 756: ...ouch External device Internal device 124 125 126 Data Log data Sampling Time Data001 01 01 2011 12 00 30 120 01 01 2011 12 01 30 121 01 01 2011 12 02 30 122 01 01 2011 12 03 30 123 01 01 2011 12 04 30 124 01 01 2011 12 05 30 125 01 01 2011 12 06 30 126 LDR10 126 LDR11 125 LDR12 124 Copy ...

Page 757: ... newest data Touch External device 12 05 00 12 10 00 12 15 00 D100 D101 D102 20 80 2 10 70 3 30 90 1 a t a D s e c i v e D f o s e u l a V stored on the Touch Time Value Sampling Time Value 3 a t a D 2 a t a D 1 a t a D 2 0 1 D 1 0 1 D 0 0 1 D 01 01 2011 12 01 00 10 70 3 01 01 2011 12 05 00 20 80 2 01 01 2011 12 02 00 20 80 2 01 01 2011 12 10 00 10 70 3 01 01 2011 12 03 00 30 90 1 01 01 2011 12 15...

Page 758: ... is deleted in order to make room for the newest data Touch External device D100 D101 D102 20 80 2 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 a t a D s e c i v e D f o s e u l a V stored on the Touch Time Value Sampling Time Value 3 a t a D 2 a t a D 1 a t a D 2 0 1 D 1 0 1 D 0 0 1 D 01 01 2011 12 01 00 10 70 3 01 01 2011 12 05 00 20 80 2 01 01 2011 12 02 00 20 80 2 01 01 2011 12 13 00 10 70 3 01 01 2011 12 03 00 30 90 1 01...

Page 759: ...28 total for all channels For example when the amount of data for channel 1 is set to 128 this is the maximum amount total for all channels so channel 2 through 20 cannot be configured 4 Sampling time label When the sampled data is output as a CSV file this label is displayed in the label row for the sampling time column 5 Data label When the sampled data is output as a CSV file this label is disp...

Page 760: ...two devices the number of data that can be saved in the data storage area is 6 264 Deleting Data The method to delete sampled data from the data storage area is as follows On the Online tab in WindO I NV3 click the arrow under Clear and then click All or Data Log Data For details refer to Chapter 23 4 Clear on page 23 22 Press Main Menu on the Top Page in the System Mode Initial Setting Initialize...

Page 761: ... For details refer to 4 3 Saving Data as a CSV File on page 14 37 Display the data with the Numerical Input or the Numerical Display Copy the data to an internal device and display it with the Numerical Input or the Numerical Display For details refer to 4 2 Displaying Data as Numerical Values on page 14 27 Sampling Time Data001 Data002 Data003 01 01 2011 12 00 00 20 120 201 01 01 2011 12 10 00 21...

Page 762: ...onfiguring the Sampling Condition and Devices for Sampling Data 1 On the Configuration tab in the System Setup group click Data Log The Data Log Settings dialog box is displayed 2 Select the channel number to register the Data Log settings to in Settings then click Edit The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed 2 Data Log Function Configuration Procedure ...

Page 763: ...od is selected specify Time in seconds Event Bit Samples the value of source device each time the monitored bit device or bit of the word device changes from 0 to 1 If Event Bit is selected specify the device to monitor as the condition for sampling data in Device Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Ad...

Page 764: ...text to use as the label Click to open Text Manager where you can edit the text 10 Configure the details in Settings To batch register all the data settings for all data numbers click Auto To individually register the data settings for each data number select a data number and then click Edit The dialog box that corresponds to each button is displayed An example when Edit is clicked is described h...

Page 765: ...al Settings dialog box 17 Repeat steps 2 through 16 to register Data Log settings for all of the channel numbers to use 18 Specify the Data Log data storage amount per device Click for Number of Stored Data for Data Log per Device to display the Data Storage Area Management dialog box Increase the number for Number of Stored Data for Data Log per Device Click OK to close the Data Storage Area Mana...

Page 766: ...ddress Settings dialog box where you can edit the device address For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 This option can only be set when Enable is selected in Log Function The size of the data to sample is 16 bits Sampling Method Shows the condition for sampling data Double clicking the cell switches between Fixed Period Event Bit...

Page 767: ...ng Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box where you can edit the settings For details refer to 3 2 Individual Settings Dialog Box on page 14 14 This option can only be set when Enable is selected in Log Function Batch Shows the trigger device that triggers batch output when batch outputting all the data saved in the data storage area to the external memory Shows No wh...

Page 768: ...mpling data 1 to 20 Log function Selects whether or not to use the Data Log function Data Size 1 Selects the data size of the source device as 16 bit or 32 bit The value of device in the selected data size is read and saved in the data storage area Source Specifies the word device that is the source for sampling data For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Addr...

Page 769: ... data For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 This option can only be set when Event Bit or Event Word is selected Destination Device Specifies the destination word device For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Report when Sampling Count has reached or exceeded Thr...

Page 770: ...ta to the external memory The output data is stored in the following folder on the external memory External memory folder DATALOG The default External Memory Folder name is HGDATA01 For details refer to Chapter 26 1 5 Setting the External Memory Folder on page 26 12 Data that is sampled after starting output to the external memory is not included in the output data ...

Page 771: ...is stored in HMI Special Data Register LSD33 Trigger Device Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device that triggers batch output For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Data is output to file when the trigger device changes from 0 to 1 File Name Enter the file name for the output data or shows the file name The default is ...

Page 772: ...al Data Register LSD33 When the value of HMI Special Internal Relay LSM18 changes from 0 to 1 the data at that time is first output in real time to the USB flash drive and then access to the USB flash drive is stopped The text font configured for the starting device is output as the label font You can check the free space on the USB flash drive with HMI Special Data Registers LSD34 to 35 File Name...

Page 773: ...f 32 bit is selected for Data Size it is counted as 16 bit data times 2 devices so the maximum number devices that can be configured for one channel is 64 Data Size is configured with the General tab on the Individual Settings dialog box Sampling Time Specifies the label to display in the sampling time column when outputting data as CSV Text ID Specifies the Text Manager ID number 1 to 32000 when ...

Page 774: ...bers starting with the source device specified on the General tab Double clicking the cell displays the Data Settings dialog box The device cannot be edited For details refer to Auto Setup Dialog Box and Data Settings Dialog Box on page 14 21 Display Type Shows the display type for numerical values when data is output as CSV Double clicking the cell displays the Data Settings dialog box where you ...

Page 775: ... type for numerical values when data is output as CSV For details refer to Chapter 2 1 2 Available Data on page 2 2 When float32 is selected the maximum number of digits for the integer part is 10 and the number of digits for the decimal part is 5 Text ID Specifies the Text Manager ID number 1 to 32000 when text registered in Text Manager are used for labels For the Auto Setup dialog box Text ID i...

Page 776: ...isplay the data saved in the data storage area as numerical values on the Touch copy this data to the specified internal device Copy Data Log Data Select this check box to copy data to a device Destination Device Specifies the destination device for copied data You can only specify an internal device For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on p...

Page 777: ...Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Data Log data Sampling Time Value 2 Oldest Data read starting point 12 18 2011 17 44 10 20 12 18 2011 18 34 10 21 3 Specify by Value of Device read starting point source device 3 12 19 2011 19 24 43 22 12 19 2011 20 01 54 24 12 19 2011 21 39 21 26 1 Newest Data read starting point 12 20 2011 05 57 06 28 Value Uses a constant Specifies the amount to copy 1 to 64...

Page 778: ...urce device You can only specify an internal device For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 When the Sampling Time check box is selected the data number is 1 This cannot be changed End No Of the data to copy specifies the data number of the data to end copying If you select Value specify the data number 1 to 128 If you select Devic...

Page 779: ...the Line Chart 1 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Charts and then click Line Chart 2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Line Chart 3 Double click the dropped Line Chart and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 4 On the General tab select Chart Type as Log Trend Normal or Log Trend Pen Recorder 4 Using the Data ...

Page 780: ...to Ch20 for the chart selected in Settings 9 Repeat steps 6 through 8 to register the data to display in the chart 10 Click OK The Properties dialog box closes This concludes configuring the Line Chart Click Data Log Settings to display the Data Log Settings dialog box where you can configure the channel while checking the data to display Select Channel No under Settings and then click OK to close...

Page 781: ...he destination device Data Read Start Position and Copy Order of Data to the Destination Device The data to copy and the order differs according to the Starting Point and the Stored Order for Data settings Example 1 Copying three items of the newest data in the Data Log to the destination device Data Log data Sampling Time Value Destination Device Value 10 01 2011 12 01 30 20 Configured device LDR...

Page 782: ...evice LDR10 24 Copy from oldest data 1 1 R D L 26 12 19 2011 19 24 43 2 1 R D L 2 2 28 12 19 2011 20 01 54 24 Newest data read starting point 12 19 2011 21 39 21 26 12 20 2011 05 57 06 28 Amount of data 3 Item Setting Destination Device LDR10 Starting Point Specify by Value of Device value is 4 Number of Data 3 Stored Order of Data From Newest to Oldest Data Log data Sampling Time Value Destinatio...

Page 783: ... Newest Data Number of Data 2 Data Size 32 bit Stored Order of Data From Newest to Oldest Data log data Sampling Time Value Destination Device Value 12 18 2011 17 44 10 87654321 hex Configured device LDR 10 3344 Copy from newest data LDR 11 1122 2 1 R D L 7788 12 19 2011 19 24 43 12345678 hex LDR 13 5566 12 19 2011 20 01 54 55667788 hex Newest data read starting point 12 19 2011 21 39 21 11223344 ...

Page 784: ...are copied to the destination device as two items of data Item Setting Destination Device LDR10 Starting Point Newest Data Number of Data 2 Stored Order of Data From Oldest to Newest Target Data Sampling Time Value of Device Data No Start No 1 End No 3 Data Log data Sampling Time Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 10 01 2011 12 00 30 10 40 100 20 120 10 01 2011 12 34 56 100 60 240 30 200 10 02 201...

Page 785: ...mount of saved data Start No is 0 or a value larger than Data No End No is 0 or a value larger than Data No Start No is a value larger than End No Data Log data Sampling Time Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 no data 10 01 2011 12 00 30 10 40 10 01 2011 12 34 56 100 60 10 02 2011 03 45 12 200 80 Newest Data read starting point Destination Device Value Configured device LDR10 2011 Copy from oldest data LDR11 10...

Page 786: ... Numerical Display 1 On the Configuration tab in the System Setup group click Data Log The Data Log Settings dialog box is displayed 2 Click Advanced The dialog box switches to Advanced mode 3 Under Settings select the channel number for the data to display numerical values of on the Numerical Display then click Edit The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed ...

Page 787: ...ress Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 9 Select the data that is the start point for copying data in Starting Point Newest Data Set the starting point to read as the newest data Oldest Data Set the starting point to read as the oldest data Specify by Value of Device Specifies which data from the oldest dat...

Page 788: ...ying out of the data to copy with Start No If you select Value specify the data number 1 to 128 If you select Device specify the source device You can only specify an internal device Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 When the Sampling Time check box is selected the data ...

Page 789: ... where you want to place the Numerical Display 21 Double click the dropped Numerical Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed 22 Select the display type for the copied data with Display Type on the General tab 23 Select the data type for the copied data in Data Type under Data Format 24 Specify the number of digits to display in Digits under Data Format The range of digits that can be...

Page 790: ... Device specified as LDR10 LDR11 and LDR12 Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 26 Click OK The Properties dialog box closes 27 Repeat step 17 through 26 to configure the Numerical Displays for the amount of data to copy This concludes configuring the Numerical Display Touc...

Page 791: ...ata check box specify the location to save the files in Path and then click OK to be able to save the files in the specified folder Headers Project Name Project name Version number File Type Log type Blank row Channel No Channel number Source Source device Sampling Method Sampling condition type Sampling condition label Sampling condition configuration details Blank row Label row Label sampling ti...

Page 792: ...4 Using the Data 14 38 SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual ...

Page 793: ...he operation mode You can perform the following actions using the Operation Log function Record turning on the Touch power Record switching the Base Screen Record changing the user Record changing the operation mode Chapter 15 Operation Log Function 1 Overview Power ON Touch 130 Touch 12 00 Run Mode Full Tank 1 Switch to Base Screen Touch Touch 130 12 01 Base Screen 2 Base Screen 1 Touch 130 Touch...

Page 794: ...g a value to a device by pressing a touch switch Output Operation Log data to the external memory Touch 130 12 04 Press touch switch Touch 100 100 100 D1 100 Write 100 Value External device 12 05 Press touch switch 100 D1 Output to USB flash drive Operation Log data CSV USB flash drive Touch ...

Page 795: ...art Monitor on the WindO I NV3 Online tab Switched to Run Mode from Monitor Mode by clicking Stop Monitor on the WindO I NV3 Online tab Press buttons This operation is recorded by the following events Pressing a Bit Button Word Button Goto Screen Button Multi Button Selector Switch Potentiometer Numerical Input Character Input Pressing the key buttons ENT Download Project Upload Project All Chk De...

Page 796: ...Name The user name when the event occurred The user name is only recorded when the Use Security functions check box is selected on the General tab in the User Accounts dialog box 6 Screen No The screen type and number that was displayed when the event occurred Base n Base Screen n screen number Example Base 1 Popup n Popup Screen n screen number Example Popup 10 7 Event Name When the recorded data...

Page 797: ...ing the touch switch This value is handled as BIN16 For details refer to Chapter 2 1 2 Available Data on page 2 2 The value written to the device is recorded as BIN16 regardless of the data type Example When 10 0xFFF6 is written to device D0 If the written value is 2 words 32 bits each word is recorded 16 bits For the storage order for 32 bit device data the upper word and lower word are stored fo...

Page 798: ...en No Event Name Part Name Details Changed to 12 01 2011 12 00 10 Base1 Power ON 12 01 2011 12 01 23 User1 Base1 Switch to Base Screen Base2 12 01 2011 12 02 45 User1 Base2 Change Users User2 12 01 2011 12 03 06 User2 Base2 Change Operation Modes System Mode 12 01 2011 12 04 11 User2 Base2 Press buttons BitSwitch 12 01 2011 12 04 11 User2 Base2 Write Data to any Devices LDR 0 55 Operation Log data...

Page 799: ...itch to Base Screen Base2 12 01 2011 12 02 45 User1 Base2 Change Users User2 12 01 2011 12 03 06 User2 Base2 Change Operation Modes System Mode 12 01 2011 12 04 11 User2 Base2 Press buttons BitSwitch 12 01 2011 12 04 11 User2 Base2 Write Data to any Devices LDR 0 55 Operation Log data CSV Book1 Sheet1 Sheet2 Sheet3 Sampling Time User Screen No Event Name Part Name Details Changed to 12 01 2011 12 ...

Page 800: ...when the Touch power is turned on Time screen number event name Switch to Base Screen The following items are recorded when the Base Screen is switched Time user name screen number event name changed to Change Users The following items are recorded when the user is changed Time user name screen number event name changed to Change Operation Modes The following items are recorded when the operation ...

Page 801: ...ed Data for Operation Log and then click OK The Data Storage Area Management dialog box closes 5 Select the condition to record events in Trigger condition Always Always records events Device Records events when the specified device is 1 You can only specify an internal device For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 6 Click OK The ...

Page 802: ...me user name screen number event name changed to Change Users The following items are recorded when the user is changed Time user name screen number event name changed to Change Operation Modes The following items are recorded when the operation mode is changed Time user name screen number event name changed to Press buttons The following items are recorded when a touch switch is pressed Time user...

Page 803: ...ress Settings on page 2 62 Report when Number of Stored Data has reached or exceeded Threshold 1 Writes 1 to the report device when the current amount of data reaches or exceeds the set threshold Threshold 1 Specifies the amount of data 1 to 3579 that is the basis for reporting Report Device 1 Specifies the destination bit device or the bit of the destination word device For the device address con...

Page 804: ...1 to 32000 when using text registered in Text Manager as the label This option is only enabled if you select the Use Text Manager check box Sampling Time The label for the column to display the time the event occurred User Name The label for the column to display the user name when the event occurred Screen No The label for the column to display the screen type and number that was displayed when t...

Page 805: ...hen the Use Text Manager check box is cleared Text ID Double click the cell to specify the Text Manager ID number 1 to 32000 when using text registered in Text Manager as the event name This option is only enabled if you select the Use Text Manager check box Power ON The event name when the Touch power is turned on Switch to Base Screens The event name when the base screen is switched Change Users...

Page 806: ... data to the external memory The output data is stored in the following folder on the external memory External memory folder OPERATIONLOG The default External Memory Folder name is HGDATA01 For details refer to Chapter 26 1 5 Setting the External Memory Folder on page 26 12 Data recorded after starting output to the external memory is not included in the output data ...

Page 807: ... User2 Base2 Switch to Base Screen Base3 Output stops if there is insufficient free space on the external memory USB flash drive error information is stored in HMI Special Data Register LSD33 Trigger Device Specifies the bit device that triggers batch output For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Data is output to file when the tr...

Page 808: ...when the file size of the Operation Log data exceeds 256 MB or when there is insufficient space on the external memory USB flash drive error information is stored in HMI Special Data Register LSD33 When the value of HMI Special Internal Relay LSM18 changes from 0 to 1 the data at that time is first output in real time to the USB flash drive and then access to the USB flash drive is stopped You can...

Page 809: ...display the Upload from external memory dialog box Select the Operation Log Data check box specify the location to save the files in Path and then click OK to be able to save the files in the specified folder Headers Project Name Project name Version number File Type Log type Blank row Label row Sampling Time User Name Screen No Event Name Part Name Device Address Changed to Data row MM DD YYYY HH...

Page 810: ...4 Using the Data 15 18 SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual ...

Page 811: ... be saved in the data storage area Alarm Log data F Chapter 13 Alarm Log Function on page 13 1 Data Log data F Chapter 14 Data Log Function on page 14 1 Operation Log data F Chapter 15 Operation Log Function on page 15 1 Chapter 16 Data Storage Area 1 Overview When there is no remaining battery power the data in the data storage area is erased when the Touch is turned off If you download the proje...

Page 812: ...d Number of Addresses The minimum and maximum amount of data storage and the minimum and maximum number of addresses that can be configured for the data storage area is as follows Alarm Log data Operation Log data Data Log data HMI Keep Registers LKR HMI Keep Relays LK Free space Data storage area 102 400 bytes Data type Minimum Maximum Number of Stored Data for Alarm Log 0 5 011 Number of Stored ...

Page 813: ...011 3 Specify the amount of Operation Log data to save in the data storage area in Number of Stored Data for Operation Log 0 to 3579 4 Specify the amount of Data Log data per device to save in the data storage area in Number of Stored Data for Data Log per Device 0 to 12528 5 Specify the number of HMI Keep Register LKR addresses in Number of HMI Keep Register LKR 1024 to 8192 6 Specify the number ...

Page 814: ...e Individual Settings dialog box for Alarm Log Settings Number of Stored Data for Operation Log Specifies the amount of Operation Log data to save in the data storage area 0 to 3579 Number of Stored Data for Data Log per Device Specifies the amount of Data Log data per device to save in the data storage area 0 to 12528 Data Log data is only saved in the data storage area when Enable is selected un...

Page 815: ...r devices that turn on lighting or warning lights and count the operation time Report the replacement time for lighting and warning lights by the counted operation time Monitor devices connected to buttons and relays and count the operation count Report the inspection time for buttons and relays by the counted operation count Chapter 17 Preventive Maintenance Function 1 Overview Lighting Warning l...

Page 816: ... When the value of Monitor Device changes from 0 to 1 1 is added to the value of device Operation Count Device configured in Measure Operation Count The counted operation count is written to the device configured in Measure Operation Count Example When the value of Monitor Device M0 changes from 0 to 1 1 is added to the value of Operation Count Device LKR0 3 sec 1 sec 1 sec 1 sec 3 4 sec 1 sec 1 s...

Page 817: ...red device when the operation time and operation count reach the threshold Example When the value of Operation Time Device LKR0 reaches the threshold set for level 1 through level 3 1 is written to the Report Device configured for each level LM1 through LM3 Level Threshold Report Device Level 1 10 LM1 Level 2 15 LM2 Level 3 20 LM3 1 0 1 0 1 0 Value of Operation Time Device LKR0 Value of Report Dev...

Page 818: ... Items 3 Select the item to display in Settings with Display Options Select Operation Time Operation Count The Operation Time and Operation Count settings are displayed in Settings 4 Select the number to register the Preventive Maintenance settings to in Settings then click Edit The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed 5 Specify the bit device or bit of the word device to monitor with Monit...

Page 819: ... are not counting the operation count leave the Measure Operation Count check box cleared and proceed to step 13 11 Specify the destination device for the counted operation count You can only specify an HMI Keep Register LKR Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 12 Select th...

Page 820: ...ettings to manage Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box For details refer to 3 2 Individual Settings Dialog Box on page 17 8 Monitor Device Shows the bit device or bit of the word device to count the operation time or operation count Double clicking the cell displays the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapte...

Page 821: ...Operation Count is selected in Display Options Operation Count Device Shows the destination device for the counted operation count You can only specify an HMI Keep Register LKR Double clicking the cell displays the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 This option is only displayed when Operatio...

Page 822: ...ices configured by Number of Items in the Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box Monitor Device Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to count the operation time or operation count Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Operation Time Device Specifies the des...

Page 823: ... bit of the word device for reporting when the operation time reaches or exceeds the level 2 threshold Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Threshold Specifies the time as a constant or a device that is the criterion for reporting at level 3 For a constant the range that ca...

Page 824: ...ay the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Threshold Specifies the count as a constant or a device that is the criterion for reporting at level 2 For a constant the range that can be set varies based on the data type For a device click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the ...

Page 825: ...gs dialog box is displayed 2 Specify the number of devices to monitor in Number of Items 3 Select the item to display in Settings with Display Options Select Operation Count Operation count settings are displayed in Settings 4 Select the number to register the Preventive Maintenance settings to in Settings then click Edit The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed 5 Specify the bit device or ...

Page 826: ... counted operation count 8 Select the data type for the value of the Measure Operation Count device from Data Type 9 On the Home tab in the Parts group click Data Displays and then click Numerical Display 10 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Numerical Display 11 Double click the dropped Numerical Display and the Properties dialog box is displayed ...

Page 827: ...Settings dialog box 14 Specify Digits for the value to display The digits that can be set varies based on the display type or data type 15 Under Display Method in Display Device specify the destination device for the counted operation count Select the same device as the device configured with Measure Operation Count on the Operation Count tab in the Preventive Maintenance settings Individual Setti...

Page 828: ... of devices to monitor in Number of Items 3 Select the number to register the Preventive Maintenance settings to in Settings then click Edit The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed 4 Specify the bit device or bit of the word device to monitor with Monitor Device 5 Select the Measure Operation Time check box on the Operation Time tab and specify the destination device for the counted operat...

Page 829: ...ify the threshold as a value of device Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 10 Configure Report Device for level 1 Specify the bit device or bit of the word device for reporting when the threshold is reached or exceeded Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog bo...

Page 830: ...l 1 Report Device to and then click Edit The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed 16 Specify the Level 1 Report Device in Source and select No Store under Data Set Source to the Level 1 Report Device configured on the Operation Time tab in the Preventive Maintenance settings Individual Settings dialog box 17 Select Enable under Alarm function select NO under NO NC and then click OK ...

Page 831: ...used channel numbers to Disable in the Alarm Log Settings dialog box Select all the unused channels and then click Edit To select multiple channels press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific them The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed Under Channel Settings in Alarm function select Disable and then click OK ...

Page 832: ...Options tab in the Alarm Log Settings dialog box 20 Select the Trigger Buzzer when Alarm occurs check box 21 Click OK The Alarm Log Settings dialog box closes This concludes the configuration to notify with a beep when the counted operation time reaches the threshold ...

Page 833: ...tions Batch write the recipe values saved in internal memory to devices when a value of device changes from 0 to 1 Batch write the recipe values saved on the external memory to devices when a value of device changes from 0 to 1 Batch read value of a device and save them to the external memory as a recipe file when a value of device changes from 0 to 1 Chapter 18 Recipe Function 1 Overview External...

Page 834: ...ction is based on the starting device address for the amount of data selected Example When the Top Device is D100 and the Number of Data is 10 D100 value 1111 D101 value 2222 D102 value 3333 D103 value 4444 D104 value 5555 D105 value 6666 D106 value 7777 D107 value 8888 D108 value 9999 D109 value 11111 ...

Page 835: ...dress of the destination devices for recipe values and the source devices for values of devices 5 Data The values to write to the devices DWD 7RS HYLFH 1XPEHU RI EORFNV KDQQHO WR 1XPEHU RI DWD Recipe settings Data for recipes If there are many word devices for the data for the recipe it will take time to read and write them For example when using the Recipe function to configure initial values if ...

Page 836: ...eration using the data for the recipe is configured in blocks 0 to 64 One channel is used for one item of data for the recipe One block is 16 channels The maximum number of blocks that can be configured is 64 blocks The maximum number of devices that can be configured for one channel is 8 192 devices 3 Select the number of the data for the recipe to configure in Settings and then click Edit The In...

Page 837: ... recipe file specify the number of source devices The sequential device addresses from the starting address for the number of configured devices is displayed in Data List on the Data tab The amount of data that can be set varies based on the data type When BIN16 BIN16 or BCD4 is selected for Data Type up to 8 192 items of data can be configured When BIN32 BIN32 or BCD8 is selected up to 4 096 item...

Page 838: ...etting This option is set by block Read Write Save batch read values of devices to the external memory as a recipe file or write them to devices as recipe values This option can only be configured when External Memory is selected under Access to Read only Save batch read values of devices to the external memory as a recipe file This option can only be configured when External Memory is selected un...

Page 839: ...configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 This option can only be configured when Read Write or Write only is selected under Trigger Setting 18 Click OK to close the Individual Settings dialog box 19 Repeat steps 3 through 18 to register data for the recipe to all the used channels 20 Click OK The Recipe Settings dialog box closes For details on how to cre...

Page 840: ...mory and External Memory Trigger Setting Shows the operation using the data for the recipe When External Memory is selected for Access to double clicking the cell switches between Write only Read Write and Read only Shows Write only when Internal Memory is selected for Access to Read Trigger Shows the device that triggers saving the recipe file Double clicking the cell displays the Device Address ...

Page 841: ...e devices for values of devices Double clicking the cell displays the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 This option can only be configured when Recipe function is Enable Data Type Shows the data type of the source or destination values of devices Double clicking the cell displays the Individ...

Page 842: ...xternal memory Requires an external memory with a saved recipe file For details refer to 4 2 Creating Recipe Files on page 18 17 Internal Memory Uses recipe data saved to internal memory Since recipe data is handled as a portion of project data it may put pressure on the volume of project data that can be downloaded One item of recipe data uses two bytes when the top device data type is 16 bits an...

Page 843: ...d on the General tab in the Alarm Log Settings dialog box Each bit of the word device configured by the read trigger corresponds to a channel When a bit changes from 0 to 1 a read to the device is executed Example When the block 1 read trigger is specified as LDR0000 LDR0000 0 corresponds to channel 1 0 LDR0000 1 to channel 1 1 through to LDR0000 15 which corresponds to channel 1 15 bit bit Channe...

Page 844: ...pe Selects the type of data for recipe values to write and values of devices that are read For details refer to Chapter 2 1 2 Available Data on page 2 2 Number of Data Specifies the number of source or destination devices starting with the device address configured by Top Device The sequential device addresses from the starting address for the number of configured devices is displayed in Data List...

Page 845: ... and then click Save to save the recipe file for the selected channel The saved recipe file can be edited using Notepad commercially available text editors and spreadsheet software Block No Shows the block number for the channel selected in Settings Channel No Shows the channel number for the channel selected in Settings No Shows the data numbers for the amount of data specified by Number of Data ...

Page 846: ...rt a recipe file back into WindO I NV3 1 On the Configuration tab in the System Setup group click Recipe The Recipe Settings dialog box is displayed 2 Select the channel number to export its recipe data in Settings and then click Edit The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed 3 Click the Data tab and then click Export The Save As dialog box is displayed 4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recip...

Page 847: ...ile name specified on the Block tab in the Individual Settings dialog box is entered in File name 5 Open the exported recipe data file Use Notepad a commercially available text editor or spreadsheet software 6 Edit the values and save the file 7 Return to the Data tab in the Individual Settings dialog box and then click Import The Open dialog box is displayed ...

Page 848: ... 18 16 SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual 8 Specify the file and then click Open The recipe data is imported 9 Click OK The Individual Settings dialog box closes 10 Click OK The Recipe Settings dialog box closes This concludes editing recipe data ...

Page 849: ...Creating Recipe Files in the Recipe Settings Dialog Box on page 18 17 F Creating Recipe Files when Downloading Project Data on page 18 19 F Creating Recipe Files with a Text Editor on page 18 20 Creating Recipe Files in the Recipe Settings Dialog Box 1 Insert a USB flash drive in the computer 2 On the Configuration tab in the System Setup group click Recipe The Recipe Settings dialog box is displa...

Page 850: ...rk External Memory Folder Specifies the folder to save the created recipe file Click to display the Project Settings dialog box You can specify the External Memory Folder used as the save destination 5 Click OK The Recipe Settings dialog box closes The RECIPE folder is created in the External Memory Folder used as the save destination and the recipe files for the channels configured with Access to...

Page 851: ... to Enable in the Recipe Settings dialog box 1 Insert a USB flash drive into the Touch 2 On the Home tab in the Project group click the Download icon The Download dialog box is displayed If the project data was changed a confirmation message to save the project data is displayed Click OK to save the project data and display the Download dialog box Click Cancel to stop to save the project data 3 Se...

Page 852: ...a Text Editor You can edit recipe files using Notepad commercially available text editors or spreadsheet software 1 Write the data for the amount of data in value of device comma new line order If the amount of data in the recipe file is lower than the amount of data for the top device configured on the Channel tab in the Individual Settings dialog box 0 is written in the rest of the devices 2 Sav...

Page 853: ... the external memory as a recipe file on a computer USB flash drive Book1 Recipe File 100 150 200 You can upload recipe files from the external memory using WindO I NV3 On the WindO I NV3 Online tab click the arrow under Upload and then click Stored Data in External Memory to display the Upload Data from External Memory dialog box Select the Recipe Files check box specify the location to save the ...

Page 854: ...ethods to delete recipe files saved on the external memory are as follows To delete files with WindO I NV3 on the Online tab in the Touch group click Clear and then click Stored Data in External Memory to display the Clear Data in external memory dialog box Select the Recipe Files check box and then click OK ...

Page 855: ... text is loaded and displayed when displaying parts and screens The text can be managed collectively including editing the registered text and adding or deleting text Text groups can perform the following functions Switch the displayed language by value of device Use common text for parts Chapter 19 Text Group 1 Overview External device Touch 目標達成 D100 1 D100 2 D100 3 Text ID 1 目標達成 Group 1 Englis...

Page 856: ...ssage Title Numerical Display Unit Charts Bar Chart X axis and Y axis scale labels Line Chart X axis and Y axis scale labels Alarm Log Messages displayed in data output as CSV Data Log Labels displayed in data output as CSV Operation Log Recorded item labels and event names displayed in data output as CSV When the text group is switched the displayed Base Screen is reset Popup Screens and internal...

Page 857: ...b in the System Setup group click Text Group The Text Group Settings dialog box is displayed 2 In Number of Text Groups specify the number of text groups to create 1 to 16 The configured number of text groups are enabled 3 Under Text Group Name enter the name for each text group The maximum number for the Text Group name is 20 characters For one text group proceed to step 7 2 Text Groups and Text ...

Page 858: ... switch the text group Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 These options can only be configured when Number of Text Groups is specified as two or more 7 Click OK to close the Text Group Settings dialog box This concludes creating text groups When the value of device is 0 t...

Page 859: ...r to register 1 to 32 000 4 With Font under Text Attribute select the font to use for the text to register from the following European Japanese Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central European Baltic Cyrillic Windows 5 With Text Color under Text Attribute select the color of the text to register color 256 colors monochrome 8 shades Click Color to display the Color Palette Select a color from the Color Pa...

Page 860: ...he text is registered and displayed in the text list 8 Repeat steps 2 through 7 to create the necessary text in each text group 9 Click Close A save confirmation message is displayed 10 Click OK The confirmation message and Text Manager close This concludes registering text You can enter multi line text by inserting a newline The newline is displayed as n and is counted as two characters To enter ...

Page 861: ...t file This file is called a text list 1 On the View tab in the Workspace group click Text Manager Text Manager is displayed 2 With Text Group select the text group where the text ID to save is registered For one text group proceed to step 3 3 Click Export The Save As dialog box is displayed 4 Select Save in enter File name and then click Save 5 Click Close to close Text Manager This concludes sav...

Page 862: ...n be imported into Text Manager for the project being edited 1 On the View tab in the Workspace group click Text Manager Text Manager is displayed 2 With Text Group select the text group to register the imported text to For one text group proceed to step 3 3 Click Import The Text Message List dialog box is displayed 4 Click List File The Open dialog box is displayed ...

Page 863: ...rwrite the text with the ID number displayed in the confirmation message Click Yes To All to overwrite all the text Click No to display the next confirmation message without overwriting the text with the ID number displayed in the confirmation message Click Cancel to stop importing text 8 Click Close in Text Manager A save confirmation message is displayed 9 Click OK The confirmation message and T...

Page 864: ...der Text Group Name enter English for Group 1 Chinese for Group 2 and Japanese for Group 3 Select the Use Dynamic Text check box and set Trigger Device to D100 2 Following the steps in Registering Text on page 19 5 register the text 3 Create a Bit Button On the Home tab in the Parts group click Buttons and then click Bit Button 4 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Bit But...

Page 865: ...ration Text tab 7 Select the Use Text Manager check box 8 Specify 1 for the Text ID under OFF 9 Configure the settings on each tab as necessary and then click OK The Properties of Bit Button dialog box closes 10 Repeat steps 3 through 9 and create a Bit Button to use text ID 2 for the registration text This concludes configuring the settings to switch the displayed language by a value of device ...

Page 866: ...create the groups in the Text Group Settings dialog box Click to display the Text Group Settings dialog box For details refer to Text Group Settings Dialog Box on page 19 15 Text Attribute This area configures the text to register and the font and color for the text 3 Text Manager Font Selects the font used for displaying text from the following European Japanese Chinese Taiwanese Korean Central E...

Page 867: ...t but are not used in the project This can decrease the amount of project data and reduce the amount of internal memory used on the Touch Find Displays the Find dialog box The text entered in Find what is searched for in Message in the Text Messages List Windows Font Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font Select Windows using Font to display the current setting To change the setting click Ch...

Page 868: ...other text groups that text is displayed in this list Select Closes Text Manager and sets the ID number selected in Text Manager Text Messages List in the dialog box or screen that opened Text Manager This button is only enabled when Text Manager was called from the properties dialog box of an object Close Closes Text Manager When Replace is clicked after selecting a range of text it will only sea...

Page 869: ...en the Touch power is turned on and when switching to run mode Use Dynamic Text Select this check box to switch the text group according to the value of device Specify the word device to use as the condition to switch the text group Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Thes...

Page 870: ...3 Text Manager 19 16 SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual ...

Page 871: ...ion which apply a heavy load on the external device by processing it with a script on the Touch Chapter 20 Script 1 About the Script Function LM100 LM101 By using the Script Editor conditional expressions operators and functions can be described by selecting them from a list and an error in the script can also be determined The script can also be exported as a text file so the script can be edited...

Page 872: ...o a project For details about setup refer to 3 Global Script on page 20 12 Trigger condition of the script Trigger conditions that can be set for the script are as follows Rising edge Script is executed when trigger device changes from 0 to 1 Falling edge Script is executed when trigger device changes from 1 to 0 Satisfy the condition Script is executed when the set condition is met This can only ...

Page 873: ... on page 20 8 Types of the data type Required word count Range that can be processed BIN16 1 0 to 65535 BIN16 1 32768 to 32767 BIN32 2 0 to 4294967295 BIN32 2 2147483648 to 2147483647 BCD4 1 999 to 9999 BCD8 2 9999999 to 99999999 float32 2 3 4 1038 to 1 18 10 38 0 1 18 10 38 to 3 4 1038 There are functions that cannot be used when the data types are different Please refer to the format list F For ...

Page 874: ...erformed with the Global Script Parameter error Value out of range was specified as argument for LINE function RECTANGLE function or CIRCLE function Category Storage location Stored value Existence of a script error Bit 10 of the System Area address 2 0 No error 1 Error Script ID of the script with an error HMI Special Data Register LSD52 1 to 32 000 Script ID Types of script errors HMI Special Da...

Page 875: ...script and register it in the project The registered script can be used in a Multi Button Script Command Multi Command and Global Script 1 On the View tab in the Workspace group click Script Manager Script Manager opens 2 Click Add Script Editor opens 3 Specify Script ID When creating a new script enter the script ID 1 to 32000 2 Editing and Management of the Script ...

Page 876: ...he types of data being used within the script For example if the script contains numbers with decimals the Data Type of the script would be float32 If the script contains only whole numbers between 0 and 65535 the Data Type of the script would be BIN16 To create a script using the samples provided by WindO I NV3 under Function List select Category and Function and then click Insert Format The samp...

Page 877: ... in the script list If a script is used in a project or parts it cannot be deleted Reduce Deletes the scripts that are registered in the script list but are not used in the project Select The highlighted script in the script list is selected and Script Manager is closed Close Closes Script Manager Script ID Displays the script ID 1 to 32 000 of the registered scripts Error OK is displayed when the...

Page 878: ... maximum number for script name is 40 characters Data Type Select the data type to be processed by the script For details about the data type refer to 1 3 Data Type of the Script on page 20 3 Script Enter the script Single script limitation is 240 characters per line with up to 1024 lines Error Check The script being edited is checked for errors Import The Open dialog box is displayed By selecting...

Page 879: ...layed Text entered in Find what will be replaced with the text entered in Replace with Show Hide Function List Switches between showing and not showing the Function List and Script Compilation Output Cursor Displays the current position of the cursor in the Script text box by line number and column number When Find is clicked after selecting a range in the Script text box it will only search withi...

Page 880: ...he functions of the selected category Format Displays the definition example of the selected function Description Displays the description of the selected function Insert Format Contents displayed in the selected Format are inserted at the cursor position Insert Device The Device Address Settings box is displayed By specifying the device address and clicking on OK specified device address is inser...

Page 881: ... entered or selected Size The font size dots for the text displayed in the Script is entered or selected Sample Displays a sample of the text with the Font and Size as specified in the Script text box Tab indent Specify the position of the indent when a tab is inserted 1 to 20 Color Displays each of the text colors for Comment Keyword and Device The Color dialog box is displayed when the color but...

Page 882: ...ck General tab and Trigger Condition tab Set or confirm the items displayed in each of the tabs General Tab Use Global Script To use the Global Script select the Use Global Script check box Script ID Specify the script ID 1 to 32 000 of the script to operate Script Manager is displayed when is clicked The script can be selected from the script list of Script Manager For details refer to 2 2 Script...

Page 883: ...when Rising edge or Falling edge is selected in Trigger Type Period sec Specify the scan frequency in seconds 1 to 3 600 This is enabled only when Fixed Period is selected in Trigger Type Rising edge Script is executed when trigger device changes from 0 to 1 Falling edge Script is executed when trigger device changes from 1 to 0 Always ON Script is executed constantly Fixed Period Script is execut...

Page 884: ...s determined if conditional expression 1 is not satisfied and execution line 2 is executed if conditional expression 2 is satisfied Execution line 3 is executed if conditional expression 2 is not satisfied too switch case default switch case constant 1 break case constant2 break default break Execution line 1 is executed if the value of conditional expression matches constant 1 Execution line 2 is...

Page 885: ...e 3 is executed break switch case constant 1 break case constant 2 break When the conditional expression 2 matches the constant 1 it will halt the determination of constant 2 by break after executing execution line 1 and process will move to execution line 3 return return It will exit the script and execute the next parts or script Operator Format Description Compares if is equal to Compares if is...

Page 886: ...32 BIN32 BCD4 and BCD8 Shifts each bit of to right for bit s This can only be used for data types BIN16 BIN16 BIN32 BIN32 BCD4 and BCD8 Function Format Description Bit set SET Turns bit device to 1 It will be same result as 1 Bit reset RST Turns bit device to 0 It will be same result as 0 Bit reverse REV Reverses the 1 and 0 of bit device It will be same result as Function Format Description Maxim...

Page 887: ...pe float32 Conversion from Angle to Radian RAD Value of is converted from degree to radian and the value is returned This can only be used for data type float32 Conversion from Radian to Angle DEG Value of is converted from radian to degree and the value is returned This can only be used for data type float32 Function Format Description Conversion from BCD to Binary BCD2BIN BCD value of is returne...

Page 888: ...sed from the starting bit device as one word This can only be used in control functions Bit device 1 word length to Word device BITS2WORD Starting device of copy target bit device Starting device of copy source word device Copies one word worth of data from to 16 bits are processed from the starting bit device as one word This can only be used in control functions Word device to Bit device 1 word ...

Page 889: ...is drawn Start coordinate X Start coordinate Y End coordinate X End coordinate Y Line width Line type Foreground color Background color Pattern Rounded corner type Rounded corner radius Line width Line type Foreground color Background color Pattern Rounded corner type Rounded corner radius can be omitted Specification of Line width is as follows It will be set to 1 1 dot when omitted Specification...

Page 890: ...cification of Pattern is as follows It will be set to 0 none when omitted CIRCLE Function Format Description Indirect specification OFFSET Reference device Device to store the indirect value 0 to 32767 Specify the device words from Indirect read Specify OFFSET function to the right of the assignment statement Format example OFFSET Operation Stores the value of device in words from into Indirect wr...

Page 891: ... defined with a single byte Double byte characters can be used after Definition of comment Sample definition 1234 Define the numeric value directly 1234 Define the negative number with a minus symbol at the beginning 12 34 Decimal number can be defined for real numbers float32 Define a period between the whole numbers and decimal numbers 0x12AB Define 0 zero and x lower case x at the beginning of ...

Page 892: ... then 100 is stored in LDR200 Script Operation description If the value of LM100 is not 0 then LDR300 LDR400 and LDR500 are added and that value is stored in LDR200 Script Operation description If the value of LDR100 is not 0 and the value of LDR200 is also not 0 then 0x1234 is stored in LDR300 If the value of LDR100 is not 0 and the value of LDR200 is 0 then nothing is executed If the value of LD...

Page 893: ...t 0 or 1 then 0x9999 is stored in LDR200 Script Operation description If the values of LDR100 LDR200 and LDR300 are all not 0 then 100 is stored in LDR400 If the values of LDR100 and LDR200 are not 0 and the value of LDR300 is 0 then 200 is stored in LDR400 If either the value of LDR100 or LDR200 is 0 then nothing is executed regardless of the value of LDR300 Example 5 1 4 Conditional branching if...

Page 894: ... while statement repeats Inside the while statement if the values of LDR200 and LDR300 are equal the while statement will terminate and after LM 0 changes to 1 execution breaks out of the while statement In the script example above the values of LDR200 and LDR300 are equal when the while statement repeats twice and after LM0 changes to 1 execution breaks out of the while statement loop After execu...

Page 895: ... is added to the value of the indirect value LDR0 so that it becomes 2 Repeats in this manner for the third to ninth iterations Tenth iteration loop The value of LDR0 is 9 so the condition LDR 0 10 is true and the statements inside while are executed The value of LDR19 9 words from LDR10 is stored in LDR109 9 words from LDR100 1 is added to the value of the indirect value LDR0 so that it becomes 1...

Page 896: ... Decimal to octal conversion using a while statement Convert a decimal value to octal For example convert 10 dec to 12 oct 16 dec to 20 oct Convert a value to octal up to 4 digits max 1 0 while counter 2 LDR 100 gets original data 3 1 decimal base 4 0 calculation results repeat four times while 1 4 Extract 1st octal digit from original data Store working result in 10 10 2 8 Convert the extracted r...

Page 897: ...ration description If the value of LDR100 is not 0x1234 then 0 is stored in LDR300 If the value of LDR100 is 0x1234 then 0x5678 is stored in LDR200 and the script terminates The return statement does not break out of a function like the break statement it terminates the script and executes the next part or script Example 5 1 11 Conditional branching with switch switch LDR 100 case 10 LDR 200 0x123...

Page 898: ...5 the value of LDR300 is 5 and the value of LM0 is 1 5 2 Relational Operators Script Operation description If the value of LDR100 is equal to the value of LDR200 then 0x100 is stored in LDR300 Script Operation description If the value of LDR100 is not equal to the value of LDR200 then 0x100 is stored in LDR300 Script Operation description If the value of LDR100 is less than the value of LDR200 the...

Page 899: ...ion If the value of LDR100 is greater than the value of LDR200 then 0x100 is stored in LDR300 Script Operation description If the value of LDR100 is greater than or equal to the value of LDR200 then 0x100 is stored in LDR300 Example 5 2 4 Less than or equal to if LDR 100 LDR 200 LDR 300 0xl00 Example 5 2 5 Greater than if LDR 100 LDR 200 LDR 300 0xl00 Example 5 2 6 Greater than or equal to if LDR ...

Page 900: ... of LDR100 is not 0 or the value of LDR200 is not 0 then 100 is stored in LDR300 If either is true the processing in the brackets is executed Script Operation description If the value of LDR100 is not equal to 0x1234 then 100 is stored in LDR300 Script Operation description If the value of LDR100 is 0 then 100 is stored in LDR300 This is the same as the code if 0 LDR 100 Example 5 3 1 Logical AND ...

Page 901: ...alues of LDR100 and LDR200 are multiplied together and the result is stored in LDR300 Script Operation description The value of LDR100 is divided into the value of LDR200 and the result is stored in LDR300 Script Operation description The value of LDR100 is divided into the value of LDR200 and the remainder is stored in LDR300 Example 5 4 1 Addition LDR 300 LDR 100 LDR 200 Example 5 4 2 Subtractio...

Page 902: ...the values of LM100 and LM101 is 1 LM200 changes to 1 If the bitwise logical OR operation on the values of LM100 and LM101 is 0 LM200 changes to 0 The operation is the same as the following ladder diagram Script Operation description The logical XOR operation on the value of LDR100 and each bit in 0xFF is stored in LDR200 For example if the value of LDR100 is 15 0x0F then LDR200 is 240 0xF0 Exampl...

Page 903: ...s to 0 The operation is the same as the following ladder diagram Script Operation description The value of LDR100 is shifted left by only the amount of the value of LDR200 and the result is stored in LDR300 For example if the value of LDR100 is 1 and the value of LDR200 is 3 1 is shifted 3 bits to the left and the result 8 is stored in LDR300 Script Operation description The value of LDR100 is shi...

Page 904: ... to 1 The result is the same as LM 100 1 Script Operation description Turns LM100 to 0 The result is the same as LM 100 0 Script Operation description Flips LM100 1 and 0 The result is the same as LM 100 LM 100 Example 5 6 1 Set a bit SET LM 100 Example 5 6 2 Reset a bit RST LM 100 Example 5 6 3 Invert a bit REV LM 100 ...

Page 905: ...ogarithm of the value of D20 and the result is stored in D10 Only the data type float32 can be used Script Operation description Calculates the logarithm of the value of D20 with 10 as the base and the result is stored in D10 Only the data type float32 can be used Script Operation description Calculates the power of a value For example when the value of D20 is 10 and the value of D30 is 5 the func...

Page 906: ... can be used Script Operation description Calculates the tangent of the radian value of D20 and stores the result in D10 Only the data type float32 can be used Script Operation description Calculates the arcsine of the value of D20 and stores the result as radians in D10 Only the data type float32 can be used Script Operation description Calculates the arccosine of the value of D20 and stores the ...

Page 907: ...peration description Converts the value of D20 from degrees to radians and stores the result in D10 Only the data type float32 can be used Script Operation description Converts the value of D20 from radians to degrees and stores the result in D10 Only the data type float32 can be used Example 5 7 13 Arctangent D 10 ATAN D 20 Example 5 7 14 Convert angle to radians D 10 RAD D 20 Example 5 7 15 Conv...

Page 908: ...tores it in LDR200 For example if the float value 1234 0x449A4000 as a binary value is stored in LDR100 1234 binary value is stored in LDR200 If the float value 1234 56 0x449A51EC as a binary value is stored in LDR100 the value after the decimal point is discarded and 1234 binary value is stored in LDR200 Script Operation description Converts the binary value in LDR100 to a float value and stores ...

Page 909: ...tes are stored in the reverse of the following explanation For details refer to Chapter 3 3 1 System Tab on page 3 19 A NULL terminating character 0x00 is added to the end of the string Device Stored value Device Stored value Upper byte Lower byte LDR200 1234 LDR100 1 0x31 2 0x32 LDR101 3 0x33 4 0x34 LDR102 0x00 0x00 Terminating character Device Stored value Device Stored value Upper byte Lower by...

Page 910: ...functions that handle strings check the Storage Method of string data setting on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box Depending on the setting the upper and lower bytes are stored in the reverse of the following explanation For details refer to Chapter 3 3 1 System Tab on page 3 19 Device Stored value Upper byte Lower byte Device Stored value LDR200 1 0x31 2 0x32 LDR100 1234 LDR201 3 ...

Page 911: ...y equal 1 is stored in LDR0 If even a single one is not equal 0 is stored Example 5 7 22 Word unit data comparison LDR 0 MEMCMP LDR 100 LDR 200 10 LDR100 LDR101 LDR102 LDR108 LDR109 LDR200 LDR201 LDR202 LDR208 LDR209 Compare each LDR107 LDR207 Even if the data type is set to BIN32 BIN32 BCD8 or float32 the comparison is performed from the starting device in word units Example 5 7 23 Bit unit data ...

Page 912: ...Example 5 7 24 Word unit data copy MEMCPY LDR 100 LDR 200 10 LDR100 LDR101 LDR102 LDR108 LDR109 LDR200 LDR201 LDR202 LDR208 LDR209 Copy each LDR107 LDR207 Even if the data type is set to BIN32 BIN32 BCD8 or float32 the data is copied from the starting device in word units Example 5 7 25 Bit unit data copy MEMCPY LM 0 LDR 100 2 10 3rd bit of LDR100 3rd bit of LDR101 3rd bit of LDR102 3rd bit of LDR...

Page 913: ... as BITS2BITS I004 D0000 0 Script Operation description The value of device D0100 is copied to the bit states of a value of 1 word length from M0000 M0000 to M0017 This is the same as BITS2BITS D1000 0 M0000 1 Control function only Example 5 7 27 Copy 1 word from bit devices to a word device 1 BITS2WORD I004 D0000 Example 5 7 28 Copy 1 word from a word device to bit devices 1 WORD2BITS D0100 M0000...

Page 914: ... 127 the character count can be specified in the range from 1 to 128 STRUCT LDR 100 LDR 200 1 4 Device Stored value Start position Character count Device Stored value LDR200 Upper byte A 0x41 0 LDR100 Upper byte C 0x43 Lower byte B 0x42 1 Lower byte D 0x44 LDR201 Upper byte C 0x43 2 LDR101 Upper byte E 0x45 Lower byte D 0x44 3 Lower byte 0x00 Terminating character LDR202 Upper byte E 0x45 4 Lower ...

Page 915: ... end of the string The terminating character is not included in the string length Device Stored value Device Stored value LDR200 Upper byte A 0x41 LDR100 7 Lower byte B 0x42 LDR201 Upper byte C 0x43 Lower byte D 0x44 LDR202 Upper byte E 0x45 Lower byte F 0x46 LDR203 Upper byte G 0x47 Lower byte 0x00 Device Stored value Device Stored value LDR200 Upper byte A 0x41 LDR100 3 Lower byte B 0x42 LDR201 ...

Page 916: ...s not included in the string length Device Stored value Device Stored value LDR100 Upper byte A 0x41 LDR100 Upper byte A 0x41 Lower byte B 0x42 Lower byte B 0x42 LDR101 Upper byte C 0x43 LDR101 Upper byte C 0x43 Lower byte 0x00 Lower byte D 0x44 LDR102 Upper byte E 0x45 Device Stored value Lower byte F 0x46 LDR200 Upper byte D 0x44 LDR103 Upper byte G 0x47 Lower byte E 0x45 Lower byte 0x00 Termina...

Page 917: ...er byte A 0x41 0 LDR0 3 Lower byte E 0x45 Lower byte B 0x42 1 LDR201 Upper byte F 0x46 LDR101 Upper byte C 0x43 2 Lower byte G 0x47 Lower byte D 0x44 3 LDR202 Upper byte 0x00 Terminating character LDR102 Upper byte E 0x45 4 Lower byte 0x00 Lower byte F 0x46 5 LDR103 Upper byte G 0x47 6 Lower byte H 0x48 7 LDR104 Upper byte I 0x49 8 Lower byte J 0x4A 9 LDR105 Upper byte K 0x47 10 Lower byte L 0x4C ...

Page 918: ...200 Upper byte E 0x45 LDR100 Upper byte A 0x41 0 LDR0 4 Lower byte 0x7E Lower byte B 0x42 1 LDR201 Upper byte 0x3F LDR101 Upper byte C 0x43 2 Lower byte G 0x47 Lower byte D 0x44 3 LDR202 Upper byte H 0x48 LDR102 Upper byte E 0x45 4 Lower byte 0x00 Terminating character Lower byte 0x3F 5 LDR103 Upper byte G 0x47 6 Lower byte H 0x48 7 LDR104 Upper byte I 0x49 8 Lower byte J 0x4A 9 LDR105 Upper byte ...

Page 919: ...f the rectangle s lower right corner X 150 Y 100 on the screen where the script is running The line width line type foreground color background color pattern rounding type and rounding radius are omitted so the rectangle s line width is 1 1 pixel line type is 1 solid line foreground color and background color is 255 white pattern is 0 none rounding type is 0 none and rounding radius is 0 0 pixels ...

Page 920: ...ords from LDR10 is read and stored in LDR200 Script Operation description When the value of D20 is 3 the constant 1234 is stored in LDR13 the device 3 words from LDR10 Example 5 7 39 Indirect read LDR 200 OFFSET LDR 10 D 20 Read 0000 LDR10 0008 D20 8 1234 LDR18 1234 LDR200 Example 5 7 40 Indirect write OFFSET LDR 10 D 20 1234 Write 0000 LDR10 0003 D20 3 1234 LDR13 1234 ...

Page 921: ...ile definition Define it so it will not continue the process for longer than the time limit In a script of HMI function when the processing of a single script continues for more than the time limit due to a while definition etc an execution time over error occurs and that script will be halted Define the script so the execution time for one script does not exceed 3 000 milliseconds For details ref...

Page 922: ...f D100 will be 1000 and the value of D200 will be 5000 when above script is executed There are 2 countermeasures for cases like this Not using the device cache Write delay does not occur when writing to the internal device so the calculation is performed only in the internal device and only the result will be written to the external device address Using the device cache Problems with the write del...

Page 923: ...out the Priority of the Operator As a basic rule operators are calculated in order from left of the line but when multiple calculations are combined they are calculated in following priority This setting will be applied not only to the script but to the whole project Priority Operator High Negative number Subtraction Low ...

Page 924: ...6 Important Notes 20 54 SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual ...

Page 925: ... name and password are associated with a user account and up to 15 user accounts can be created If you configure a password for a user account assigned to a security group access to data and Touch displays and operations are password protected For password protected operations users are prompted to enter their user name and password as necessary on the Touch Password screen or the WindO I NV3 Ente...

Page 926: ...om alterations or misuse by downloading data Protect from the loss of data by upload The Enter Password dialog box is displayed Opening project data USB flash drive Touch Computer The Enter Password dialog box is displayed Download Download Recipe files Project data Computer USB flash drive Touch Upload Upload The Enter Password dialog box is displayed Alarm Log data Data Log data Operation Log da...

Page 927: ... Autorun function Computer USB flash drive Touch Deleting data The Enter Password dialog box is displayed Deleting data Formatting The Password screen is displayed Password ENT User BS CLR OK A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Touch Touch The Password screen is displayed Password ENT User BS CLR OK A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7...

Page 928: ...ed to it Passwords have not been configured for this user account To protect access to data a password must be configured for the user account User1 Provided security groups Administrator Operator Reader Operations subject to password protection Security group that the password is valid for Administrator Operator Reader Data editing Opening projects YES NO NO Reusing screens YES NO NO Modifying da...

Page 929: ... T U VWX Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Touch Touch Touch Base Screen 2 Cannot be displayed Base Screen 2 Can be displayed Switch user account The Password screen is displayed Line Chart is displayed Goto Screen Button Open Password Screen Line Chart that can only be displayed with User2 User2 User2 No user Password ENT User2 BS CLR OK A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9...

Page 930: ...ity Group GroupA GroupA GroupB GroupB User2 User3 User4 Touch 999 Default user None Line Chart and Bar Chart Display GroupA Button Display GroupA Input GroupB Goto Screen Button Open Password Screen Display None Input None Numerical Input Display None Input GroupB Touch Touch Touch User2 Open the password screen with the Goto Screen Button enter the password and switch to User2 With no user GroupA...

Page 931: ... user GroupA parts are hidden GroupB parts cannot be operated Open the password screen with the Goto Screen Button enter the password and switch to User4 999 999 999 999 999 999 Password ENT User BS CLR OK A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Can be operated Not displayed Cannot be operated Not displayed GroupA is not configured for User4 so the button in the lower...

Page 932: ...ser Account 1 On the Configuration tab in the Protect group click User Accounts The User Accounts dialog box is displayed 2 Select the Use Security functions check box The settings related to user accounts are displayed The user account already provided with WindO I NV3 is as follows 2 Security Function Configuration Procedure No 1 User Name User Password blank Security Group Administrator Operato...

Page 933: ...15 Only uppercase alphabetic characters and numbers can be used 7 Click the Group Membership tab Assign the security groups to the user being created Administrator Operator and Reader have already been provided in Security Group These three security groups cannot be used in multiple user accounts To use them with the user account being created delete the security group from the user account they a...

Page 934: ...en click Copy The security groups are copied to To The security groups that you create can be used in multiple user accounts To delete the security groups assigned to the user select the security groups to delete in To and then click Delete Japanese None English and Chinese cannot be used for the group name User3 User4 User2 User1 Created security groups 12 max GroupA GroupB GroupC GroupC GroupB G...

Page 935: ... not continue creating a user account proceed to step 14 13 Repeat steps 3 through 12 and create all of the necessary user accounts 14 Click OK The User Accounts dialog box closes This concludes creating a user account You can configure a user account to be enabled when the Touch power is turned on and when switching the Run Mode in Default User ...

Page 936: ...iting a User Account 1 On the Configuration tab in the Protect group click User Accounts The User Accounts dialog box is displayed 2 Select the user account to edit and then click Edit The Change User Account dialog box is displayed 3 On the General tab change User Name and Password ...

Page 937: ...The security groups are copied to To If you will not delete a security group proceed to step 7 6 Select the security groups assigned to the user to delete in To and then click Delete The security groups are deleted from To To select multiple security groups press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items To select multiple security groups press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you clic...

Page 938: ...his concludes editing a user account Deleting a User Account 1 On the Configuration tab in the Protect group click User Accounts The User Accounts dialog box is displayed 2 Select the user account to delete and then click Remove The user account is deleted 3 Click OK The User Accounts dialog box closes This concludes deleting a user account ...

Page 939: ...gs The Security Group Settings dialog box is displayed 2 Enter the name of the new group in New Group and then click Add The maximum number for the group name is 15 characters The created group name is added to Security Group Repeat this procedure to create multiple security groups 3 Click OK The Security Group Settings dialog box closes This concludes adding a security group Japanese None English...

Page 940: ...n click Rename The Change Security Group Name dialog box is displayed 3 Change the name of the security group to the new group name in New Name The maximum number for the group name is 15 characters 4 Click OK The Change Security Group Name dialog box closes 5 Click OK The Security Group Settings dialog box closes This concludes changing the name of a security group The group name for Administrato...

Page 941: ...is displayed 2 Select the security group in Security Group to delete and then click Delete The security group is deleted 3 Click OK The Security Group Settings dialog box closes This concludes deleting a security group To select multiple security groups press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items Security groups configured for user accounts screens and parts cannot be deleted A...

Page 942: ...8 create the following user account To automatically display the Password screen when the user attempts to switch to a Base Screen they cannot access with the current user account using the Goto Screen Button in the User Accounts dialog box in the Options tab select the Require a password automatically check box For displaying the Password screen refer to 4 1 Entering the Password on the Touch on ...

Page 943: ...hen click Goto Screen Button 3 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Goto Screen Button 4 Double click the dropped Goto Screen Button and the Properties dialog box is displayed 5 Select Switch to Base Screen for Action Mode 6 Specify the screen number of the Base Screen to switch to with Screen No under Goto Screen 2 is specified here 7 Click OK The Properties of Goto Screen...

Page 944: ...cify the screen number of the Base Screen to switch to with No on the General tab This is the same screen number as the screen number specified in step 6 2 is specified here 10 Click the Options tab 11 With Security Group select the security group to allow the display of the Base Screen GroupA is selected here 12 Configure the settings on each tab as necessary and then click OK The Screen Properti...

Page 945: ...ss ENT 2 Repeat 1 to enter all the characters for the password 3 Press and to move the cursor to OK and then press ENT If the correct password is entered the user account changes to User2 and the Password screen closes Base Screen 2 is displayed Press the Goto Screen Button Base Screen 1 No user Touch Password ENT User2 BS CLR OK A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...

Page 946: ... create the following user account 2 Create a Line Chart and configure the display security group On the Home tab in the Parts group click Charts and then click Line Chart 3 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Line Chart 4 Double click the dropped Line Chart and the Properties dialog box is displayed Goto Screen Button Open Password Screen User2 No user Touch Touch Line Ch...

Page 947: ...unction 5 Click Advanced The Options tab is displayed 6 Click the Options tab 7 Select the security group to allow the display of the Line Chart with Display under Security Group GroupA is selected here 8 Configure the settings on each tab as necessary and then click OK The Properties of Line Chart dialog box closes ...

Page 948: ...u want to place the Goto Screen Button 11 Double click the dropped Goto Screen Button and the Properties dialog box is displayed 12 Select Open Password Screen for Action Mode 13 Specify the display location in coordinates for the password screen to open above the Base Screen with Coordinates X Y With the upper left corner of the screen as the origin the upper left corner of the window is the X an...

Page 949: ...password 1 Press and to move the cursor to the character selected and then press ENT 2 Repeat 1 to enter all the characters for the password 3 Press and to move the cursor to OK and then press ENT If the correct password is entered the user account changes to User2 from no default user and the Password screen closes The Line Chart is displayed Press the Goto Screen Button No user Touch Password EN...

Page 950: ... a Numerical Input and configure the input security group On the Home tab in the Parts group click Data Displays and then click Numerical Input 3 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Numerical Input 4 Double click the dropped Numerical Input and the Properties dialog box is displayed Goto Screen Button Open Password Screen User2 No user 999 999 999 Touch Touch Numerical Inp...

Page 951: ...on 5 Click Advanced The Options tab is displayed 6 Click the Options tab 7 Select the security group to allow the operation of the Numerical Input with Input under Security Group GroupA is selected here 8 Configure the settings on each tab as necessary and then click OK The Properties of Numerical Input dialog box closes ...

Page 952: ...u want to place the Goto Screen Button 11 Double click the dropped Goto Screen Button and the Properties dialog box is displayed 12 Select Open Password Screen for Action Mode 13 Specify the display location in coordinates for the password screen to open above the Base Screen with Coordinates X Y With the upper left corner of the screen as the origin the upper left corner of the window is the X an...

Page 953: ...1 Press and to move the cursor to the character selected and then press ENT 2 Repeat 1 to enter all the characters for the password 3 Press and to move the cursor to OK and then press ENT If the correct password is entered the user account changes to User2 from no default user and the Password screen closes The Numerical Input can be operated Press the Goto Screen Button No user 999 Touch Password...

Page 954: ...splayed When this check box is cleared switching to System Mode displaying the monitor and accessing data are protected by a single password The SmartAXIS Touch is not protected if Password is left blank 3 User Accounts Dialog Box User Name Enter the name for the user account The maximum number for the user name is eight characters Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used You cannot us...

Page 955: ...switching the Run Mode If None is selected no user account is selected when the Touch power is turned on and when the Run Mode is changed Screens and parts cannot be displayed or operated that are protected by a security group No Displays the number 1 to 15 used when switching the user account according to the value of device Double clicking the cell displays the Change User Account dialog box For...

Page 956: ...etting specifies the number 1 to 15 when switching the account according to the value of device When Edit was clicked and the Change User Account dialog box was displayed this item displays the selected user account number User Name Enter the name for the user account The maximum number is eight characters Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used Password Enter the password The number ...

Page 957: ...urity Group Displays a list of all the security groups The provided security groups Administrator Operator and Reader are grayed out if assigned to another user account Add Makes a new security group You can create a maximum of 12 Click this button to display the New Security Group dialog box New security groups are added in the New Security Group dialog box For details refer to Adding a Security ...

Page 958: ...ecifies the word device to write the number Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 1 2 3 No User Name User3 User2 User1 Default user 0 User account Value of Trigger device D0 Switch to default user account 1 Switch to user account no 1 2 Switch to user account no 2 3 Switch t...

Page 959: ...Screen Command configured with Switch to Base Screen for the Action Mode in the Properties dialog box Destination device Specifies a word device to write the password entry status Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Bit position Function Parameters 0 This bit stores the in...

Page 960: ...to Screen Button Multi Button Goto Screen Command or Multi Command Downloading or uploading project data with a Key Button Multi Button or Multi Command Executing the USB Autorun function 4 Password Input Operations where the Password screen is not displayed are as follows Switching the Base Screen using the System Area Displaying the alarm screen for the Alarm Log Settings Opening the keypad with...

Page 961: ...reen Password ENT User BS CLR OK A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 User Name Close button Password Key list Cursor Cursor Highlights the selected character or command A to Z 0 to 9 The available characters which can be used in the Password Select with the cursor and press ENT to enter the selected character in Password Select with the cursor and press ENT to del...

Page 962: ...uch is running Uploading project data Uploading external memory data 1 Deleting all data Deleting external memory data 1 Formatting external memory 1 Enter Password Dialog Box User Name Selects the user name This item can only be selected when multiple user accounts are registered Password Enter the password The entered password is displayed as OK Confirms the entered password and starts verifying...

Page 963: ...n and external devices such as relays and registers on the screens are updated with the latest data at all times When a button is pressed or a command is executed in the Touch screen the value is written to the external device 1 Unit names vary based on the manufacturer of the external device Chapter 22 Communication 1 PLC Link Communication Touch 1234 External device PLC Link Commuication 0 1 Rea...

Page 964: ...played dialog boxes and configuring settings step by step by clicking and then clicking New the Select Communication Driver dialog box is displayed For details refer to Chapter 3 Create new project data by using the interactive quick start on page 3 1 Click Communication Driver on the status bar to display the Change Communication Driver dialog box For details refer to Chapter 3 Changing Communica...

Page 965: ...g box can also be accessed using the following methods Click Project on the Configuration tab Double click Project Settings in the Project window The O I Link Communication Settings can only be configured when O I Link Master or O I Link Slave is selected in Protocol under Interface Settings on the Communication Interface tab For details refer to Chapter 3 3 6 O I Link Tab on page 3 37 2 O I Link ...

Page 966: ...unction from the Touch can be used with 1 1 communication The Event Transmission function is a function that works as follows When value in the dedicated DM Link memory of the Touch is changed the data is transmitted from the Touch to the external device 3 DM Link Communication Touch 999 5678 External device DM Link Communication Read Write DM0 999 DM1 1234 5678 DM0 DM1 DM2 DM8190 DM8191 Dedicated...

Page 967: ...on Driver dialog box is displayed For details refer to Chapter 3 Create new project data by using the interactive quick start on page 3 1 Click Communication Driver on the status bar to display the Change Communication Driver dialog box For details refer to Chapter 3 Changing Communication Drivers on page 3 15 Select IDEC System in Manufacturer and then select DM Link 1 1 or DM Link 1 N in Communi...

Page 968: ...ting new project data by following displayed dialog boxes and configuring settings step by step by clicking and then clicking New the Select Communication Driver dialog box is displayed For details refer to Chapter 3 Create new project data by using the interactive quick start on page 3 1 Click Communication Driver on the status bar to display the Change Communication Driver dialog box For details...

Page 969: ...ion User Communication is supported up to three interfaces of the Touch either serial Ethernet or USB interfaces 5 User Communication Touch External device Data reception Data transmission User communication External device PLC Link Communication Up to 31 external devices can be connected when the serial interface is RS485 However it is necessary to thoroughly check command settings error handling...

Page 970: ...munication for a communication interface 1 On the Configuration tab in the System Setup group click Project The Project Settings dialog box is displayed 2 Click the Communication Interface tab 3 Select the interface for user communication under Interface Configuration and then select the user communication in Protocol under Interface Settings The User Communication tab is displayed ...

Page 971: ...hernet Interface F For details refer to Chapter 3 When Protocol1 Protocol2 or Protocol3 is selected for Ethernet under Interface Configuration on page 3 30 USB Interface F For details refer to Chapter 3 When USB2 is selected under Interface Configuration on page 3 31 5 Click the User Communication tab 6 Select the user communication under Settings and then click Browse Select the user communicatio...

Page 972: ... user communication protocol set on the User Communication tab in the Project Settings dialog box is displayed in Protocol Name under Settings and the protocol settings are displayed under Protocol In addition the command settings selected under Protocol are displayed under Command 8 Click OK This concludes configuring user communication for communication interfaces ...

Page 973: ... the Workspace group click Protocol Manager Protocol Manager is displayed 2 Click Add The User Communication Protocol Settings dialog box is displayed 3 Enter the name of the user communication protocol in the Protocol Name The maximum number for protocol name is 40 characters You cannot use the following characters in the protocol name ...

Page 974: ...dress Settings on page 2 62 9 Specify the destination word device for the transmitted data size and error information in Status Device Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 10 Set the wait time 0 to 255 from when the trigger condition is satisfied to when the data is transmi...

Page 975: ...nditional expressions configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 2 Setting Conditional Expressions on page 2 64 For details on data types refer to Chapter 2 1 2 Available Data on page 2 2 Fixed Period Data is transmitted at a fixed time interval Set the time interval between data transmissions as 1 to 3600 seconds in Period sec 12 Set data for transmission command Click Edit The Data Settings di...

Page 976: ... 15 Repeat steps 12 through 14 to set all the data for the transmission command 16 Click OK The transmission command configured under Protocol is displayed 17 Specify Receive RXD command Click Edit The data are displayed in Command in the order they were set To change the order of data select data and then click Up or Down to shift it ...

Page 977: ...ion for being ready to receive data in Trigger Type under Trigger Condition from the following Always Enabled The device is always ready to receive data Proceed to step 24 While ON Ready to receive data when the value of device is 1 Specify the bit device or bit of the word device as the condition Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedur...

Page 978: ...frame refers to a data string from the beginning to the end of a command 24 Set data for receive command Click Edit The Data Settings dialog box is displayed 25 Select data type in Type Data setting items are displayed For details on receive command refer to Receive RXD Command on page 22 50 26 Specify the data and then click OK The data configured in Command on the Command Settings dialog box is ...

Page 979: ... Communication Protocol Settings dialog box is displayed To add a transmission command repeat steps 5 through 16 To add a receive command repeat steps 17 through 28 29 Configure all commands click OK User communication protocols are registered in Protocol List on Protocol Manager The data are displayed in Command in the order they were set To change the order of data select data and then click Up ...

Page 980: ...5 User Communication 22 18 SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual 30 Click Close This concludes registering user communication protocol ...

Page 981: ...ager on another computer save it as a file 1 On the View tab in the Workspace group click Protocol Manager Protocol Manager is displayed 2 Select the user communication protocol in Protocol List and then click Export The Save As dialog box is displayed 3 Specify Save in and then click Save The name of the saved file will be the name of the protocol To select multiple user communication protocols p...

Page 982: ...the protocol To select multiple user communication protocols press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items When a user communication protocol file with the protocol name already exists a confirmation message is displayed Click Overwrite to overwrite the existing user communication protocol Click Rename to display the Protocol File Name Settings dialog box Enter a new name for Pro...

Page 983: ...on protocol in the User Communication Protocol Settings dialog box For details refer to User Communication Protocol Settings Dialog Box on page 22 23 Delete Deletes the selected user communication protocol Import Imports a saved user communication protocol file Click this button to display the Open dialog box For details refer to Importing user communication protocol on page 22 20 Export Export an...

Page 984: ...g box Status Shows the destination device for the transmitted or received data size and error information Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box Trigger Type Shows the trigger type for data transmission or being ready to receive data Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box Condition Shows the condition of trigger type for data transmission or be...

Page 985: ...tus Device The data of second byte starts to be received before exceeding the Receiving Character Time Out duration after the data of first byte is received and the values of the Completed Device and Status Device when receiving of the data has been successfully completed are as follows The value of the Completed Device LM101 changes to 1 When the Not Clear Completed Device automatically check box...

Page 986: ... 1 0 Receiving Character Time Out duration First byte of receive data Second byte of receive data Value of LM100 when Trigger Condition is While ON No Shows the number for managing command settings Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box Type Shows the type of command Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box Completed Shows the device for reportin...

Page 987: ...e and then click OK to save the protocol Click Cancel to stop saving the protocol OK Adds or changes the user communication protocol and closes the User Communication Protocol Settings dialog box When a protocol of the same name has already been saved an overwrite confirmation message is displayed Click Overwrite to overwrite the existing protocol Click Rename to display the Protocol File Name Set...

Page 988: ...evice is LM100 and Completed Device is LM101 When the value of the Trigger Condition device LM100 changes to 1 data is transmitted by user communication from the Touch to the external device When data transmission is successfully completed the value of the Completed Device LM101 changes to 1 Transmission data Transmission 1 31h 2 32h 3 33h 4 34h External device Touch Value of LM100 when Trigger Co...

Page 989: ...h from an external device Processing of receive command is as follows Example When Trigger Type in Trigger Condition is While ON Device is LM100 and Completed Device is LM101 When the value of the Trigger Condition device LM100 changes to 1 data can be received ready to receive by user communication so when data is transmitted from the external device the Touch starts to receive the data When data...

Page 990: ...mpleted Device LM101 changes to 1 When the first data of the next frame is received the value of the Completed Device LM101 changes to 0 When the Not Clear Completed Device automatically check box is selected When data receiving is successfully completed the value of the Completed Device LM101 is set to 1 Even after the first data of the next frame is received the value of the Completed Device LM1...

Page 991: ... 41h to 46h data Change the Calculation Start Position and Calculation End Position settings and the transmission data 1 2 Reserved 3 Registering Constant Data Error When data type is Registering Constant Character or Registering Constant Hexadecimal the value of the Index Device does not match the Index No of the registered Registering Constant Change the data stored in the Index Device 4 Reserve...

Page 992: ...onversion Type is ASCII DEC to Binary a code other than 0 to 9 receives as data Or the converted data exceeds 65535 Check the transmission data from the external device 5 Device Data Reference Device Error When data type is Device and the Use Reference check box is selected the device address in which the value of the Reference Device is stored as offset has exceeded the valid range Or the number ...

Page 993: ...mpleted Device does not change to 1 and the receive data is not processed When the trigger condition again changes from not satisfied to satisfied the value of the Receiving Time Out of the Status Device address 0 bit 14 changes to 0 When the value of this bit is not 0 the Receiving Time Out cannot be detected Example When Trigger Type in Trigger Condition is While ON Device is LM100 Status Device...

Page 994: ...eceiving Time Out address 0 bit 14 of Status Device LDR110 1 0 0 1 0 1 Receive command Value of LM100 when Trigger Condition is While ON Value of Completed Device LM101 Receive data 1 frame Receiving Time Out duration Value of Receiving Time Out address 0 bit 14 of Status Device LDR110 Trigger Type A condition for data transmission is selected from the following Rising edge Data is transmitted whe...

Page 995: ...m the following Always Enabled The Touch is always ready to receive data While ON Ready to receive data when the value of device is 1 While OFF Ready to receive data when the value of device is 0 While satisfying the condition Ready to receive data while the condition is satisfied Data Type Select the data type handled by the conditional expression Can only be set if While satisfying the condition...

Page 996: ...as follows B16 A When Binary HEX to ASCII is selected B10 A When Binary DEC to ASCII is selected N When No Conversion is selected Variable When the Variable check box is selected variables are displayed as follows V00 When NULL 00h is selected for transmission command V Device When Device is selected for transmission command V In the case of receive command Words Displays the number of word device...

Page 997: ...hen Binary HEX to ASCII is selected N When No Conversion is selected Number of bytes Displays the number of bytes of the transmitted or received data Example BCC 2 1 XOR N 2 Skip Displays the specified data enclosed in Skip Skip Number of bytes Example Skip 2 Edit Add or change data To add data select an empty line in the Command and then click this button To change data select data in the Command...

Page 998: ...xadecimal Device Registering Constant Character Registering Constant Hexadecimal BCC Skip Skip can only be configured when RXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box Setting item varies based on the selection in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box When TXD is selected refer to Transmission TXD Command on page 22 37 When RXD is selected refer to Receive RXD Comma...

Page 999: ...haracter is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box Data Enter character data 1 to 1500 bytes to be transmitted The size of a single byte character is one byte and that of a double byte character is two bytes Example Constant Character for transmission command data When the trigger condition is satisfied the character data is transmitted in the following order Item Setting Data 1234 12...

Page 1000: ...lected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box and Constant Hexadecimal is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box Data Enter hexadecimal data 1 to 1500 bytes to be transmitted Example Constant Hexadecimal for transmission command data When the trigger condition is satisfied 1234h is transmitted in the order 12h and 34h Item Setting Data 1234 1234h No conversion 12h Transmis...

Page 1001: ...You can only specify an internal device For details refer to Chapter 2 Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings on page 2 5 Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Storage Method of data Select the handling method for the value of read device This can be configured only when ...

Page 1002: ...ber of bytes is applied for transmitted data Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 When the value of device exceeds Number of bytes x Words or when it is negative the Device Data Variable Specification Error address 0 bit 6 of the Status Device changes to 1 and transmission ...

Page 1003: ... Setting Conversion Type Binary DEC to ASCII Device LDR100 Use Reference Device OFF Number of bytes 2 Words 2 Variable OFF Item Setting Conversion Type No Conversion Device LDR100 Use Reference Device OFF Storage Method of data from Upper byte Number of bytes 2 Words 2 Variable ON NULL 1234h LDR100 5678h LDR101 Binary HEX to ASCII 1 31h Value of Device 4 34h 5 35h 2 32h 6 36h 3 33h 7 37h 8 38h 2 b...

Page 1004: ...ice OFF Storage Method of data from Lower byte Number of bytes 2 Words 2 Variable ON Device LDR200 Item Setting Conversion Type No Conversion Device LDR100 Use Reference Device ON Device LDR200 Storage Method of data from Upper byte Words 2 Variable OFF LDR100 LDR101 No conversion Transmission data 34h 12h 78h Order of transmission 1234h 5678h 12h 34h 56h 78h Upper Lower Value of Device from Lower...

Page 1005: ...ytes The character data of different size or the same data with a different number cannot be registered Set Register the Index and Data settings to the list When a number that is already registered is selected it is overwritten with the new setting Insert Insert a character data setting to the selected number in the list Click this button to insert the Index and Data setting The settings at the in...

Page 1006: ...ta of the Index No according to the value of device is transmitted When the LDR100 value is 2 Item Setting Number of Registering Constants 3 Registering Constants Index No 1 123 Index No 2 456 Index No 3 789 Index Device LDR100 123 1 456 2 789 3 Index Device LDR100 2 Data Index No Number of Registering Constants 3 Transmission data 4 34h 5 35h 6 36h Order of transmission ...

Page 1007: ...same data with a different number cannot be registered Set Register the Index and Data settings to the list When a number that is already registered is selected it is overwritten with the new setting Insert Insert a hexadecimal data setting to the selected number in the list Click this button to insert the Index and Data setting The settings at the insertion point shift down one line Settings cann...

Page 1008: ...data of the Index No according to the value of device is transmitted When the LDR100 value is 3 Item Setting Number of Registering Constants 3 Registering Constants Index No 1 1234 Index No 2 5678 Index No 3 2537 Index Device LDR100 1234h 1 5678h 2 2537h 3 Index Device LDR100 3 Data Index No Number of Registering Constants 3 Transmission data 25h 37h Order of transmission ...

Page 1009: ... the method to calculate the data between the Calculation Start Position and Calculation End Position 1 31h 4 34h 5 35h 2 32h STX 02h 3 33h BCC CR 0Dh 1 2 3 4 5 6 Calculation Start Position Transmission data 1 31h 4 34h 5 35h 2 32h STX 02h 3 33h BCC CR 0Dh 5 4 3 2 1 0 Calculation End Position Transmission data XOR Calculates the data with exclusive logical add ADD Calculates the data using additio...

Page 1010: ...btain an exclusive OR XOR of 1 byte data at Calculation Start Position and FFFFh 2 If the least significant bit of the result of step 1 is 0 shift to the right by one bit If the bit is 1 shift to the right by 1 bit and obtain XOR of the result and the value A001h 3 Repeat step 2 to shift 8 times 4 Obtain XOR of the next one byte of data and the result of step 3 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 until the...

Page 1011: ...ded to the transmission data When Calculation Type is Modbus RTU CRC When the BCC calculation result is BA30h with no conversion the two bytes of data is appended to the transmission data 0 30h Second byte First byte 4 34h 1 byte BCC data Converted data 4 34h 0 30h 4 34h BCC data 0 30h 4 34h Converted data 2 bytes Second byte First byte B 42h A 41h B 42h A 41h BCC data 4241h Binary HEX to ASCII Da...

Page 1012: ...f a single byte character is one byte and that of a double byte character is two bytes Example Constant Character for receive command data When the trigger condition is satisfied the received data is compared with the following data When a Constant Character is set at the beginning of a command the first one byte is recognized as the start code When a Constant Character is set at the end of a comm...

Page 1013: ... dialog box Data Enter hexadecimal data 1 to 1500 bytes designated to be received Example Constant Hexadecimal for receive command data When the trigger condition is satisfied the received data is compared with the following data When a Constant Character is set at the beginning of a command the first one byte is recognized as the start code When a Constant Character is set at the end of a command...

Page 1014: ... specify a device You can only specify an internal device Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box For the device address configuration procedure refer to Chapter 2 5 1 Device Address Settings on page 2 62 Storage Method of data Select the handling method for received data This can be configured only when No Conversion is selected under Conversion Type Number of bytes Specify the re...

Page 1015: ... Words No conversion Stored data Insufficient by 1 word 0 is stored When the Variable check box is selected observe the following points When data is set expect for the end of a command set Constant Character data or Constant Hexadecimal data following Device data When there is no data stored in the device all of the values of devices specified under Words will be 0 The maximum amount of the recei...

Page 1016: ...LDR100 Use Reference Device OFF Number of bytes 2 Words 2 Variable OFF Item Setting Conversion Type No Conversion Device LDR100 Use Reference Device OFF Storage Method of data from Upper byte Number of bytes 1 Words 3 Variable ON 0012h LDR100 0034h LDR101 ASCII HEX to Binary 2 32h Value of Device 1 31h 4 34h 3 33h Received data 1 31h 2 32h 3 33h 4 34h Order of reception Words 2 2 bytes 12 LDR100 3...

Page 1017: ...ce OFF Storage Method of data from Lower byte Number of bytes 2 Words 3 Variable ON Item Setting Conversion Type ASCII HEX to Binary Device LDR100 Use Reference Device OFF Number of bytes 1 Words 3 Variable ON 3231h LDR100 0033h LDR101 0000h LDR102 1 31h Value of Device 2 32h 3 33h NUL 00h 1 31h 2 32h 3 33h ETX 03h Order of reception Words 3 Received data Upper Lower from Lower byte 2 bytes Consta...

Page 1018: ...F Number of bytes 2 Words 3 Variable ON Item Setting Conversion Type No Conversion Device LDR100 Use Reference Device ON Device LDR200 Storage Method of data from Upper byte Words 2 Variable OFF LDR100 LDR101 LDR102 2 32h Value of Device 1 31h 3 33h NUL 00h 1 31h 2 32h 3 33h ETX 03h Words 3 12 3 DEC DEC 0 ASCII DEC to Binary DEC 2 bytes Received data Constant HEX data Stored data Order of receptio...

Page 1019: ...e character data of different size or the same data with a different number cannot be registered Set Register the Index and Data settings to the list When a number that is already registered is selected it is overwritten with the new setting Insert Insert a character data setting to the selected number in the list Click this button to insert the Index and Data setting The settings at the insertion...

Page 1020: ... registered data and the value of the Index No 2 of the matching data is stored in Index Device LDR100 Item Setting Number of Registering Constants 3 Registering Constants Index No 1 123 Index No 2 456 Index No 3 789 Index Device LDR100 Received data Compare 4 34h 5 35h 6 36h Order of reception 2 LDR100 Value of the Index Device 123 1 456 2 789 3 Data Index No Number of Registering Constants 3 DEC...

Page 1021: ...e data with a different number cannot be registered Set Register the Index and Data settings to the list When a number that is already registered is selected it is overwritten with the new setting Insert Insert a hexadecimal data setting to the selected number in the list Click this button to insert the Index and Data setting The settings at the insertion point shift down 1 line Settings cannot be...

Page 1022: ...is compared with the registered data and the value of the Index No 2 DEC of the matching data is stored in Index Device LDR100 Item Setting Number of Registering Constants 3 Registering Constants Index No 1 1234 Index No 2 5678 Index No 3 2537 Index Device LDR100 Received data Compare 25h 37h Order of reception 3 LDR100 Value of the Index Device 1234h 5678h 2537h 1 2 3 Data Index No Number of Regi...

Page 1023: ...ndirect Device LDR100 of Device of the receive command data is 2 DEC the data is stored in the device LDR202 which is offset by 2 The last 1 byte is taken as the terminal code Constant Hexadecimal data is not stored 0000h LDR200 0000h LDR201 3132h LDR202 Value of Device LDR100 2 CR 0Dh ...

Page 1024: ...lculate the data between the Calculation Start Position and Calculation End Position 1 31h 4 34h 5 35h 2 32h STX 02h 3 33h BCC CR 0Dh 1 2 3 4 5 6 Calculation Start Position Receive data 1 31h 4 34h 5 35h 2 32h STX 02h 3 33h BCC CR 0Dh 5 4 3 2 1 0 Calculation End Position Receive data XOR Calculates the data with exclusive logical add ADD Calculates the data using addition ADD 2 s Complement Calcul...

Page 1025: ...f bytes 2 1 Obtain an exclusive OR XOR of 1 byte data at Calculation Start Position and FFFFh 2 If the least significant bit of the result of step 1 is 0 shift to the right by one bit If the bit is 1 shift to the right by 1 bit and obtain XOR of the result and the value A001h 3 Repeat step 2 to shift 8 times 4 Obtain XOR of the next one byte of data and the result of step 3 5 Repeat steps 2 throug...

Page 1026: ...Binary HEX to ASCII conversion the resulting two bytes of data is used for comparison with the BCC part of the receive data When the calculation type is Modbus RTU CRC When the BCC calculation result is BA30h with no conversion the two bytes of data is used for comparison with the BCC part of the receive data 0 30h 4 34h Comparison data 4 34h Bytes 1 Converted data Second byte First byte 0 30h 4 3...

Page 1027: ...d Skip is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box Number of bytes Specify the number of bytes 1 to 249 of receive data to be ignored Example Skip for receive command data In the received four byte data 1 31h 2 32h 3 33h 4 34h only the data for 3 33h and 4 34h is received and the two bytes of 1 31h and 2 32h are discarded Item Setting Number of bytes 2 Enabled data 4 34h 3 33h 2 bytes I...

Page 1028: ...luding the number of bytes of BCC is received Set Not set Set Reception is started with the start code and the data is received according to the maximum command length Reception is terminated when the Receiving Character Time Out occurs Not set Reception is started with the start code and the data is received according to the length of the command Not set Set Set Not set Reception is started from ...

Page 1029: ... None When trigger conditions are satisfied for two or more receive commands for which both start code and terminal code are set all commands are analyzed and processed for receive processing Since commands with and without errors may be mixed depending on the results of data reception analysis of each command take extra caution regarding error handling While the trigger condition is satisfied for...

Page 1030: ...tion for transmission command 1 Write a value of 100 DEC to LDR100 of transmission command data Device 2 Change the trigger condition LM100 from 0 to 1 to start command transmission After the transmission wait duration five seconds the transmission data is sent The transmission data is as follows When data transmission is successfully completed the Completed Device LM101 changes to 1 When the valu...

Page 1031: ...0 from LDR120 When data reception is successfully completed the Completed Device LM102 changes to 1 When the value of each bit of address 0 of Status Device LDR130 is 0 reception is completed without an error Item Setting Comment RXD command Command Type Receive Completed Device LM102 Not Clear Completed Device automatically No Status Device LDR130 Receiving Time Out 0 No Receive Time Out Trigger ...

Page 1032: ...n command data 3 Change the trigger condition LM200 from 0 to 1 to start command transmission The transmission data is as follows When data transmission is successfully completed the Completed Device LM201 changes to 1 When the value of each bit of address 0 for Status Device LDR220 is 0 transmission is completed without an error Item Setting Protocol Name Sample 2 Receiving Character Time Out 30 ...

Page 1033: ...h 02h Item Setting Comment RXD command Command Type Receive Completed Device LM203 Not Clear Completed Device automatically No Status Device LDR260 Receiving Time Out 0 No Receive Time Out Trigger Condition While ON Device LM202 Command Data Settings dialog box settings Constant Hexadecimal 02 Registering Constant Character 10 AB 20 CD Index Device LDR230 Skip 2 bytes Device Conversion Type No Con...

Page 1034: ...is a match since the BCC part data is 3032h When there is no match the BCC Error address 0 bit 0 of Status Device changes to 1 When data reception is successfully completed the Completed Device LM203 changes to 1 When the value of each bit of address 0 for Status Device LDR250 is 0 transmission is completed without an error 0002h Binary HEX to ASCII 0 30h Data 2 32h 0 30h 2 32h Comparison data 0 3...

Page 1035: ...umber IDEC DATALOGIC QD2130 1 Set the USB Barcode Reader to USB KBD Keyboard setting The Touch handles the new line code as 0x0A 1 SD Pin No Name 2 RD 3 RS 4 CS 5 SG FG Pin No Name RD SD SG Shield Wire Touch External device RS232C 8 RDA RD Pin No Name 9 RDB RD 6 SDA SD 7 SDB SD 5 SG FG Pin No Name SDA SDB RDA RDB SG Shield Wire Touch External device RS485 422 Terminal There is no pin No correspond...

Page 1036: ...5 User Communication 22 74 SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual ...

Page 1037: ... Touch Download Project data When project data is downloaded using the online function the Alarm Log data Data Log data and Operation Log data in the data storage area are deleted All internal devices except for the HMI Keep Register LKR and HMI Keep Relay LK are cleared The following functions can be executed with downloading of project data Download additional fonts Download the runtime system D...

Page 1038: ...splay the information about the runtime system and project data of the Touch Computer Upload Touch Project data It is possible to upload recipe files from an External Memory Folder in external memory inserted in the Touch together with uploading of project data For details on reading project data saved on an external memory using WindO I NV3 refer to Chapter 26 Uploading on page 26 9 Computer USB ...

Page 1039: ... displaying and changing values of devices and switching screens using the monitor function Computer Touch 130 External device Screen monitor LDR1 0 130 Computer Switches to Base Screen 2 Touch 130 Full Tank 1 External device External device Base Screen 1 Base Screen 2 For details about monitor function refer to Chapter 24 Monitor Function on page 24 1 ...

Page 1040: ... Installing the USB Driver on page A 18 The USB driver does not have to be installed for subsequent connections Note the connection must use the same USB port that was connected to when installing the USB driver The computer will not recognize the Touch immediately if the USB cable is connected to a different USB port Multiple Touch connections using different USB ports on the same computer are no...

Page 1041: ...click OK Communicate with Select the device to communicate with from the following items Touch Communicate with the Touch connected to the computer For details refer to Using the online function for Ethernet communication on page 23 7 O I Link Slaves Communicate with an O I Link Slave Touch via an O I Link Master For details refer to Using the online function with an O I Link Slave via an O I Link...

Page 1042: ... is selected for Port External Memory Read or write data to the external memory inserted in the Touch connected to the computer For details refer to Chapter 26 1 4 Reading Writing Data on page 26 3 USB Connect the USB port on the computer to the USB interface on the Touch Ethernet Connect the Ethernet port on the computer to the Ethernet interface on the Touch The initial values of the network set...

Page 1043: ...ings of the Touch to which you are downloading after project data is downloaded Select a download destination from the list and then click Change Settings to display IP Address Manager Using IP Address Manager specify the Ethernet settings of the Touch after downloading It is necessary to set the IP address subnet mask and default gateway of the Touch according to the local network that is used Fo...

Page 1044: ... I Link Master Select O I Link Slaves under Communicate with on the Communication Settings dialog box To download project data Click Download in the Download dialog box to display the Target Slaves dialog box Specify the slave station number of the Touch to which you are downloading You can download project data to multiple Touchs Also it is possible to change the slave station number the Touch to...

Page 1045: ...ata Upload data from an external memory inserted in the Touch Delete data stored in the internal memory of the Touch Delete data from or format an external memory inserted in the Touch Display information about runtime system and project data Monitor the Touch Specifies the O I Link Slave Target Slave Select the slave station number Slave 1 to Slave 15 that will be the subject of the operation Mas...

Page 1046: ...roject data Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask to register in the project data Default Gateway Enter the default gateway to register in the project data Comment Enter comment to register in the project data Add New Adds IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway and Comment to the list Delete Deletes the selected IP address from the list Select Closes IP Address Manager and apply the Ethernet settings ...

Page 1047: ...a Only Downloads files modified since the previous download If download fails select All to download Select Files Download the specified files Click Browse to display the Open Screens dialog box Select Screen Type select the screen to be downloaded from Screen List and then click OK The selected screen is added to the list 2 Downloading To download a project without opening it on the Home tab in t...

Page 1048: ...download project data on page 23 8 6 Click Yes The Download Project dialog box is displayed and the project file starts downloading When finished downloading a completion message is displayed 7 Click OK 8 Click Close on the Download Project dialog box This concludes downloading project data If security is enabled in the Touch project the Password Screen is displayed Enter the password For details ...

Page 1049: ...ion Settings dialog box For details refer to 1 3 Change Communication Settings on page 23 5 All All project data is downloaded Modified Data Only Only files that were updated since the previous download are downloaded If an upload fails select All to download Select Files Specifies a screen for download Browse The screen to be downloaded is added to the list Click Browse to display the Open Screen...

Page 1050: ... box is displayed Specify the IP address of the Touch and then click OK to start the download For details refer to To download project data on page 23 7 When Communicate with is set to O I Link Slave the Target Slave dialog box is displayed Specify the slave station of the Touch to download to then click OK to start the download If Port is set to Ethernet specify the IP address of the master via w...

Page 1051: ...ndard Chinese Taiwanese Korean European Large Font Central European Baltic and Cyrillic For details about additional fonts refer to Chapter 2 Installed Fonts in the Touch on page 2 7 Clear the Download Additional Fonts check box to delete all additional fonts that have been downloaded to the Touch The additional fonts downloaded to the Touch whose check box is cleared will be deleted from the Touc...

Page 1052: ... External Memory while running Downloads the file to the external memory inserted in the Touch without stopping operation of the Touch 5 Select the file and then click Open When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port to USB the project data starts downloading When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port to Ethernet the Target IP Address dialog box is displayed Specify the IP address of the To...

Page 1053: ...ed 7 Click OK 8 Click Close in the External Memory Maintenance dialog box During communication with an O I Link Slave using the online function O I Link Master operation is stopped To create a recipe file on an external memory inserted in the computer use Save Recipe File to External Memory in the Recipe Settings dialog box For details refer to Chapter 18 Creating Recipe Files in the Recipe Settin...

Page 1054: ... 8 When Communicate with is set to O I Link Slave the Target Slave dialog box is displayed Specify the slave station of the Touch to communicate with and then click OK to display the Upload dialog box If Port is set to Ethernet specify the IP address of the master via which to upload For details refer to To execute any function except project data download on page 23 9 3 Uploading While editing pr...

Page 1055: ...message is displayed Project Name The project file is saved with the currently displayed name To change the project name enter a new name for the file The maximum number is 50 characters Location The uploaded project file is saved to the currently displayed location To change the location of the saved file click The Save Project After Uploading dialog box is displayed Select a location and then cl...

Page 1056: ...t opens This concludes uploading of project data During communication with an O I Link Slave using the online function O I Link Master operation is stopped For details on reading project data saved on an external memory using WindO I NV3 refer to Chapter 26 Uploading on page 26 9 ...

Page 1057: ...o the Touch Modified Displays the time that project data downloaded to the Touch was last saved in WindO I NV3 Location Specifies the location for saving uploaded project files Click to display the Save Project After Uploading dialog box Select the location for saving then click Save Upload files used in this project from the External Memory To upload files located on an external memory inserted i...

Page 1058: ...ll device addresses Stored Data in External Memory After stopping operation deletes data saved to an External Memory Folder on an external memory Click this to display the Clear Data dialog box For details refer to Deleting Data from an External Memory Inserted in the Touch on page 23 24 When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port to USB deletion of the data starts When Communicate with is set ...

Page 1059: ...ouch User s Manual 23 23 4 Clear 23 Online Function 4 Click Yes 5 Click Close This concludes clearing data During communication with an O I Link Slave using the online function O I Link Master operation is stopped ...

Page 1060: ...Data and Recipe Files 5 Click OK When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port to USB deletion of the data starts When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port is set to Ethernet the Target IP Address dialog box is displayed Specify the IP address of the Touch and then click OK to start deletion of the data For details refer to To execute any function except project data download on page 23 8 Wh...

Page 1061: ...Manual 23 25 4 Clear 23 Online Function 6 Click Yes 7 Click Close This concludes clearing data on the external memory During communication with an O I Link Slave using the online function O I Link Master operation is stopped ...

Page 1062: ... Port is set to Ethernet the Target IP Address dialog box is displayed Specify the IP address of the Touch and then click OK to display the formatting confirmation message For details refer to To execute any function except project data download on page 23 8 When Communicate with is set to O I Link Slave the Target Slave dialog box is displayed Specify the slave station of the Touch to communicate...

Page 1063: ...ystem Information dialog box is displayed When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port is set to Ethernet the Target IP Address dialog box is displayed Specify the IP address of the Touch and then click OK to display the System Information dialog box For details refer to To execute any function except project data download on page 23 8 When Communicate with is set to O I Link Slave the Target Sl...

Page 1064: ...the Touch click Font Information The Font Information dialog box is displayed For details refer to Font Information Dialog Box on page 23 30 To check information about the external memory inserted in the Touch click External Memory Information The External Memory Information dialog box is displayed For details refer to External Memory Information Dialog Box on page 23 30 During communication with ...

Page 1065: ...Memory Information dialog box For details refer to External Memory Information Dialog Box on page 23 30 Project Name Shows the project name of projects downloaded to the Touch Modified Date Displays the time that project data downloaded to the Touch was last saved in WindO I NV3 Project Version Displays the version of WindO I NV3 used to create the project data downloaded to the Touch External Dev...

Page 1066: ...Large Font Central European Baltic Cyrillic External Memory Information Dialog Box Checks the state of an external memory inserted in the Touch its total capacity available capacity and used capacity State Shows the state of the external memory inserted in the Touch Memory Capacity Shows the total capacity bytes of the external memory inserted in the Touch Free Space Shows how much of the capacity...

Page 1067: ...the Monitor Function in WindO I NV3 is Used Monitor function in WindO I NV3 can be performed as follows Checking values of devices used on the screen of the Touch Checking values of specified devices Checking values of devices of sequential addresses Chapter 24 Monitor Function 1 Monitoring with WindO I NV3 Computer Touch 130 External device Screen Monitor LDR1 LM0 LDR1 LM0 Displays device address...

Page 1068: ...ts while satisfying conditions Object List window Script Editor Computer Disconnect Connect Touch 130 External device External device External Device Monitor Station No 0 Station No 1 Station No 0 Station No 1 Popup Popup Highlighted Trigger Condition While satisfying the condition LM0 1 LM0 0 1 Condition Condition Not satisfied Not satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Satisfied ...

Page 1069: ...ternal device External device Base Screen 1 Base Screen 2 Computer Opens to Base Screen 2 Touch Full Tank 1 Full Tank 1 External device External device Base Screen 2 Base Screen 2 Click Monitor function in WindLDR can be performed as follows Monitoring the ladder program F refer to Chapter 12 Monitor Operation on page 12 12 Monitoring the FBD program F refer to Chapter 12 Monitor Operation on page...

Page 1070: ...hat was displayed immediately before the screen was switched using Back First Screen Switches to the Base Screen of the lowest screen number in the project data Previous Screen Switches to the Base Screen of screen number one lower than the Base Screen currently displayed If the screen numbers are not sequential switches to the screen of next lowest number Specified Screen Switches to the Base Scr...

Page 1071: ...ions on page 24 16 Custom Registers monitored devices individually and displays the value of devices For details refer to Custom Monitor on page 24 7 Batch Registers monitored devices as a batch for sequential addresses and displays the value of devices For details refer to Batch Monitor on page 24 14 External Devices Displays the state of external devices connected to the Touch For details refer ...

Page 1072: ... Data on page 2 2 Click to toggle display of HEX and BIN format To display HEX and BIN values click to display a popup menu then click HEX and BIN and select the check box Hexadecimal Binary Displays the current value of device address in hexadecimal and binary format To change a value double click a cell and then specify a value The value range depends on the data type For details refer to Chapte...

Page 1073: ...tton to display Script Manager For details refer to Batch Saving Device Addresses Used in Scripts on page 24 9 Import Imports the device addresses from a device list saved as a CSV text file Click this button to display the Open dialog box For details refer to Importing Devices from a Device List on page 24 12 Export Saves the device addresses displayed in Monitor as a CSV text file This file is c...

Page 1074: ...ments are displayed only after you click next to Device Address to display a popup menu then click Comment and select the check box Value Displays the current value of device address in decimal format To change a value double click a cell and then enter a value The value range depends on the data type For details refer to Chapter 2 1 2 Available Data on page 2 2 Click to toggle display of HEX and ...

Page 1075: ...24 Monitor Function Batch Saving Device Addresses Used in Scripts 1 Click Script Script Manager is displayed 2 Select the script ID of the script for the device address to be batch saved and then click Select All the device addresses used by the script are registered ...

Page 1076: ...led from the List to be reutilized 1 Click Add to List The Device List Name Setting dialog box is displayed 2 Enter a name for the custom monitor list The maximum number is 40 characters Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used 3 Click OK The custom monitor list is added to the List 4 Saving project data The following characters cannot be used for names of custom monitor list If a proj...

Page 1077: ...m Monitor List as a CSV File To use a custom monitor list registered devices list in another project save it as a CSV text file This file is called a Device List 1 Click Export The Save As dialog box is displayed 2 Select Save in enter a File name and then click Save This concludes saving device list ...

Page 1078: ...rom a Device List Imports the device addresses from a device list saved as a CSV text file into custom monitor 1 Click Import The Device List dialog box is displayed 2 Click The Open dialog box is displayed 3 Select a saved device list and then click Open The device addresses are listed ...

Page 1079: ...splayed Click Yes to overwrite the device address displayed in the confirmation message Click Yes To All to overwrite all the device addresses Click No to display the next confirmation message without overwriting the device address displayed in the confirmation message Click Cancel to stop importing device addresses The device is added to Monitor To select multiple items of text press and hold SHI...

Page 1080: ... selected in Device Length Specifies the number of device addresses displayed in the list Bit of the word device specification 1 to 16 Other than above 1 to 1000 Data Type Selects the data format of the displayed value For details refer to Chapter 2 1 2 Available Data on page 2 2 Monitor Automatically displays the selected device addresses in the number specified under Length from top to bottom co...

Page 1081: ... all external devices used in the project Hexadecimal Binary Displays the current value of device address in hexadecimal and binary format To change a value double click a cell and then specify a value The value range depends on the data type For details refer to Chapter 2 1 2 Available Data on page 2 2 Comments are displayed only after you click next to Value to display a popup menu and then sele...

Page 1082: ...onditions are being satisfied are highlighted in the Object List window Popup viewing of values of devices in the Object List window works only if the screen displayed in the Object List window matches the screen displayed on the Touch Popup viewing of values of devices in Script Editor works only if the script during editing is being used by a global script command or a script command on the scre...

Page 1083: ... the project data Previous Screen Switches to the Base Screen of screen number one lower than the Base Screen currently displayed If the screen numbers are not consecutive numbers this command switches to the closest number Specified Screen Switches to the Base Screen of a specified number Next Screen Switches to the Base Screen of screen number one higher than the Base Screen currently displayed ...

Page 1084: ...e operation on the Touch without connecting to a computer 2 1 How the Monitoring Function is Used Monitoring in the Touch can perform the following functions Checking and changing the value of specified device Checking ladder program 2 Monitoring on the Touch Touch Touch ESC OK IMOV N M0001 I0000 D0000 01 00001 00002 ...

Page 1085: ...or is displayed Available device address range depends on types and settings of external devices Selecting unavailable device address Communication error happens and it can not be back in without reboot For details refer to Chapter 30 1 1 Errors Displayed on the Screen on page 30 1 If three Popup Screens are displayed on the screen or if two Popup Screens are displayed in the Alarm Log Settings in...

Page 1086: ... 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to register all device addresses to be monitored Dec Hex The next address of the device address entered previously is automatically displayed in the Select Device screen If a device address is invalid pressing ENT will not return to Device Monitor For 1 N communication is displayed Enter the station number as a 2 digit hexadecimal value Press specify the station number ...

Page 1087: ... 3 Press to switch the display type for values of devices Switches between DEC and HEX 4 Enter the value of device and press ENT Press CLR to delete the entered value of device Press CAN to stop entering the value of device The value of device is changed Dec Hex Dec Hex Dec Hex Dec Hex Dec Hex If a value of device is invalid pressing ENT will not return you to Device Monitor If the display type is...

Page 1088: ...device address Moves the focus up by one line Moves the focus down by one line Data Changes the value of the selected device address Press to display the Write Data Screen For details refer to Changing Value of Device on page 24 21 Del Deletes the selected device address Select Registers a selected device address Press to display the Select Device Screen For details refer to Device Address Registr...

Page 1089: ...er the desired line and press to display the Ladder Monitor and start the monitor from the specified line Moving the focus 1 The Ladder Monitor is displayed Use the Goto Screen Button the Goto Screen Command or the Maintenance Screen to display the Ladder Monitor 2 Press and to move the focus to the desired position Press and hold to repeatedly move the focus Displaying instruction parameters 1 Th...

Page 1090: ...ice addresses are as follows Device type one character Address four characters Bit position two characters For details refer to Chapter 27 1 2 Control Device Addresses on page 27 4 and Chapter 27 2 2 Control Device Addresses on page 27 12 MCS MCR JMP END LABEL LJMP LCAL and LRET instructions are displayed in one line on the screen The instructions other than those listed above display the instruct...

Page 1091: ...d data types are as follows W word I integer D double word L long F float Parameter Shows the configuration details for the instruction OPCODE MOV W S1 D0000 1234 D1 R D0123 1234 REP 03 99 Parameter Label Instruction Data type Moves the focus right by one line Moves the focus left by one line Moves the focus up by one line Moves the focus down by one line Toggles the contact state for the selected...

Page 1092: ...2 Monitoring on the Touch 24 26 SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual ...

Page 1093: ...h and save it to an external memory 1 2 Project Data Transfer Procedures The following methods can be used to upload or download project data between the Touch and an external memory inserted in the Touch Using the USB Autorun function F For details refer to Chapter 26 2 USB Autorun Function on page 26 18 Using Key Buttons Multi Buttons or Multi commands F For details refer to 1 4 Using Key Button...

Page 1094: ...in the Project group click the Download icon The Download dialog box is displayed 4 Check that Communication Settings is External Memory and then click Download The Select Drive dialog box is displayed Computer USB flash drive To USB Port When the project data has not been saved after it was opened a save confirmation message is displayed Click OK to save the project data and display the Download ...

Page 1095: ...mory Network Displays the Network Drive Assignment dialog box You can specify a drive on the network External Memory Folder Specify the folder where the project data is to be downloaded Click to display the Project Settings dialog box You can specify an External Memory Folder as the download destination 6 Click Yes The Download dialog box is displayed and the project data is now being saved When t...

Page 1096: ...ect data for transfer is created in the External Memory Folder on an external memory For details about the created data folder and file structure refer to Chapter 26 External Memory Devices on page 26 1 If the folder or file structure on the External Memory Folder is modified the Touch and WindO I NV3 will not be usable ...

Page 1097: ...e the Multi Command configured with Download Project under Data Transfer on the Key Browser Upload 1 Insert a USB flash drive in the Touch 2 Press the Key Button or Multi Button or execute the Multi Command configured with Upload Project under Data Transfer on the Key Browser Allocate a Key Button Multi Button or Multi Command configured with the project transfer function to the Touch F For detail...

Page 1098: ...te confirmation message When using the project transfer function make the project data file name half width alphanumeric characters While running the project transfer function using a Key Button Multi Button or Multi Command if a data transfer function project transfer is initiated the only function that will work is the currently running function If two or more data transfer functions are configu...

Page 1099: ...External Memory Tab on page 14 16 Operation Log output F Refer to Chapter 15 External Memory Tab on page 15 14 Reading writing recipe data F Refer to Chapter 18 Recipe Function on page 18 1 1 2 Specifications The specifications of supported USB flash drives are as follows Max capacity 32 GB Compatible with FAT16 or FAT32 formatted USB flash drives The maximum file size that can be read and written...

Page 1100: ...me Batch ALMHTO CSV Real time ALMHTA CSV Alarm Log data DATALOG user defined CSV Default file name Batch LOGO CSV Real time LOGA CSV Data Log data corresponds to the data number OPERATIONLOG user defined CSV Default file name Batch OPLOGO CSV Real time OPLOGA CSV Operation Log data RECIPE user defined CSV Default RCP CSV Recipe data corresponds to the recipe number NVDATA Project name ZNV Project ...

Page 1101: ...terface on the Touch Connect an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port on the computer and the Ethernet interface on the Touch Communication settings Follow these procedures to configure the communication device and port to allow reading and writing to the USB flash drive inserted in the Touch 1 On the Home tab in the Project group click Comm Setup The Communication Settings dialog box appears 2 Sele...

Page 1102: ...to the USB flash drive inserted in the Touch Touch resumes running when files have been downloaded Files to External Memory while running This function downloads files to the USB flash drive inserted in the Touch without stopping the Touch 3 Specify the file name and then click Open A confirmation message appears 4 Click Yes The External Memory Maintenance dialog box appears and the file download ...

Page 1103: ... destination folder in the Path box 5 Click OK The External Memory Maintenance dialog box appears and the data upload begins A message box appears when the data upload is complete The following kinds of data can be uploaded Alarm Log Data Data Log Data Operation Log Data Recipe Files Click to display the Select a Folder dialog box and specify the destination folder for uploading After starting Win...

Page 1104: ...ry Maintenance click Files to External Memory or Files to External Memory while running The Open dialog box appears 2 Specify the file name and then click Open This procedure saves the data to the External Memory Folder on the USB flash drive inserted in the Touch Uploading This procedures shows how to upload specified data from the External Memory Folder on the external memory for the currently r...

Page 1105: ...ed under the Communication with Configure the communication settings as follows before downloading or uploading 1 On the Home tab in the Project group click Comm Setup The Communication Settings dialog box appears 2 Under Communicate with select External Memory and then click OK Downloading This procedure shows how to download the project data to the External Memory Folder on the USB flash drive 1...

Page 1106: ...ve Assignment dialog box appears This dialog box allows you to specify a drive on the network External Memory Folder Specify the destination folder for downloading project data Click to display the Project Settings dialog box This procedure allows you to specify the External Memory Folder on the external memory where the download will be stored 5 Click Yes The Download dialog box appears and the f...

Page 1107: ...b in the Project group click Upload The Select External Memory Folder dialog box appears 2 Select the external memory drive and then click OK The Upload dialog box appears External Memory Folder Displays the folder specified in the Project tree described next Project Specify the destination folder for uploading the project data Drive Specify the drive assigned as the external memory drive Network ...

Page 1108: ... The Upload dialog box appears and the file upload begins When the upload is complete a completion message appears 4 Click OK 5 Click Close on the Upload dialog box A confirmation message appears indicating the project will be opened 6 Click OK The uploaded project opens ...

Page 1109: ...he file output buffer to the USB flash drive is as follows Within three minutes of an output event to the USB flash drive When the HMI Special Internal Relay LSM18 changes to 1 When switching to the Top Page in the System Mode When downloading uploading project data When the Access Pause button is pressed In the following events WindO I NV3 writes the data in the file output buffer to the USB flas...

Page 1110: ...roject The Project Settings dialog box appears 2 On the External Memory tab enter the desired name in the External Memory Folder text box Use only alphabetic characters A to Z and numbers 0 to 9 and the maximum number is 8 characters 3 Click OK It is not possible to change folder names and file names other than the External Memory Folder The External Memory Folder is named HGDATA01 if project data...

Page 1111: ...pecify the range of files to delete by checking the appropriate items All Alarm Log files Deletes all files in the ALARMLOG folder All Data Log files Deletes all files in the DATALOG folder All Operation Log files Deletes all files in the OPERATIONLOG folder Trigger Device Specifies the bit device or the bit of a word device to serve as condition for deleting files Click to display the Device Addr...

Page 1112: ...the external memory has been formatted the display returns to the External Memory Maintenance dialog box 3 Click Close Always format the USB flash drive before using it In Communication Settings Communicate with must be set to Touch in advance and Port must be set to USB in advance For details on how to configure these settings refer to Communication settings on page 26 3 If security is enabled fo...

Page 1113: ...splayed when USB flash drive 1 is inserted On the Home tab in the Screens group click the arrow under New and then click Popup Screen The Screen Properties dialog box is displayed 2 Change the settings on each tab as necessary and then click OK 3 Arrange the object on the editing screen as required 4 On the Configuration tab in the System Setup group click Project The Project Settings dialog box a...

Page 1114: ...ty is enabled for the Popup Screen that is displayed by the USB Popup Screen function the Password Screen is displayed Select the user name and enter the password For details refer to 2 4 USB Autorun Function Security on page 26 26 When the USB Popup Screen function is enabled if the USB flash drive contains a definition file hgauto ini for use with the USB Autorun function both functions will app...

Page 1115: ...ltiple USB flash drives cannot be used at the same time Before turning off the power to the Touch or before removing the USB flash drive set HMI Special Internal Relay LSM18 to 1 and check that HMI Special Internal Relay LSM19 is 0 The message Saving USB flash drive appears while reading or until writing stops To resume reading writing to the USB flash drive re insert it If an unusable USB flash d...

Page 1116: ... project 2 USB Autorun Function USB Autorun Function Menu Screen USB flash drive Change Program Copy Program Run All Cancel Confirmation Press the button USB Autorun definition file hgauto ini Touch This allows operators to change project files without using a computer These defined processes are called commands and the file that contains the details of the command and menu screen is called the US...

Page 1117: ...k OK For details refer to Chapter 3 3 9 Autorun Tab on page 3 41 When enabling the USB Autorun function using the Touch on the Top Page in the System Mode press Main Menu Initial Setting System Op and then press Autorun If the USB Autorun function of the Touch is not enabled the menu screen will not be displayed even if a USB flash drive is inserted into the Touch Once the USB Autorun function of ...

Page 1118: ...r USB flash drive USB Autorun definition file hgauto ini Save Computer USB flash drive Project file ZNV format USB flash drive Touch If the menu screen does not appear follow these troubleshooting tips Correct the problem and re insert the USB flash drive Cause USB Autorun definition file hgauto ini does not exist on the USB flash drive Solution Create a USB Autorun definition file and save it on ...

Page 1119: ...tton Touching Run All causes all commands defined in the USB Autorun definition file hgauto ini to execute one by one If security is enabled in the Touch project the Password Screen is displayed Select the user name and enter the password For details refer to 2 4 USB Autorun Function Security on page 26 26 Do not remove the USB flash drive while command is executing Change Program Function The fol...

Page 1120: ...and definitions for each section AUTORUN section required Specify the number of command items enable disable the buttons and the display language to use AUTORUN item 2 button_command Enable button_runall Enable language English COMMAND section required Specify the command to execute and its parameters Create buttons to execute the number of commands specified in the AUTORUN section from COMMAND_1 ...

Page 1121: ...n buttons for COMMAND_1 to COMMAND_5 Enable Enables the button Disable Disables the button If this item is left blank or contains an illegal value the Touch assumes Enable Specify whether to enable or disable the execution buttons for Run All Enable Enables the button Disable Disables the button If this item is left blank or contains an illegal value the Touch assumes Enable Specify the language t...

Page 1122: ...haracters per line is 512 single byte characters including line feed codes All the text on the line will be ignored if there are more than 512 single byte characters on the line Each item must be described as a single line If a line feed occurs before the end of the description all characters after the line feed are ignored The maximum size of the USB Autorun definition file hgauto ini is 512 KB T...

Page 1123: ...ays all button labels and messages in English COMMAND_1 Defines the command assigned to execution button COMMAND_1 This is the first command that executes when Run All is touched command PRO_DOWNLOAD Executes Download a project file src_path B FT_DEMO_1 ZNV Downloads the project file FT_DEMO_1 ZNV saved on the USB flash drive B to the Touch title Change Program Displays the text Change Program as ...

Page 1124: ...tion privileges by security groups With the Touch a password authenticated user account with the security group Administrator is necessary Password ENT User1 BS CLR OK A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Command Security Group Administrator Operator Reader Downloading a project file YES NO NO Uploading a project file YES NO NO If you press Close instead of enter...

Page 1125: ...W Variable 10 HMI Temporary Relay LBM R W 0 to 127 10 HMI Special Internal Relay LSM R W 0 to 63 10 HMI Timer Relay LTC R 0 to 31 10 R W stands for Read Write R W enables reading and writing of values whereas R enables reading only Address Function Part LSM0 Normally set to 1 LSM1 1 only on the second scan when Base Screen is switched It also operates when switching text group or user account or r...

Page 1126: ...ccess to USB flash drive If value is 0 the USB flash drive can be safely ejected LSM20 to 21 Reserved LSM22 This is the Operation Log function When data in excess of the amount that can be recorded in one operation occurs the value becomes 1 When it becomes 1 value does not become 0 until the Touch is reset or 0 is written LSM23 to 24 Reserved LSM25 Value is 1 while data is being written to USB fl...

Page 1127: ...w HMI Timer Relay LTC The HMI Timer is a bit unit device that can be changed to 1 in value of device switched by the Timer from Parts It can store 32 addresses 1 0 LSM0 1 0 LSM1 1 0 LSM2 1 0 LSM3 1 0 LSM4 1 0 LSM8 Processing 1st scan 1 0 LSM5 1 0 LSM12 2nd scan 3rd scan 4th scan 1st scan 2nd scan 3rd scan Popup Screen open Popup Screen close Power on Base Screen switch ...

Page 1128: ...on Internal Device Name Symbol R W Address Range Base Input I R 0 to 7 8 Output Q R W 0 to 3 8 Remote Input I R 40 to 75 80 to 115 120 to 155 8 Remote Output Q R W 40 to 61 80 to 101 120 to 141 8 Timer Bit T R 000 to 199 10 Counter Bit C R 000 to 199 10 Shift Register R R W 0 to 127 10 Internal Relay M R W 0 to 1277 10 1 Special Internal Relay M R W 8000 to 8177 10 1 R W stands for Read Write R W ...

Page 1129: ...elf maintained circuits using outputs also go off and are not restored when M8002 is turned off Cleared Cleared Write YES YES M8003 Carry Cy and Borrow Bw When a carry or borrow results from executing an addition or subtraction instruction M8003 turns on M8003 is also used for the bit shift and rotate instructions For the causes of carry CY and borrow BW they vary based on the selected programming...

Page 1130: ...r WSFT M8024 remains on when the Touch is powered up again Maintained Maintained Read YES M8025 Maintain Outputs While Ladder Program Operation Stopped Outputs are normally turned off when the ladder program operation is stopped M8025 is used to maintain the output statuses when the ladder program operation is stopped When the ladder program operation is stopped with M8025 turned on the output ON ...

Page 1131: ...leared Read YES M8083 Interrupt Input I4 Edge Cleared Cleared Read YES M8084 Interrupt Input I5 Edge Cleared Cleared Read YES M8085 to 8087 8090 Reserved M8091 Catch Input ON OFF Status When a rising or falling input edge is detected during a scan the input statuses of catch inputs Group 1 I0 through Group 6 I7 at the moment are set to M8090 through M8095 respectively without regard to the scan st...

Page 1132: ...t Greater Than Each bit turns ON in accordance with the results of the CMP Compare command and ICMP interval comparison command For CMP Compare command M8150 S1 S2 M8151 S1 S2 M8152 S1 S2 For ICMP interval comparison command M8150 S2 S1 M8151 S3 S2 M8152 S1 S2 S3 For details about comparison results of the CMP Compare and ICMP interval comparison commands refer to Ladder Editing in the SmartAXIS L...

Page 1133: ...ariable 10 HMI Temporary Register LBR R W 0 to 127 10 HMI Timer Current LTD R 0 to 31 10 HMI Special Data Register LSD R W 0 to 255 10 R W stands for Read Write R W enables reading and writing of values whereas R enables reading only Address Function Part LSD0 to 3 Reserved LSD4 Scan time Maximum value of the Touch msec LSD5 Screen switch response time msec LSD6 Read scan communication time msec L...

Page 1134: ...LSD35 USB flash drive available capacity upper word kB LSD36 USB flash drive full capacity lower word kB LSD37 USB flash drive full capacity upper word kB LSD38 Ladder program or FBD program processing time msec LSD39 to 48 Reserved LSD49 O I Link Slave station number LSD50 The sequence value of the message number or channel number if the alarm function is being used selected by the cursor in the ...

Page 1135: ...F H and are incremented the value becomes 0 When you reckon time by using LSD9 the time difference in 10 milliseconds units from the previous value can be calculated The range for the Year in LSD13 is 2000 to 2099 and reverts to 2000 after 2099 When 1 is written to LSD20 internal clock is updated by the contents of LSD21 to 26 Note that if there is even 1 incorrect data item in LSD21 to 26 the int...

Page 1136: ...ol R W Address Range Base Input WI R 0 10 Output WQ R W 0 10 Shift Register WM R W 0 to 112 2 10 Internal Relay WR R W 0 to 1260 1 10 Special Internal Relay WM R W 8000 to 8160 1 10 Timer Setting Value TP R W 000 to 199 10 Timer Count Value TC R 000 to 199 10 Counter Setting Value CP R W 000 to 199 10 Counter Count Value CC R 000 to 199 10 Data Register D R W 0000 to 1999 10 Special Data Register ...

Page 1137: ...8005 General Error Code SmartAXIS general error information is stored to D8005 When a general error occurs the bit corresponding to the error occurred turns on The general error and the program execution error can be cleared by writing 1 to the most significant bit of D8005 using a ladder program or FBD program For details refer to Chapter 30 2 1 General Error Codes on page 30 3 When error occurre...

Page 1138: ...minals are converted to digital values 0 to 1000 and stored to the corresponding special data registers For FBD a linear transformation can be configured for the analog input AI Even when a linear transformation is configured for AI the special data registers store the analog values 0 to 1000 before the linear transformation D8040 AI0 D8041 AI1 AI0 Every scan YES YES D8041 AI1 Every scan YES YES D...

Page 1139: ...0 The assignment of each analog input is as follows YES YES D8078 to 8109 Reserved D8110 to 8113 IP Address of the Connected Slave Special data registers used by remote I O For details refer to Chapter 12 4 2 Remote I O Master on page 12 47 IP Address of the Connected Slave 1 Each second YES YES D8114 to 8117 IP Address of the Connected Slave 2 Each second YES YES D8118 to 8121 IP Address of the C...

Page 1140: ...D8156 Analog input AI17 Every scan YES YES D8157 Remote I O Slave 2 Special data registers used by remote I O For details refer to Chapter 12 4 2 Remote I O Master on page 12 47 Connection Error Status When a communication error occurs YES YES D8158 Analog input AI20 Every scan YES YES D8159 Analog input AI21 Every scan YES YES D8160 Analog input AI22 Every scan YES YES D8161 Analog input AI23 Eve...

Page 1141: ...88 D8178 AI2 AQ2 D8179 AI3 AQ3 AI2 AQ2 Every scan YES YES D8179 AI3 AQ3 Every scan YES YES D8180 to 8185 Reserved D8186 Analog Input Output Value to the Analog Cartridge Port 2 For the analog input type The analog input values to the analog cartridges are converted to digital values and stored to the corresponding special data registers For the analog output type The analog output values to the an...

Page 1142: ...2 Word Devices 27 18 SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual ...

Page 1143: ...ntrol of brightness adjustment of the screen is displayed Adjusts the brightness of the screen Monochrome LCD models The control of brightness and contrast adjustment of the screen is displayed Adjusts the brightness and contrast of the screen Ladder Monitor Ladder is displayed and allows you to monitor ladder programs For details refer to Chapter 24 2 3 Ladder Monitor on page 24 23 The Ladder Mon...

Page 1144: ...els 2 Press or to adjust to your preferred brightness 1 Monochrome LCD models only Press and hold 3 or more seconds Touch To display the Maintenance Screen select the Enable Maintenance check box under the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box If a touch switch is placed in the upper left corner of the screen switching to the Maintenance Screen will not be possible Color LCD models Monochr...

Page 1145: ...ssing the Touch System Mode refer to 1 2 Displaying the Maintenance Screen on page 28 2 Item Descriptions See page Run Switches to Run Mode Page 28 9 Main Menu Displays the Main Menu Page 28 3 Item Descriptions See page Initial Setting Allows adjustment of settings relating to operation communication parameters and log data of the Touch Page 28 5 Clock Setting Allows setting of the internal clock ...

Page 1146: ... Initialize Retry Cycles Time Out Trans Wait Comm Driver Parameter1 Parameter2 Parameter3 Parameter4 O I Link Set1 O I Link Set2 O I Link RS232C RS422 485 Comm I F TP CP Change IP Address Default Gateway Misc Setting Ext IP Address Clock Setting Run System Info System System2 Font Top Page Self Diag Memory Display LCD Draw Brightness Backlight Buzzer Contrast Trace Fixed Points Sequent Touch Panel...

Page 1147: ...cklight To set a value enter the value using the Keypad and then press ENT Press CAN to cancel the entered value and display the currently set value Start Time This item sets the amount of time in minutes until communication with the external device starts after Touch power ON This can be used to synchronize boot times with the external device From the main menu press Initial Setting System Op and...

Page 1148: ...y the password input screen To enter a password use the arrow keys to move the cursor to a selected character and then press ENT Once the the password is entered move the cursor to OK and then press ENT to confirm the password entered To cancel changing the password move the cursor to CAN and then press ENT To clear the password input field move the cursor to CLR and then press ENT Autorun You hav...

Page 1149: ...unication driver menu screen To specify settings press the button to select a choice Comm Driver setting items vary based on the currently connected hardware For details about settings refer to the External Device Setup Manual If No External Devices are selected from the Communication Driver some settings cannot be modified O I Link From the Main Menu press Initial Setting and then O I Link to dis...

Page 1150: ... via TCP IP refer to Chapter 23 Using the online function for Ethernet communication on page 23 7 From the Main Menu press Initial Setting Comm I F and then Misc Setting Each press of CHG changes the property of the selected item Repeat this procedure until the desired properties are displayed Press ENT to apply the entered value Ext IP Address External Device IP Address Changes the IP addresses f...

Page 1151: ...m Info and then press System or System 2 to display the system information screen This screen displays information such as the Touch type number the type and version number of runtime system To return to the Main Menu press Main Menu at the top of the screen System From the Main Menu press System Info and then System Displays the following settings Touch type number MAC address Boot software versi...

Page 1152: ...u press Self Diag to display the self diagnosis screen Use this screen to run Touch internal self diagnosis To execute an operation press the corresponding button To return to the Main Menu press Main Menu at the top of the screen You need inspection jigs to run self diagnosis Self Diagnosis is a special screen for factory inspections Do not use without due reason ...

Page 1153: ... the product conform to your requirements and that no parts are missing or damaged due to accidents during transportation Chapter 29 SmartAXIS Specifications 1 Touch Name Pcs pack Touch Unit 1 Instruction Sheet 1 Mounting clips 2 Power plug Attached to the Touch 1 Communication I F plug Attached to the Touch 1 USB Cable Lock Pin 2 USB Clamp Band 2 ...

Page 1154: ...sink in 6pt Shared digital sink in analog in 2pt Transistor source out 4pt Analog out 2pt Light gray FT1A M14SA W Dark gray FT1A M14SA B Silver FT1A M14SA S 3 8inch TFT Color LCD Digital sink in 6pt Shared digital sink in analog in 2pt Relay out 4pt Light gray FT1A C12RA W Dark gray FT1A C12RA B Silver FT1A C12RA S Digital source in 6pt Shared digital sink in analog in 2pt Transistor sink out 4pt ...

Page 1155: ...ock 3 pin 4 Serial Interface Port RS232C RS422 485 Connector Terminal Block 9 pin 5 Ethernet Interface Ethernet IEEE802 3u 10BASE T 100BASE TX Connector RJ 45 6 USB Interface USB1 USB2 0 Device Connector Mini B 7 USB Interface USB2 USB1 1 External device Connector Type A 8 Output Terminal Q0 to Q3 Relay output 10A 9 Input Terminal I0 to I7 Digital input Analog input 1 2 5 4 3 6 7 8 9 ...

Page 1156: ...100BASE TX Connector RJ 45 6 USB Interface USB1 USB2 0 Device Connector Mini B 7 USB Interface USB2 USB1 1 External device Connector Type A 8 Output Terminal Q0 to Q3 AQ0 to AQ1 Transistor output analog output 9 Input Terminal I0 to I7 Digital input Analog input 10 Slot 1 Optional product analog cartridge expansion FC6A PJ2A FC6A PK2AV FC6A PK2AW FC6A PJ2CP 11 Slot 2 Optional product analog cartri...

Page 1157: ... of wires becoming disconnected Interface Specification RS232C RS422 485 Connector Detachable Terminal Block 9 pin Applicable cable RS232C AWG16 to AWG28 RS422 485 AWG16 to AWG28 Shielded twisted pair Stripped wire length 7 mm Solid wire Recommended ferrule AI 0 34 8 TQ For AWG22 For 1 wire AI 0 5 8 WH For AWG20 For 1 wire AI TWIN2 x 0 5 8 WH For AWG20 For 2 wires Phoenix Contact Tightening Torque...

Page 1158: ...6 For 1 wire AI TWIN 2 x 0 75 10GY For AWG18 For 2 wires Phoenix Contact Tightening Torque 0 5 to 0 6 N m Screwdriver SZS 0 6 x 3 5 Phoenix Contact Applicable cable AWG20 to AWG22 Stripped wire length 5 mm coating diameter φ2 6 mm or lower Solid wire Recommended ferrule AI 0 34 8 TQ For AWG22 For 1 wire AI 0 5 8 WH For AWG20 For 1 wire AI TWIN2 x 0 5 8 WH For AWG20 For 2 wires Phoenix Contact Tigh...

Page 1159: ... voltage current input device 9 RDB 5 SG 1 SD Port AI0 AI0 AI1 AI1 Analog voltage current input device I6 I7 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I0 2 wire Sensor DC IN Power supply terminal Q0 L Q1 L Q2 L Q3 L COM V L AQ0 AQ0 Analog voltage current input device AQ1 AQ1 Analog voltage current input device 9 RDB 5 SG 1 SD Port Analog voltage current input device Fuse Load I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I0 2 wire Sensor AI0 AI0 AI1 AI1 ...

Page 1160: ... 2 External Load for I O Interconnection Not needed Signal Determination Method Static Cable Length in compliance with EMC standards 3m Input Signal Type Voltage Input Input Points Terminal No Common Line Name 2 points in 1 common line I6 I7 internal terminal SG terminal for Port Input Range 0 to 10V DC Rated Input Current 0 3mA Input Impedance 78 0KΩ Digital Resolution 0 to 1 000 850 steps Data T...

Page 1161: ...V Voltage Input 16μA Current Input Type of Input Single ended input AD Conversion Sample Duration Time 2 msec max Sample Repetition Time 2 msec max Total Input System Transfer Time 3 msec filtering time scan time Voltage Input 12 msec filtering time scan time Current Input Input Error Maximum Error at 25 C 3 0 of full scale Temperature Coefficient 0 04 C of full scale Maximum Error 5 0 of full sca...

Page 1162: ...t circuit 56kΩ 22kΩ OV 24V DC Internal Circuit Source Input I0 to I5 Shared Digital Analog Input I6 I7 Input circuit 4 7kΩ 10kΩ 0V 24V DC 24V DC 47kΩ Internal Circuit Internal Circuit Input circuit 56kΩ 22kΩ 120kΩ 130kΩ 0V 0V 24V DC Sink Input I0 to I5 Shared Digital Analog Input I6 I7 Internal Circuit Input circuit 4 3kΩ 1 2kΩ OV 24V DC Internal Circuit Input circuit 56kΩ 22kΩ 120kΩ 130kΩ 0V 0V 2...

Page 1163: ...ea Input Current mA 0 2mA 0 37mA 0 06mA 0 3mA Input Voltage V DC No of Outputs Terminal No 4 Q0 to Q3 Output Type 1a contact Maximum Load Current 10A Minimum Switching Load 10 mA 5V DC reference value Initial Contact Resistance 100 mΩ max 1A 6V DC Electrical Life 100 000 operations min rated load 1 800 operations hour Mechanical Life 20 000 000 operations min no load 18 000 operations hour Rated L...

Page 1164: ... ON voltage 1V max Voltage between COM and output terminal when ON Maximum Inrush Current 1A Leakage Current 0 1 mA max Clamping Voltage 39V 1V Maximum Lamp Load 8W Inductive Load L R 10 ms 28 8V DC 1 Hz External Current Draw 100 mA max 24V DC Sink output power voltage at the V terminal Source output power voltage at the COM terminal Isolation Photocoupler isolated Status Display Device Monitor sc...

Page 1165: ...ge current output Output Range 0 to 10 V Voltage output 4 to 20 mA Current output Output Load Impedance 2 kΩ min Voltage output 500 Ω max Current output Load Type Resistance load Digital Resolution 0 to 1 000 10bit Output Value of LSB 10 mV Voltage output 16 μA Current output Data Type Binary data 0 to 1000 Monotonicity Yes Output Error Maximum Error at 25 C 0 3 of full scale Temperature Coefficie...

Page 1166: ... 95 RH No condensation Storage Temperature 20 to 60 C No freezing Storage Humidity 10 to 95 RH No condensation Altitude Operation 0 to 2 000m Transport 0 to 3 000m Pollution Degree 2 Corrosion Immunity Free from corrosive gases Rated Voltage 24V DC Power Consumption 9 2W max When USB2 is unused 5 8W max Power Voltage Range 20 4 to 28 8V DC Allowable Momentary Power Interruption 10 msec max Inrush ...

Page 1167: ...d LED White Backlight Life 2 50 000 hours nominal Touch Panel Switch Type Analog Resistive Film Operating Force 0 2 to 2 5 N Multiple Operations Impossible Life 1 000 000 operations User Memory 5MB Backup Battery 3 Lithium secondary battery Backup Duration Approx 30 days typical Operating temperature 25 C Charging Time Approx 15 hours for charging from 0 to 90 of full charge Battery Life 5 years i...

Page 1168: ...S Touch User s Manual 1 6 Dimensions FT1A 12RA Unit mm Cable Attached Dimensions Depending on the type of connection cable used the dimensions shown above will change The dimensions given here are intended for reference only ...

Page 1169: ...IS Specifications FT1A 14KA SA Unit mm Cable Attached Dimensions Depending on the type of connection cable used the dimensions shown above will change The dimensions given here are intended for reference only 77 0 65 5 116 0 4 0 54 0 58 9 104 5 50 15 30 20 ...

Page 1170: ...r conditioner to keep the ambient temperature within the rated temperature range The Touch is designed to install on a vertical plane so that natural air cooling is provided If you install it using any other orientation use forced air cooling or lower the ambient operating temperature Derating FT1A 12RA When using the Touch at an ambient temperature of 45 C or higher reduce the output current of e...

Page 1171: ...not be used 45ºC 20 4 to 28 8V DC Current output cannot be used Current output FC6A PK2AW cannot be used 45ºC 20 4 to 28 8V DC No restrictions No restrictions 40ºC If operating the FT1A 14KA 14SA in a high temperature environment reducing the brightness of the backlight can help to limit the temperature rise of internal components The relationship between ambient temperature and brightness is appr...

Page 1172: ...he mounting clips are tightened obliquely to the panel the Touch may fall off the panel When installing the Touch into a panel cut out make sure that the gasket is not twisted Especially when re installing take special care because any twists in the gasket will impair the waterproof characteristics Even in the panel thickness range there is a risk that the waterproof characteristics cannot be main...

Page 1173: ...e use of the Touch Orientation Operating Ambient Temperature no freezing FT1A M Monochrome LCD models FT1A C Color LCD models Vertical Vertical landscape Portrait 0 to 55 C 20 to 55 C Portrait Clockwise 0 to 50 C 20 to 50 C Portrait Counter Clockwise 0 to 55 C 20 to 55 C Horizontal 0 to 50 C 20 to 50 C When installing the Touch in a diagonal the limitations are same as a horizontal Confirm the vis...

Page 1174: ... the tabs of the cartridge cover pull the cartridge cover directly upward to remove it 2 Pay careful attention to the direction of the cartridge and attach it directly onto the unit Screwdriver insertion slot Cartridge cover Screwdriver insertion slot CAUTION Attach the cartridge directly onto the unit If the cartridge is attached when tilted it may be damaged or cause communication problems Cartr...

Page 1175: ...rge current cables Follow all the procedures and precautions when wiring the Touch Separate the Touch power supply wiring from the power lines of I O devices and motor equipment Ground the functional earth terminal to make sure of correct operation Do not touch the terminals during communication Doing so may result in electrical shock When keeping power ON terminals connected to external devices m...

Page 1176: ...ively If the computer has a 2 pin power plug without ground lead follow the procedure below when connect the Touch to the computer 1 Pull out the power plug of the computer from the AC outlet 2 Connect the Touch to the computer 3 Insert the power plug of the computer into the AC outlet 1 10 USB Cable Lock Pin Attachment When using the USB interface USB1 USB2 attach the USB cable lock pin to preven...

Page 1177: ...SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual 29 25 1 Touch 29 SmartAXIS Specifications Fasten the USB clamp band without the space between the clamp part and it and the inclination ...

Page 1178: ...dampened with neutral detergent or alcoholic solvent Do not use solvents such as thinner ammonia strong acid and strong alkaline Terminals Connectors Check the terminals and connectors to make sure of no loose screws incomplete insertion or disconnected lines Mounting Clips Make sure that all mounting clips and screws are tightened sufficiently If the mounting clips are loose tighten the screw to ...

Page 1179: ...creen appears 2 Press and at the bottom the Adjust Brightness Contrast Screen to adjust the contrast to the optimal setting 3 Press to close the Adjust Brightness Contrast Screen To adjust the brightness and contrast in the System Mode use and located at the bottom of the Top Page Color LCD models Monochrome LCD models Color LCD models Monochrome LCD models Top Page Color LCD models Top Page Monoc...

Page 1180: ...uch Panel Adjust Screen is displayed 3 Press the center of the then the position of the symbol changes one after another Press five symbols sequentially 4 When normally recognized the confirmation screen of 2 is restored At step 3 when pressing a point away from the center of the a recognition error will result Then the returns to the initial position then repeat the step of 3 again Top Page Color...

Page 1181: ...nalog Cartridge Name Pcs pack Cartridge 1 Instruction Sheet 1 Cartridge type Inputs outputs Type Type No Analog Output Cartridge Output 2 Voltage output 0 to 10 V FC6A PK2AV Output 2 Current output 4 to 20 mA FC6A PK2AW Analog Input Cartridge Input 2 Voltage input 0 to 10 V Current input 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA FC6A PJ2A Input 2 Thermocouple input K J R S B E T N C Resistance thermometer input Pt100...

Page 1182: ...bit 4 096 increments 12bit LSB Output Value 2 44 mV 0 to 10 V 3 91 µA 4 to 20 mA Data Format in Application 0 4095 0 to 10 V 0 4095 4 to 20 mA Monotonicity Yes Yes Open Current Loop Cannot be detected Noise Resistance Maximum Temporary Deviation during Electrical Noise Tests 4 0 of FS max 4 0 of FS max Recommended Cable Shielded twisted pair Crosstalk 1 LSB max 1 LSB max Isolation None None Effect...

Page 1183: ...tion Time 0 5 of FS 0 5 of FS Non linearity 0 01 of FS 0 01 of FS Maximum Error 1 0 of FS 1 0 of FS Data Digital Resolution 4 096 increments 12bit Pt100 10500 14bit Pt1000 8000 13bit Ni100 2400 12bit Ni1000 2400 12bit K 15000 14bit J 12000 14bit R 17600 15bit S 17600 15bit B 18200 15bit E 10000 14bit T 6000 13bit N 15000 14bit C 23150 15bit LSB Input Value 2 44 mV 0 10 V 4 88 µA 0 to 20 mA 3 91 µA...

Page 1184: ...2 Analog Cartridge 29 32 SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual 2 5 Dimensions Unit mm 2 6 Installation Refer to Chapter 29 1 8 Attaching Cartridges FT1A 14KA SA only on page 29 22 44 6 34 8 12 5 17 8 ...

Page 1185: ... damaged When there is a risk of malfunction due to noise use a shielded cable for the wiring and connect both ends of the shield to the FG FC6A PK2AV FC6A PK2AW FC6A PJ2A FC6A PJ2CP Analog voltage input device 0 10 V OUT1 NC Analog voltage input device 0 10 V OUT0 NC Analog current input device 0 20 mA 4 20 mA OUT0 NC Analog current input device 0 20 mA 4 20 mA OUT1 NC Analog current output devic...

Page 1186: ...2 Analog Cartridge 29 34 SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual ...

Page 1187: ... lines and the communication settings During 1 N communications the port number of the external device on which the Communication error has occurred Device range error The data is written to the device with the address out of the range The number of devices exceeds the limitation Check the device settings No USB flash drive exists No USB flash drive inserted when the unit attempted to access the U...

Page 1188: ...the Interface settings are not correct Modify settings using the Communication Interface tab of the Project Settings dialog box before downloading Network off line This error message is only displayed when O I Link is being used See the External Device Setup Manual for details TP CP The control device timer or counter preset value was modified Press Main Menu Initial Setting and then TP CP Change ...

Page 1189: ...timer indicates an error Clear the error code using WindLDR If this error occurs frequently the Touch has to be replaced 2 3 Reserved 4 Timer Counter Preset Value Sum Check Error The execution data of timer counter preset values is corrupted The timer counter preset values are initialized to the values of the ladder program automatically Note that changed preset values are cleared and that the ori...

Page 1190: ...o the ladder program as default but it is also possible to stop operation and turn off outputs using the Function Area Settings on WindLDR M0000 S D8005 15 R M0000 1 2 Error Items Operating Status Output Checked at Power failure Stop OFF Any time Watchdog timer error Stop OFF Any time Program ROM CRC error Stop OFF Starting operation TIM CNT preset value sum check error Maintained Maintained When ...

Page 1191: ...n LJMP LCAL or DJNZ is not found 16 PID instruction execution error 18 Attempt was made to execute an instruction that cannot be used in an interrupt program Refer to Chapter 3 4 9 Interrupt Input on page 3 74 19 Attempt was made to execute an instruction that is not available for the external device 21 DECO has S1 exceeding 255 22 BCNT has S2 exceeding 256 23 ICMP has S1 S3 25 BCDLS has S2 exceed...

Page 1192: ...ecuting the download 3 2 When the Backlight is OFF and the Buzzer Sounds If you fail to download the runtime system to Touch the backlight may turn to OFF and a buzzer may sound continuously every second even after the power has been turned off and on again If this happens rectify the situation by doing the following Download the project and the runtime system by using WindO I NV3 via USB cable Wh...

Page 1193: ...vice addresses are incorrect Correct the ladder program or FBD program Output does not turn on and off The output circuit in the Touch is damaged Replace the Touch Touch output connection is incorrect Correctly connect the output Ladder program or FBD program cannot be stopped The stop or reset input is designated in the Function Area Settings Set 1 to the designated input The designated stop or r...

Page 1194: ...3 Handling Problems 30 8 SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual ...

Page 1195: ...0x8B 181 0xB5 223 0xDF 014 0x0E 056 0x38 098 0x62 140 0x8C 182 0xB6 224 0xE0 015 0x0F 057 0x39 099 0x63 141 0x8D 183 0xB7 225 0xE1 016 0x10 058 0x3A 100 0x64 142 0x8E 184 0xB8 226 0xE2 017 0x11 059 0x3B 101 0x65 143 0x8F 185 0xB9 227 0xE3 018 0x12 060 0x3C 102 0x66 144 0x90 186 0xBA 228 0xE4 019 0x13 061 0x3D 103 0x67 145 0x91 187 0xBB 229 0xE5 020 0x14 062 0x3E 104 0x68 146 0x92 188 0xBC 230 0xE6...

Page 1196: ...ts These graphics can be used as the outline of parts Example Bit Button Type Selects the category of graphics OFF ON Displays the graphic when OFF or ON Click ON or OFF to switch the graphics displayed on the list Picture List Displays the list of registered graphics Select the graphic to use as the outline of the part OK Closes the View Browser and sets the selected graphic to the caller 2 View ...

Page 1197: ...s all the colors assignable to the Color button Clicking Less shows only the basic colors assignable to the Color button TMC This feature allows use of the text color specified in Text Manager Click this button to use the text color specified in Text Manager The TMC button appears on the Color Palette only if the Use Text Manager check box is selected Color Palette Types The type of color palette ...

Page 1198: ...ackground colors The selected pattern is applied to the foreground color The background color is visible through the unpainted parts of the foreground color Patterns These patterns are available on WindO I NV3 1 None can only be applied to drawing objects Selecting None is the same as not applying any color at all 4 Pattern Palette Pattern buttons Pattern buttons Foreground color Background color ...

Page 1199: ...of the Align Text Horizontal and Align Text Vertical properties Align Text Vertical 5 Text Alignment Align Text Horizontal Left Center Right Center Left Align Text Vertical Top Center Center Top Bottom Top Aligns the text along the top edge Center Center Top Centers the text vertically in the center Bottom Aligns the text along the bottom edge Aligns text along top edge Centers text in the middle ...

Page 1200: ...ight edge Center Left Centers the line containing the most number of characters and then aligns the other lines to the left end of that line Aligns along left edge Centers text in the middle Aligns along right edge Aligns to left end of line with most characters Centers line with most characters If Align Text Horizontal is set to Center Left Align Text Vertical will automatically be set to Center ...

Page 1201: ...left edge Centers text in the middle Aligns along right edge Take note of these points when the Vertical Writing check box is selected When there is a mixture of double byte and single byte characters the half width characters are left aligned Dashes are displayed horizontally Symbols representing voiced and semi voiced sounds of single byte characters are shown as follows Aligned to left edge Hor...

Page 1202: ...al data register D8024 scan time maximum value 6 2 Executing Program Instructions During the scan time the ladder program is executed sequentially from the top to the bottom except when interrupt programs are executed One scan time of a ladder program is approximately equal to the total of execution time of each instruction For the instruction execution times refer to 6 4 Execution Times for Instr...

Page 1203: ...L D D 1 8 83 0n NSET F D D 1 8 83 0n NRS W I D D D 16 5 NRS D L D D D 732 5 NRS F D D D 732 5 XCHG D D 5 1 TCCST W D T 4 81 TCCST D D T 85 5 CMP W I D D M 47 0 CMP D L D D M 127 5 CMP F D D M 127 5 ICMP D D D M 169 5 LC W I D D 5 0 LC D L D D 86 5 LC F D D 86 5 ADD W I M M D 86 5 D D D 47 3 ADD D L M M D 166 3 D D D 167 3 ADD F D D D 171 9 SUB W I M M D 86 5 D D D 47 3 SUB D L M M D 166 3 D D D 16...

Page 1204: ...RET DJNZ IOREF 46 8 HSCRF 46 8 DI 90 3 EI 54 1 XYFS CVXTY CVYTX AVRG W I S3 10 6 38 AVRG D L S3 10 49 5 AVRG F S3 10 55 1 DTML DTIM DTMH 60 2 DTMS 63 0 TTIM 60 3 RAD F F 143 9 DEG F F 143 9 SIN COS F F 161 1 TAN F F 149 1 ASIN ACOS F F 618 9 ATAN F F 616 5 LOGE LOG10 F F 206 0 EXP F F 172 5 POW F F 191 0 FIFOF 129 0 FIEX 129 0 Instruction Device and Condition Execution Time μs FOEX 129 0 NDSRC W I...

Page 1205: ...8 SFR 8 SFRN 8 CC 8 CC 8 DC 8 DC 8 MCS 4 MCR 4 JMP 4 JEND 4 END 4 Basic Instruction Qty of Bytes When not using data registers Using data registers Advanced Instruction Qty of Bytes NOP 4 MOV MOVN 12 to 16 IMOV IMOVN 16 IBMV IBMVN 16 to 24 BMOV 12 to 16 NSET 12 to 1 540 NRS 12 to 20 XCHG 12 to 16 TCCST 12 to 16 CMP 16 to 24 ICMP 16 to 28 LC 12 to 20 ADD SUB MUL DIV 16 to 24 INC DEC 8 ROOT 12 to 20...

Page 1206: ...to 20 AVRG 16 to 24 DTML DTIM DTMH DTMS 16 to 20 TTIM 8 to 12 RAD 12 to 16 DEG 12 to 16 SIN 12 to 16 COS 12 to 16 TAN 12 to 16 ASIN 12 to 16 ACOS 12 to 16 ATAN 12 to 16 LOGE 12 to 16 LOG10 12 to 16 EXP 12 to 16 POW 12 to 24 FIFOF 20 to 24 FIEX 12 FOEX 12 NDSRC 16 to 24 TADD 16 to 20 TSUB 16 to 20 HOUR 16 to 24 HTOS 12 to 16 STOH 12 to 16 SCRPT 12 to 16 PID 112 Advanced Instruction Qty of Bytes ...

Page 1207: ...ll of the FBs connected to the output FB digital output FB or internal relay FB are executed sequentially from the input FBs The FBD program processing time in one scan is approximately equal to the total of execution time of each FB For the execution time of each FB refer to 7 4 FB Execution Time on page A 14 7 3 Breakdown of Scan End Processing Time After processing the FBD program the Touch pro...

Page 1208: ...IMD 74 6 Off delay Count Up Timer TIMOU 75 0 Off delay Count Down Timer TIMOD 75 0 On off delay Timer TIMCU 77 4 Single Shot Pulse SPULS 74 8 Dual Timer DTIM 72 2 Random Pulse Output RPULS 95 2 Counter Adding Counter CNT W Word 75 0 D Double word 152 0 Up Down Selection Reversible Counter CUD W Word 75 6 D Double word 126 8 Hour Meter HOUR 94 6 Shift Register Shift Register SFR 50 8 Data Compariso...

Page 1209: ...the FBD program The number of Block B is the number of FBs that use blocks B in the program The number of Timer T and Counter C is the total of devices used in the timer FB and counter FB These are not the number of timer FBs and counter FBs Maximum size of FBD program 38 000 bytes Maximum number of blocks timers and counters that can be used in the FBD program Block B 1 000 Timer T 200 Counter C ...

Page 1210: ...uth Table TRUTH 16 1 Timer On delay Count Up Timer TIMU 8 T 1 On delay Count Down Timer TIMD 8 1 Off delay Count Up Timer TIMOU 12 1 Off delay Count Down Timer TIMOD 12 1 On off delay Timer TIMCU 12 2 Single Shot Pulse SPULS 12 1 Dual Timer DTIM 12 3 Random Pulse Output RPULS 12 3 Counter Adding Counter CNT W 12 C 1 CNT D 12 2 Up Down Selection Reversible Counter CUD W 16 3 CUD D 16 6 Hour Meter H...

Page 1211: ...ecial internal relays inputs and outputs do not affect the FBD program size or the number of used devices I1 I Input Q0 Q Output B1 WEEK Weekly Timer 24 Number of tabs 2 1 0 0 T0 DTIM Dual Timer 12 0 3 0 B2 OR Logical OR 12 1 0 0 Total 48 Program size 2 3 0 Block number FB Size Qty of Bytes Number of Used devices Block B Timer T Counter C I1 I Input Inputs analog inputs and internal relays do not ...

Page 1212: ...cessary to install WindO I NV3 If you connect Touch to the computer before installing the driver an error message will appear prompting you to install the driver software In this case clear the error and install the driver The USB interface supports both the 64 bit and 32 bit editions of Windows 7 and the 32 bit edition of Windows Vista It does not support the 64 bit edition of Windows Vista Touch...

Page 1213: ...nd Maintenance System and then Device Manager If the User Account Control dialog box is displayed click Continue 3 Right click on IDEC HG Series under Other devices then click Update Driver Software If connecting the Touch to a computer running Windows 7 32 bit edition and IDEC HG Series is not shown under Other devices check Ports COM LPT If IDEC USB CDC ACM XXXX XXXX is the port name is shown th...

Page 1214: ...a the 64 bit edition of Windows 7 or Search automatically for updated driver software if using the 32 bit edition of Windows 7 If using the 32 bit edition of Windows 7 go to step 8 5 Click Browse next to Search for driver software in this location 32 bit edition of Windows 7 64 bit edition of Windows 7 Windows Vista ...

Page 1215: ... then click OK 7 Click Next The USB driver is located in these folders on the Automation Organizer Disk DVD ROM Windows 7 64 bit edition Driver HG3G Win7 64 bit Windows 7 32 bit edition and Windows Vista Driver HG3G WinVISTA_7 32 bit The USB driver may also be downloaded from the website http www idec com ...

Page 1216: ...8 USB Driver A 22 SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual 8 Click Install this driver software anyway The USB driver installation begins 9 Click Close IDEC USB CDC ACM appears if the USB driver installs properly ...

Page 1217: ... from Device Manager Follow these steps to delete all USB driver files to uninstall it completely then reinstall it 1 Launch Windows Explorer 2 Click Computer C Windows and then inf 3 Enter IDEC in the search box The file oem inf denotes a number will appear If the file extension is not displayed change the display settings as follows 1 Click Organize Folder and Search Options The Folder Options d...

Page 1218: ...ile Access Denied dialog box appears 5 Click Continue 6 This will reinstall the USB driver If Windows cannot find oem inf change the settings as follows 1 Click Organize and then click Folder and Search Options The Folder Options dialog box is displayed 2 On the Search tab click Always search file names and contents under What to search 3 Click OK ...

Page 1219: ...pplied and the USB port on the computer computer should be on A message Found New Hardware appears followed by the Found New Hardware Wizard 2 Select No not this time and then click Next 3 Select Install the software automatically Recommended and then click Next The Hardware Installation dialog box is displayed Touch Computer USB cable A plug Mini B plug To USB port To USB interface ...

Page 1220: ...er installation begins 5 Click Finish IDEC USB CDC ACM will appear if the USB driver installs properly If the Hardware Installation dialog box is not displayed and the installation aborts check the Driver Signing Options For details refer to Changing driver signing options on page A 27 ...

Page 1221: ...ialog box is displayed 2 Click Driver Signing on the Hardware tab 3 Select Warn under the label What action do you want Windows to take and then click OK 4 Click OK on the System Properties dialog box 5 Click Close on the Control Panel If Block is selected the Hardware Installation dialog box is not displayed and installation stops To reinstall the USB driver disconnect the USB cable from the USB ...

Page 1222: ...box is displayed 2 Click Device Manager on the Hardware tab 2 Click Ports COM LPT If IDEC USB CDC ACM XXXX XXXX is the port name is displayed as the device name the USB driver is already installed and the computer recognizes the Touch The device name will disappear if the USB cable is disconnected or the Touch power is turned off When the Touch power is turned on and the USB cable is connected the...

Page 1223: ...anizer Updater dialog box 2 35 Autorun Tab 3 41 Auto Setup dialog box Alarm Log Settings 13 18 Data Log Settings 14 21 Available Data 2 2 FBD program 12 45 Ladder program 12 29 Available Updates 2 35 B Background Colors A 4 Backlight color 4 15 Backlight OFF 4 16 Bar Chart 10 1 Base Screen 4 14 Basic Instruction 12 14 A 11 Batch Alarm Log Function 13 6 Alarm Log Settings 13 21 Data Log Settings 14...

Page 1224: ...ns Driver Network Settings Dialog Box 3 35 Compatible USB Bar Code Readers 22 73 Completed Device 22 27 Conditional branching 20 14 Configuration 2 45 Confirmed 13 3 Connect Touch to a Computer 23 4 Connection Diagram for User Communication 22 73 Connection Settings 3 104 Connection Status 12 48 Constant 20 21 Contents Tab 3 44 Control Device Addresses Bit Devices 27 4 Word Devices 27 12 Control D...

Page 1225: ... 36 DM Link Communication 22 4 Docking 2 50 Download 3 108 Download Data 23 13 Download Dialog Box 23 13 Downloading 23 11 Downloading files Downloader 26 6 USB flash drive 26 4 Downloading Files to an External Memory Inserted in the Touch 23 16 Downloading Project Data USB flash drive 26 7 Downloading Project Data to the Touch 23 11 Downloading Project Files 25 5 Draw 20 19 Drawing Objects 5 2 Dr...

Page 1226: ...te 11 4 Calendar 9 131 Change User Account 21 32 Character Input 9 25 Data Log Settings 14 14 Global Script 20 12 Goto Screen Button 7 37 Goto Screen Command 11 20 Key Button 7 51 Line Chart 10 21 Message Display 9 56 Message Switching Display 9 72 Meter 10 50 Multi Button 7 70 Multi Command 11 33 Multi State Lamp 8 16 New User Account 21 32 Numerical Display 9 116 Numerical Input 9 3 Operation Lo...

Page 1227: ...ltage 30 2 M Maintenance Screen 28 1 Master IP Address 23 9 Master Receive Timeout 12 46 Maximum Number of Parts 4 27 Message Display 9 53 Message Switching Display 9 70 Message Tab 9 74 Meter 10 48 Minimize the Ribbon 2 41 Minimum System Requirements 2 1 Mod 7 19 7 22 7 74 11 10 11 13 11 36 Mode 2 54 Momentary 7 2 7 5 7 18 7 22 7 70 11 1 11 4 11 10 11 12 Monitor Function 24 1 Monitor Mode 1 6 Mon...

Page 1228: ...ts 2 43 Parts List 2 61 Password Input 21 36 Password Screen 21 37 Pattern Palette A 4 Patterns A 4 Peak charts 10 3 Pen Device Tab Line Chart 10 29 Pen Log Tab Line Chart 10 27 Pen Recorder 10 22 Picture 5 2 6 23 Picture Display 9 40 Picture Manager 2 27 Picture Name Setting dialog box 2 33 Picture Tab 3 10 Pie 6 15 Pie Chart 10 39 10 42 Pilot Lamps 8 1 Plate Color 9 66 PLC Link Communication 22 ...

Page 1229: ...R Range Tab 10 54 Reader 21 4 Real Time Alarm Log Function 13 6 Alarm Log Settings 13 22 Data Log Settings 14 18 Data Structure and Output Example Alarm Log Settings 13 33 Data Structure and Output Example Data Log Settings 14 37 Data Structure and Output Example Operation Log Settings 15 17 Operation Log Settings 15 16 Receive RXD Command BCC Block Check Code 22 62 Constant Character 22 50 Consta...

Page 1230: ...elector Switch 7 94 Set 7 1 7 4 7 18 7 21 7 73 7 74 11 1 11 4 11 10 11 12 11 35 11 36 Set Reset 7 73 11 35 Set ON OFF Data 7 74 11 36 Set Slave No 23 9 Setting Conditional Expressions 2 64 Setting the External Memory Folder 26 12 Setting user communication for a communication interface 22 8 Shape Style 2 48 Shapes 5 2 6 1 Shift Register FB 12 43 Show Below the Ribbon 2 40 Show script error 3 20 Sh...

Page 1231: ...Write 11 6 Calendar 9 137 Character Input 9 32 Global Script 20 13 Goto Screen Button 7 44 Goto Screen Command 11 22 Key Button 7 58 Line Chart 10 34 Message Display 9 63 Multi Button 7 85 Multi Command 11 43 Numerical Display 9 123 Numerical Input 9 14 Picture Display 9 48 Pilot Lamp 8 9 Potentiometer 7 114 Script Command 11 28 Selector Switch 7 104 Timer 11 49 Word Button 7 30 Word Write 11 15 T...

Page 1232: ... 9 118 Numerical Input 9 8 Picture Display 9 46 Pie Chart 10 44 Pilot Lamp 8 5 Potentiometer 7 112 Selector Switch 7 101 Word Button 7 26 W Watch Dog 3 22 Watchdog timer error 30 3 30 4 Watchdog Timer Setting 3 98 Week Programmer FB 12 44 When a USB flash drive is inserted a popup window is automatically displayed 26 15 WindO I NV3 2 1 WindO I NV3 Options dialog box 2 57 Window 2 48 2 50 Windows F...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for SmartAXIS Touch FT1A Series

Brand: Zolix Instruments Pages: 22

Brand: Samson Pages: 92

Brand: Jafar Pages: 10

Brand: Paratec Pages: 8

Brand: J+J Pages: 33

Brand: Patron Pages: 36

SYSMAC C500-NC222-E

Brand: Omron Pages: 164

Brand: M-system Pages: 3

FX-COMM4NDER MFX3203

Brand: Magicfx Pages: 16

Brand: TUYA Pages: 28

MultiLoad II EXL

Brand: Toptech Pages: 83

Brand: Winbond Pages: 85

Brand: HEROSE Pages: 92

Brand: Inkel Pages: 12

Brand: tams elektronik Pages: 20

Brand: Aurora Scientific Pages: 21

Brand: Clare Controls Pages: 3

Brand: Swegon Pages: 11

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands